Ibm Infoprint 6500 Users Manual IBM_UM_6500_Ethernet_177655A

6500 to the manual a5fcfa45-3cfc-4d89-a5b6-258def6b4f68

2015-02-02

: Ibm Ibm-Infoprint-6500-Users-Manual-431748 ibm-infoprint-6500-users-manual-431748 ibm pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 398

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Infoprint 6500 Series Line Matrix Printers

Ethernet Interface User’s Manual

G550-0440-00

Infoprint 6500 Series Line Matrix Printers

Ethernet Interface User’s Manual

G550-0440-00

Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Notices”
on page 5.

First Edition (May 2005)
Requests for IBM® publications should be made to your IBM
representative or to the IBM branch office serving your locality. If you
request publications from the address given below, your order will be
delayed because publications are not stocked here. Many of the IBM
Printing Systems Division publications are available from the web page
listed below.

Internet
Visit our home page at: http://www.ibm.com/printers

A Reader’s Comment form is provided at the back of this publication. If
the form has been removed, you can send comments by fax to
1-800-524-1519 (USA only) or 1-303-924-6873; by E-mail to
printpub@us.ibm.com; or by mail to:
IBM Printing Systems Division
Department H7FE Building 004N
Information Development
PO Box 1900
Boulder CO 80301-9191 USA
IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any oblication to you.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2005. All
rights reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure
restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

Notices
Energy Star

The Environmental Protection Agency ENERGY STAR® Computers
program is a partnership effort with manufacturers of data
processing equipment to promote the introduction of energyefficient personal computers, monitors, printers, fax machines, and
copiers to help reduce air pollution and global warming caused by
electricity generation.
IBM Printing Systems Company participates in this program by
introducing printers that reduce power consumption when they are
not being used. As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, IBM Printing
Systems Company has determined that this product meets the
ENERGY STAR® guidelines for energy efficiency.
NOTE: The ENERGY STAR® emblem does not represent EPA
endorsement of any product or service.

Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in
the U.S.A.
IBM® may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in
this document in other countries. Consult your IBM representative
for information on the products and services currently available in
your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is
not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program,
or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual
property rights may be used instead. However, it is the user’s
responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM
product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering
subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this
document does not give you any license to these patents. You can
send license inquires, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A.
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom
or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent
with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION
PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this
statement may not apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or
typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new
editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or
changes in the product(s) described in this publication at any time
without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are
provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as
an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web
sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of
those Web sites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
All models of the printer meet the requirements of IEC 950, First
Edition, Amendments 1 and 2. The laser used in the printer
complies with IEC 825 and EN 60825.
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a
controlled environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other
operating environments may vary significantly. Some
measurements may have been made on development-level
systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be
the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some
measurement may have been estimated through extrapolation.
Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the
applicable data for their specific environment.
Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the
suppliers of those products, their published announcements or
other pubicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products
and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or
any other claims related to non-IBM products. Questions on the
capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the
suppliers of those products.

IBM encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment
to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed.
IBM offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment
owners in recycling their IT products. Information on these product
recycling offerings can be found on IBM’s Internet site at
http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/prp.shtml.
All statements regarding IBM’s future direction or intent are subject
to change or withdrawal without notice, and represent goals and
objectives only.
All IBM prices shown are IBM’s suggested retail prices, are current
and are subject to change without notice. Dealer prices may vary.

Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information and
Communication Statements in “Notices” on page 5.

If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and
color illustrations may not appear.
For online versions of this book, we authorize you to:

•

Copy, modify, and print the documentation contained on the
media, for use within your enterprise, provided you reproduce
the copyright notice, all warning statements, and other required
statements on each copy or partial copy.

•

Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when
you transfer the related IBM product (which may be either
machines you own, or programs, if the program’s license terms
permit a transfer). You must, at the same time, destroy all other
copies of the documentation.

You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal
property taxes, resulting from this authorization.
Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this
authorization. Upon termination, you must destroy your machine
readable documentation.

Trademarks
The following terms, used in this publication, are trademarks of the
IBM corporation in the United States or other countries or both:
AFCCU;
AFP
Advanced Function Presentation
AIX®
AIX/6000
AS/400®
BCOCA
Bar Code Object Content Architecture
ESCON®
ES/3090
ES/4381
ES/9000
ES/9370
IBM®
InfoPrint
IPDS

iSeries
Micro Channel
z/OS
System/370
S/370
OS/2®
Personal System/2®
Print Services Facility
pSeries
PSF
PS/2®
RISC System/6000®
XGA
zSeries®

C-bus is a trademark of Collary, Inc. in the United States, other
countries, or both.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United
States, other countries, or both.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and Windows logo are
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.
PC Direct is a trademark of Ziff Communications Company in the
United States, other countries, or both and is used by IBM
Corporation under license.
ActionMedia, LANDesk, MMX, Pentium and ProShare are
trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both. (For a complete list of Intel trademarks, see
www.intel.com/tradmarx.htm.)

Unix is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United
States and other countries.
SET and SET Logo are trademarks owned by SET Secure
Electronic Transaction LLC. (For further information, see
www.setco.org/aboutmark.html.)
zSeries is a trademark of IBM.
Other company, product, or service names may be the trademarks
or service marks of others.

Product Recycling and Disposal
This unit may have lead-containing materials – such as circuit
boards and connectors – that require special handling. Before this
unit is disposed of, these materials must be removed and recycled
or discarded according to applicable regulations. This book
contains specific information on batteries and refrigerant where
applicable.
This product may contain a sealed, lead-acid battery; lithium
battery; nickel-metal-hydride battery; or nickel-cadium battery.
Batteries of these types must be recycled or disposed of properly.
Recycling facilities may not be available in your area.
In the United States, IBM has established a collection process for
reuse, recycling, or proper disposal of used batteries and batter
packs from IBM equipment. For information on proper disposal of
the batteries in this product, please contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333.
For information on disposal of batteries outside the United States,
contact your local waste disposal facility.

Communication Statements
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Statement
This equpment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be
used in order to meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible
for any radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes
or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Fules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

European Union (EU) Conformity Statement
Hereby, IBM declares that this product is
in complicance with the essential
requirements and other relevent
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
IBM cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the
protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option
cards.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
Class A Information Technology Equipment according to European
standard EN 55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived
for commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable
protection against interference with licensed communication
devices.

WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be
used in order to reduce the potential for causing interference to
radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic
equipment. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any interference
caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors.

Industry Canada Compliance Statement
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A conform á la norme
NMB-003 du Canada.

Statement of CISPR 22 Edition 2 Compliance
Attention: This is a Class A Product. In a domestic environment
this product may cause radio interference in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.

Japanese VCCI Class A

Japan JEITA Statement

533

German Conformity Statement
Handbuchtexte: FCC class A entspricht: EMVG Klasse A
Text Für alle in Deutschland vertriebenen EN 55022 Klasse A
Geräte:
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) vom 18.
September 1998 (bzw. der EMC EG Richtlinie 89/336):
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen
EMVG das EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen.
Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraph 5 des
EMVG ist die: IBM Deutschland GmbH, 70548 Stuttgart.
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 4 Abs. (1) 4:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN
55022 Klasse A.
EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis
versehen werden: “Warnung: dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A.
Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen
verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden,
angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und dafür
aufzukommen.”
EN 55024 Hinweis:
Wird dieses Gerät in einer industriellen Umgebung betrieben (wie in
EN 55024 festgelegt), dann kann es dabei eventuell gestört
werden. In solch einem Fall ist der Abstand bzw. die Abschirmung
zu der industriellen Störquelle zu öergrvßern.
Anmerkung:
Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie
in den IBM Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu
betreiben.

China
Declaration:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product
may cause radio interference in which case the user may need to
perform practical actions.

Taiwannese
Warning:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product
may cause radio interference in which case the user will be
required to take adequate measures.

Korea

CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a 3-wire power cord and plug for the
user’s safety. Use this power cord in conjunction with a properly
grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock.

Lithium Battery Warning
The controller board contains a lithium battery sealed inside the
real-time clock chip. Do not disassemble the chip to replace the
battery. Do not dispose of the chip by incineration. Failure to
comply may cause the battery to explode. Contact your local waste
agency for the correct disposal procedure.

Software License Agreement
Your printer contains, among other software, Printronix operating
software including, but not limited to the Embedded Configurable
Operating System (the “eCos Software”) as embedded software.
The terms of this Agreement apply only to the eCos Software, and
all other embedded software supplied with the printer. You accept
the terms of this Agreement by your initial use of your printer.
1. Object Code License.
Printronix grants you a nonexclusive license to use the Printronix
Software, the eCos Software and all other embedded software
(collectively, the “Embedded Software” or the “Software”) only in
conjunction with the printer. As the rightful possessor of the printer,
you may make a reasonable number of copies of the Software as
necessary for backup, configuration, and restoration of the printer.
You must reproduce the copyright notice and any other legend of
ownership on each copy of the Software you make.
You may transfer possession of the Software and its media to
another party only with the transfer of the printer on which the
Software is used. If you do so, you must give the other party a copy
of these terms and provide all user documentation to that party.
When you do so, you must destroy any copies of Software not
resident in the printer.
Your license for the Software terminates when you no longer
rightfully possess the printer. No other rights under this license are
granted.
2. Source Code
A source code version of eCos Software is available under the
terms of the Red Hat eCos Public License v1.1 at
www.printronix.com. Printronix grants no rights whatsoever in the
source code for the Printronix Software.

3. No Warranty
THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS
LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE EMBEDDED
SOFTWARE IS FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE
RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY OF THE
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY
RESPECT, YOU (NOT RED HAT, PRINTRONIX, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST
OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN
ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY OF THE
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER
EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
4. Conflicting Terms
You agree that this Agreement provides you no more rights with
regards to warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms with
respect to Red Hat, Inc., Printronix, Inc. or any contributor to the
Embedded Software than that provided by the Red Hat eCos Public
License v.1.1 or any express warranty that may be made by
Printronix, Inc.

5. Limitation of Liability
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL
THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE),
CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL RED HAT, PRINTRONIX,
ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE, OR ANY PART THEREOF, OR ANY
SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO YOU OR
ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY
CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES
FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER
FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER
COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY
SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY
TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING
FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT
APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
SO THAT EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
6. U.S. Government Users
The Embedded Software is a "commercial item," as that term is
defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of "commercial
computer software" and "commercial computer software
documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept.
1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1
through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users
acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein.

7. Miscellaneous
This Agreement represents the complete agreement concerning
subject matter hereof. If any provision of this Agreement is held to
be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the
extent necessary to make it enforceable. This Agreement shall be
governed by California law provisions (except to the extent
applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-oflaw provisions.
8. Red Hat Statement with regards to eCos Software
Part of the software embedded in this product is eCos - Embedded
Configurable Operating System, a trademark of Red Hat. Portions
created by Red Hat are Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2000 Red Hat,
Inc.
(http://www.redhat.com) All Rights Reserved.
THE SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN PART PROVIDED
BY RED HAT AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Product Registration Information

Special Offers at the
IBM Product Registration Web site

By registering your printer or multifunction device with IBM today:

•
•
•

Take advantage of special offers
Registration is quick, easy and on-line
Quick links to other IBM on-line sites: new promotions, drivers,
software, and more!

Register your new IBM printer today:
www.ibm.com/printers/register
N’attendez pas! Enregistrez votre nouvelle imprimante ou votre
dispositif multifunction sur www.ibm.com/printers/register
Jetzt registristrieen! Registrieren Sie Ihren neuen IBM Drucker oder
Ihr neues Multifunktionsgerät. Registrieren Sie Ihren:
www.ibm.com/printers/register
Registra subito la tua nuova stampante sul sito: www.ibm.com/
printers/register
¡Registtresse ahora! Registre su nueva impresora IBM, o su nueva
opción multifunctional en: www.ibm.com/printers/register
Registreer nu! Registreer uw nieuwe printer of multifunktionele
apparaten op www.ibm.com/printers/register
Registe agora! Registe a sua nova impressora ou o seu novo
equipamento multifuncional IBM em:
www.ibm.com/printers/register

www.ibm.com/printers/register

Table of Contents
1 Introduction .............................................. 35
Overview ...............................................................................35
What Is The Ethernet Interface? ......................................35
Printer Models And Applicable Ethernet Interface
Cards................................................................................36
What Special Features Are Available?.............................36
Logical Printer Architecture ...................................................38
Destinations/Queues........................................................40
Models..............................................................................40
Interfaces...............................................................................42
10/100Base-T...................................................................42
Speed Setting for 10/100Base-T......................................47
Conventions Used In This Manual ........................................48
Notes And Notices.................................................................49

2 Installation And Configuration .................. 51
Installation .............................................................................51
Connecting To The Network ............................................51
Configuration Tools ...............................................................52
Configuration Using The Control Panel............................53
Ethernet Interface Verification..........................................57
Wireless Ethernet Interface Configuration Using
The Control Panel ............................................................58
Wireless Cisco LEAP .......................................................66
Kerberos Enabled Wireless NIC Configuration ................67
HTML Forms ....................................................................69
Configuration Alternatives ................................................72

Table of Contents

3 Embedded Ethernet Interface Web
Page ......................................................... 73
Overview ...............................................................................73
Configuration .........................................................................74
Network Configuration...........................................................76
TCP/IP Network ...............................................................76
802.11b ............................................................................78
Windows Network (NetBIOS TCP/IP) ..............................81
Novell Network .................................................................82
Print Path Configuration ........................................................84
Destination Settings .........................................................84
Current Model Settings ....................................................86
Current Log Path Settings................................................87
Print Model Configuration......................................................88
Log Path Configuration .........................................................91
TN5250/3270 Configuration ..................................................93
SNMP Configuration .............................................................97
Administration Configuration ...............................................105
System Information ........................................................105
Passwords .....................................................................108
System Configuration ..........................................................108
Status ..................................................................................109
Status - I/O Port .............................................................109
Status - Network ............................................................110
IBM Printing Systems ..........................................................110

Table of Contents

4 Windows Configuration .......................... 111
Overview .............................................................................111
Windows Environment Description......................................111
Windows Ethernet Interface Configuration..........................112
Mandatory ......................................................................112
Optional..........................................................................112
Configuration Using ARP ...............................................112
Communicating Across Routers.....................................114
Changing Workgroup Names.........................................115
Changing Destination Names ........................................116
Windows Host Configuration ...............................................118
Windows XP/2000 Host Setup .......................................118
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup ..........................................126
Windows NT 3.51 Host Setup ........................................131
Windows Me or 9x Host Setup.......................................132
Windows Troubleshooting Tips ...........................................134
Technical Support ..........................................................134
Ethernet Interface Cannot Be Found On
The Network...................................................................134
HTML Configuration Forms Will Not Display..................135
Errors Occur When Defining An LPR Printer .................135
Cannot Browse The Ethernet Interface On
The Network...................................................................136
Printer Errors When Printing Or No Output....................136
TCP/IP Access Problem.................................................137
Web Browser/HTTP Problem.........................................139
Windows NT 4.0 Or 2000 Host Setup Problems............139

Table of Contents

5 AIX/Unix Configuration ........................... 143
Overview .............................................................................143
Unix Environment Description .............................................143
Unix Ethernet Interface Configuration .................................144
Mandatory ......................................................................144
Optional..........................................................................144
Using ARP .....................................................................144
Using RARP ...................................................................146
Using BOOTP ................................................................147
Communicating Across Routers.....................................148
Unix Host Configuration ......................................................149
Manual System V Host Setup ........................................149
Ethernet Installation on HP-UX ...........................................150
Solaris 2.6 – 7 Ethernet Setup ............................................151
SCO Setup ..........................................................................152
Manual LPR/LPD Host Setup.........................................159
Ethernet Configuration for AIX 4 ....................................161
AIX Remote Queue Time–Out Setting ...........................163
Printing With FTP ...........................................................163
Direct Socket Printing.....................................................165
Printing From AIX ................................................................165
Setting Up AIX 4.x..........................................................166
Unix Troubleshooting Tips ..................................................167
Ethernet Interface Cannot Be Found On
The Network...................................................................167
Nothing Prints ................................................................168
Stair-Stepped Output .....................................................169
No Form Feed Or Extra Page Comes Out .....................170
TCP/IP Access Problem.................................................170
Front Panel Message - Dynamically Set Params
Read Only ......................................................................172

Table of Contents

6 Novell Configuration............................... 173
Overview .............................................................................173
Novell Environment Description ..........................................173
Novell Ethernet Interface Configuration ..............................174
Using HTML Forms ........................................................175
Novell Host Configuration....................................................176
NetWare Version 3.x PSERVER Setup .........................176
NetWare Version 3.x RPRINTER Setup ........................179
NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x PSERVER Setup.............182
NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x RPRINTER Setup ...........185
Novell Troubleshooting Tips................................................187
NetWare 3.x - No PSERVER Connection ......................188
NetWare 4.x and 5.x- No PSERVER Connection ..........189

7 Novell Configuration For
10/100Base-T Interfaces ........................ 191
Overview .............................................................................191
Novell Ethernet Interface Configuration (10/100Base-T) ....192
Preferred File Server (NDS and Bindery Setups) ..........192
Setting Password Security
(NDS and Bindery Setups).............................................195
Adjusting Polling Time (NDS and Bindery Setups) ........197
Changing The Ethernet Interface Name
(NDS and Bindery Setups).............................................198
Changing The Ethernet Interface Frame Type
(NDS and Bindery Setups).............................................200
Changing The Ethernet Interface Mode
(NDS and Bindery Setups).............................................201
Setting The Ethernet Interface NDS Context
(NDS Setups) .................................................................202
Setting The Ethernet Interface Preferred NDS Tree
(NDS Setups) .................................................................203

Table of Contents
Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T) .........................204
NDS PSERVER Setup (Netware 4.x/5.x).......................205
Bindery PSERVER Setup
(Netware 3.x, Netware 4.x, and Netware 5.x) ................208
Referencing A Bindery Queue In NDS
(Netware 3.x, Netware 4.x, and Netware 5.x) ................208
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup
(Netware 3.x, Netware 4.x, and Netware 5.x) ................209
NDPS Configuration (Netware 4.11 and Above)............212
Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T) ........................................215
PSERVER Setup ...........................................................215
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup .......................................218
Printing Related .............................................................220

8 iSeries Configuration, ASCII Printer ....... 223
Overview .............................................................................223
Configuring iSeries For ASCII Using TCP/IP ......................225
Configuring With ADDTCPIFC .......................................225
Configuring A Router Definition With ADDTCPRTE ......227
Configuring A Local Domain And Hostname..................227
Configuring A TCP/IP Host Table Entry .........................228
Configuring The iSeries For Printing ...................................228
Setting Up Printing For ASCII Files................................228
Verify Printing On iSeries ....................................................236
iSeries ASCII Troubleshooting ............................................237
TCP/IP Access Problem.................................................238
Web Browser/HTTP Problem.........................................240

Table of Contents

9 iSeries Configuration, IPDS Printer ........ 241
Configuring On iSeries As An IPDS Printer.........................241
Printing AFP, IPDS, And SCS Files ...............................241
Requirements.................................................................242
Configuration Checklist ..................................................242
Configuring An iSeries TCP/IP Interface With
ADDTCPIFC...................................................................243
Configuring PSF For IPDS On V3R7 Or V4R1 ..............246
Configuring PSF for IPDS On V4R2 And Above............252
Verifying The IPDS Configuration On iSeries......................259
Sharing The iSeries Printer On The Network ......................260
Printer Sharing Parameters............................................261
iSeries Troubleshooting.......................................................262
Cannot PING The Printer ...............................................262
PSF Terminates When Initialized...................................263
Spooled Print File Remains In PND Status....................263
Spooled Files Disappear Without Printing......................264
Data Is Being Clipped ....................................................264

10 z/OS Configuration, IPDS Printer ........... 265
Overview .............................................................................265
Requirements.................................................................265
Configuration Checklist ..................................................266
Configuring PSF for z/OS to Print IPDS Files .....................267
Configuration Procedure ................................................267
Verifying a TCP/IP-Attached Printer on z/OS.................277
Sharing IBM 6500-v Printers on z/OS .................................278
JES Spool Printer Sharing .............................................278
Port Switching Printer Sharing .......................................280
Handling z/OS Connectivity Problems ................................280
Ping is Not Successful ...................................................280
Ping is Successful ..........................................................281

Table of Contents

11 z/OS Configuration, TN3270E ................ 283
z/OS Configuration For A TN3270E Printer ........................283
Coax Printer Support FMID .................................................283
Program Materials ...............................................................284
VTAM Definitions For SCS and DSE TN3270E .............285
TCPIP Configuration With TN3270E..............................287
Printer Inventory Manager As Defined With TN3270E...288
Configuration Screens.........................................................297

12 iSeries Configuration, TN5250 ............... 301
Setting Up TN5250 Print Queues on iSeries.......................301
Setting Up A TN5250 Connection/Device Via A
Telnet Session ....................................................................302
User Supplied Values ....................................................303
Using Telnet Commands for TN5250..................................303
Command List ................................................................303
Getting Started ...............................................................304
TN5250 Job Formatting ......................................................305
Font Identifier (FONT) - Help ..............................................307

13 ISeries Configuration, SNMP ................. 309
Configuring for a *LAN 3812 SNMP Device Description .....309
Configuration Instructions ..............................................309
Varying on the Printer ....................................................315
Problem Areas for Consideration ...................................316
Additional Information ....................................................317

Table of Contents

14 Monitoring Printers ................................. 319
Implementing Printer Management .....................................319
Agent/Manager Model....................................................319
MIB.................................................................................320
SNMP.............................................................................322
Monitoring Tools..................................................................322
Monitoring With AIX NetView/6000 ................................322
Setting The SNMP Community Name............................323
The Printer Management Utility Software (PMU) ...........323

15 IBM Network Printer Manager ................ 325
Overview .............................................................................325

16 Commands ............................................. 327
Command Shell Overview...................................................327
npsh Access Methods ....................................................327
Main npsh Command Prefixes .......................................327
Getting Command Help..................................................328
Complete Command List.....................................................328
Store Commands ...........................................................329
Set Commands ..............................................................344
List Commands ..............................................................356
Miscellaneous Commands .............................................360

17 Extra Features........................................ 365
Ethernet Interface Security..................................................365
Users And Passwords....................................................365
Reset The Ethernet Password .......................................367
TCP Access Lists ...........................................................369
Printer Monitoring And Logging...........................................371
Printer And Print Job Monitoring ....................................371
Printer Logging Through Logpaths.................................372
Ethernet Interface Naming Schemes ..................................373

Table of Contents

Glossary ................................................. 375

Introduction

Overview
This chapter introduces you to the Ethernet Interface architecture
and special features, as well as providing information on installation
and configuration tools.

What Is The Ethernet Interface?
The Ethernet Interface allows you to attach printers on a local area
network (LAN) rather than attaching them directly to a host system.
Following simple configuration steps, these peripherals can be
simultaneously shared with users on the network whether you are
using TCP/IP, NetBIOS over TCP/IP, or IPX (Novell®).
The Ethernet Interface package contains an Ethernet Interface to
attach itself and the printer to the network. The Ethernet Interface is
supplied in one of four forms:

•
•
•
•

an Ethernet adapter attached to the printer parallel port
a wireless Ethernet adapter
an integrated Ethernet card
an integrated wireless Ethernet card.

Throughout this manual, features specific to each Ethernet
Interface type will be indicated by the sideheads ADAPTER,
WIRELESS ADAPTER, ETHERNET, and WIRELESS.

Chapter 1 Overview

Printer Models And Applicable Ethernet
Interface Cards
The following lists the 6500-v printer model with its corresponding
Ethernet Interface Card type.

Printer
6500-v

Ethernet Interface Card Type
Power PC Based PCI Ethernet (wired)
Power PC Based PCI Ethernet (wireless)
External Ethernet to Parallel Port 1

This is the IBM Network Print Server which is available through IBM. This feature is
offered with limited support. The information in this manual does not apply to the IBM
Network Print Server. Contact your IBM representative for more details.

What Special Features Are Available?
The Ethernet Interface offers an extensive list of features including:

•

built-in HTML forms for easy cross-platform configuration

•

availability of remote management software (IBM Printer
Management Utility)

•

a detailed and easy-to-use command shell built-in to the
firmware

•

multi-level configuration security through passwords,
permission levels, and access lists

•

WAN-wide communication access

•

numerous printer logging methods (e.g., automatic email) to
record printer errors and usage

•

remote management through HTML forms, Telnet sessions,
rsh/rcmd/remsh commands, SNMP, and pre-defined log
methods

•
•

extensive built-in troubleshooting tools
built-in telnet and ping clients

What Special Features Are Available?

•

configurable memory usage by disabling protocols and
destination services

•

multiple destinations/queues for versatile printer manipulation
and distinct print setups

•

header and trailer strings to instruct printers on font, pitch,
printing, etc.

•
•
•

flexible naming conventions

•

multiple network protocol support

automatic network connection and frame type sensing
simultaneous printing across all I/O ports and all supported
protocols

Chapter 1 Logical Printer Architecture

Logical Printer Architecture
The Ethernet Interface implements a logical printer architecture
which gives the system administrator the possibility to configure the
print server to handle and act upon the print data in several ways.
When a print job comes through the print server, there is a certain
logical print path that it follows before it gets to the printer. Each
logical print path consists of a sequence of logical steps where
extra processing may be performed on the print data before it is
sent to the printer. This ability to preprocess the print data before it
is sent to the printer allows elimination of certain printing problems,
or implementation of printer enhancements that may be difficult and
time consuming to solve or introduce at the system, spool file or
queue level. The preprocess ability is also simplistic to perform at
the print server level.
NOTE: If the printer is configured for IPDS, any reference to
“d4prn” should be understood to mean “dipdsprn.” This
queue should only be used to print IPDS.
The logical print path for a print job going through the Ethernet
Interface consists of three different phases:

•

Phase 1 - the host sends the job to a destination or queue on
the Ethernet Interface (e.g. d1prn).

•

Phase 2 - the print job passes through the associated “model”
(e.g. model “m1”) on the Ethernet Interface for any extra
processing associated with the model.

•

Phase 3 - the processed print job is directed to the printer for
output.

Logical
Printer
Architecture
What Special
Features
Are
Available?

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Destination 1
(d1prn)

Model 1
(m1)

Destination 2
(d2prn)

Model 2
(m2)

Destination 3
(d3prn)

Model 3
(m3)

Destination 4
(d4prn)

Model 4
(m4)
Printer

Host
Destination 5
(d5prn)

Model 5
(m5)

Destination 6
(d6prn)

Model 6
(m6)

Destination 7
(d7prn)

Model 7
(m7)

Destination 8
(d8prn)

Model 8
(m8)

Figure 1. Print Path

Chapter 1 Logical Printer Architecture

Destinations/Queues
For every I/O port on the Ethernet Interface, there is at least one
pre-defined logical print queue or destination to accept print jobs
destined for it. This includes print job that is sent directly to the I/O
port, such as port 9100. These queue or destination names are predefined but can be changed by the user.

Models
For every destination or queue, there is a pre-defined model
associated with it. The model defines how the print job will be
processed as it passes through to the printer. Models are a set of
mini filters that can be used to modify the print data stream. The
functions available for each model are as follows:
1. Insert carriage return after line feed
2. Insert a banner page before or after each print job
3. Insert header strings to

•
•

Print in landscape mode
Print in portrait mode

4. Insert trailer strings to

•
•
•

Reset the printer once the print job completes
Force the end of the job
Perform a form feed at the end of the data

Models

5. Log one or all of the following information as each print job
passes through the model

•
•

Job ID and username

•
•
•

Checksum value of the data transferred

User ID and three messages per job about the start and
finish

Miscellaneous messages from the printer
Status of the printer based on the port interface signals

6. Load a specific printer configuration before processing a print
job

•

Specify a printer configuration to be associated with a print
queue.

•

When a job is set to that print queue, the associated printer
configuration will be loaded before the job is processed.

•

Feature allows you to define up to eight unique and
independent printer personalities in a single printer.

•

Allows you to effectively have eight different printers in one.

Chapter 1 Interfaces

Interfaces
The Ethernet interfaces with your printer through an Ethernet™
10/100Base-T interface connector.

10/100Base-T
ADAPTER

The Ethernet Interface at the rear of the printer for the 10/100BaseT interface has two indicator lights and two DIP switches, as shown
in Figure 2.

DIP Switches
1
2

STAT (System Status)
NET (Data to Network)

Figure 2. Status Indicator Lights and DIP Switches

Run and Auto Reset Modes
Run mode is the normal operating state of the Ethernet Interface.
Auto Reset mode is entered when the watchdog timer is triggered
and the Print Server resets itself. In either mode, the STAT LED
flashes at a varying rate, depending on whether the unit IP address
is configured. The Run Mode and Auto Reset Mode indicator
descriptions are given in Table 1.
42

10/100Base-T

Table 1. Run Mode and Auto Reset Mode Indicator Descriptions
STAT

Indication

Description

OFF

flashes on once per second

Normal Mode, IP address configured

OFF

flashes on two times per
second

IP address not configured

flashes off once per second

Download (MOS)

flashes off twice per second

Error

Network Indicator
The NET LED displays the status of the network link. When the
NET LED is on, link integrity is confirmed. The NET LED flashes off
for 1/3 second when a data packet is being transferred. When the
NET LED is off, the network connection has been severed.

Table 2. NET LED Indicator
NET

Indication

Description

constantly

Indicates link integrity

flashes off 1/3 second

Flashes off 1/3 second each time a
packet is transmitted

Chapter 1 Interfaces

ETHERNET

Integrated NIC Card LED:

Table 3. Integrated NIC LED Indicator
NET

Indication

Description

flashes

constant

Indicates that the link is good at 10 Mbps

constant

Indicates that the link is good at 100 Mbps

Indicates activity

Wireless Network Indicator
WIRELESS

The wireless Ethernet Interface has 2 bi-color LEDs which can
produce three colors each: green, red, and yellow (green and red
combined). Table 4 shows the STAT LED states for various sytem
conditions:

Table 4. Wireless Ethernet Interface STAT LED States
System Condition

STAT LED

System is running without an IP
address.

Green, 2 Hz flash

System is running with an IP address.

Green, 1 Hz flash

System error.

Red 2Hz flash

System is in upgrade mode with an IP
address.

Yellow, 1 Hz flash

System is in upgrade mode without an
IP address.

Yellow, 2 Hz flash

10/100Base-T

Table 5 shows the NET LED states for various network conditions
when a WLAN card is inserted into the wireless Ethernet. The
Ethernet (wired) interface will not affect the NET LED while a
WLAN card is present.
Table 5. Wireless Ethernet Interface NET LED States
WLAN Network Condition

NET LED

Network-link quality is good

Green

Network-link quality is fair

Yellow

Network-link quality is bad

Red

Network-link not present

Off

Network-link present and transmitting

Link quality + blink

Table 6 shows the NET LED states for various network conditions
when no WLAN card is found or present.

Table 6. Wireless Ethernet Interface NET LED States
(No WLAN)
Wired Ethernet Network Condition
(No WLAN)

NET LED

Network-link is present

Green

Network-link is not present

Off

Network-link present and transmitting

Blink

Chapter 1 Interfaces

DIP Switches
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

On the back of the printer, you will find a small window where you
can access two DIP switches labeled 1 and 2 (see Figure 2 on
page 42). The functions of the DIP switches are explained in
Table 7.
NOTE: The DIP switches are not marked with “on” or “off” labels.
Instead, the status of the switch is indicated by its position,
up or down. If the interface card has been installed upside
down (i.e., the DIP switches are to the left of the cable
connector), your DIP switch positions will be reversed and
the settings inverted.

Table 7. 10/100Base-T DIP Switch Settings
DIP Switch
Comments
1

Normal operation. With both DIP switches in the “off” position, the
Ethernet Interface boots up using the settings in flash memory rather
than the default settings.

down

Factory default. With the DIP switches in this configuration, the
Ethernet Interface boots up and all settings stored in flash memory
are erased except the Ethernet address and key value.

down

Default IP. With the DIP switches in this configuration, the Ethernet
Interface boots up with factory default settings. However, the stored
settings in flash memory are intact. Setting DIP switch 2 to “on” does
not clear any settings stored in flash memory; it boots the unit in a
different state with the settings in flash memory temporarily ignored.

down

Reserved. This DIP switch configuration is not for customer use.

Speed Setting for 10/100Base-T

Speed Setting for 10/100Base-T
When the router is set to auto-negotiation enable, the following is
the correct behavior of the Ethernet Interface with each setting:
1. 10mbps Half Duplex
Use parallel detection because the Ethernet Interface is using
force mode and thus has auto-negotiation disabled.
PORs to Half Duplex. Resets to Half Duplex. Reconnection at
switch maintains Half Duplex.
2. 10mbps Full Duplex
Use parallel detection because the Ethernet Interface is using
force mode and thus has auto-negotiation disabled.
PORs to Half Duplex. Resets to Half Duplex. Reconnection at
switch maintains Half Duplex.
3. 100mbps Half Duplex
Use parallel detection because the Ethernet Interface is using
force mode and thus has auto-negotiation disabled.
PORs to Half Duplex. Resets to Half Duplex. Reconnection at
switch results in Half Duplex.
4. 100mbps Full Duplex
Use parallel detection because the Ethernet Interface is using
force mode and thus has auto-negotiation disabled.
PORs to Half Duplex. Resets to Half Duplex. Reconnection at
switch results in Half Duplex.
5. Ethernet in Auto mode in 100mbps Full Duplex
environment
Use auto negotiation to the highest common local and remote
capability, i.e. 100 Full Duplex in this case.
PORs to 100/Full Duplex. Resets to 100/Full Duplex.
Reconnection at switch remains 100/Full Duplex.

Chapter 1 Conventions Used In This Manual

6. Ethernet in Auto mode in 10mbps Half Duplex environment
(determined using 10hd hub)
Use auto-negotiation to the highest common local and remote
capability, i.e. 100 Half Duplex in this case.
PORs to 10 Half Duplex. Resets to 10 Half Duplex.
Reconnection at switch maintains 10 Half Duplex.
NOTE: With parallel detection, only speed can be determined. The
duplex mode sets to half duplex.

Conventions Used In This Manual
All uppercase print indicates control panel keys.
Example: Press the CLEAR key, then press the ONLINE key.
Quotation marks (“ ”) indicate messages on the Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD).
Example: Press the ONLINE key. “OFFLINE” appears on the LCD.
Command syntax and examples are formatted as follows:

•

The Courier font in boldface indicates commands that you
type. For example:
At the prompt, type:
ping ftp.CompanyWebsite.com

•

Regular Courier font indicates references to command syntax
and output. For example:
The ftp.CompanyWebsite.com site is working properly.

•

Variable values are shown in brackets < > in command syntax,
output, and in text. For example:
ping
The is working properly.

Notes
And Notices
Speed Setting
for 10/100Base-T

Notes And Notices
For your safety and to protect valuable equipment, read and comply
with the notes included in this manual. A description follows:
NOTE: A Note gives you helpful information and tips about printer
operation and maintenance.

Chapter 1 Notes And Notices

Installation And
Configuration

Installation
The Ethernet Interface provides an RJ-45 connector for
10/100Base-T (UTP) networks.

WIRELESS
ADAPTER

Connecting To The Network
To attach the Ethernet Interface to a network, plug the network
cable into the Ethernet Interface connector.
Watch the LEDs in the rear of the printer as they cycle through the
power-on self-test. When the test is complete, the STAT LED will
begin to flash.

Chapter 2 Configuration Tools

Network Connector

Figure 3. Interior View of the Cabinet Model Showing Network Interface Location
and Setup

Configuration Tools
There are two parts to a Ethernet Interface setup:

•

Configuring the Ethernet Interface so it can be seen on the
network. This involves network-related settings (e.g., an IP
address within TCP/IP environments) configured through the
built-in command shell, npsh, or from the control panel.

•

Configuring a host with a new printer so it knows how to send
data to the Ethernet Interface. Just being able to see the printer
on the network does not mean you can automatically print to it.
A host has to be told where to send the data.

Configuration Using The Control Panel

NOTE: Some network environments do not require any network
settings to be configured on the Ethernet Interface.
However, all network setups require configuration on the
host end.

Configuration Using The Control Panel
You can set Ethernet Interface settings from the printer control
panel.

CAUTION

When the printer is first powered on, the message “ETHERNET
INITIALIZING” displays on the control panel. To prevent a loss
of Ethernet Interface configuration information, do not change
the Ethernet Interface settings while this message is
displayed. When the initialization is complete, the message
“ETHERNET IS READY” displays, and you can safely change
the Ethernet Interface settings from the control panel.
1. You can set any of three listed parameters from the printer
control panel. These parameters are located in the Ethernet
Address, Adapter Address, or Wireless Address menu. Arrange
to have an IBM service technician install the Ethernet Interface
card if it is not already installed; this is not a customer
installable feature.
2. Power on the printer. The message “ETHERNET
INITIALIZING” appears when the printer is powered on.
Configuration can be done after the “ETHERNET IS READY”
message appears.
3. Disable the Power Saver mode before starting this procedure
to ensure that the configuration process runs uninterrupted.
See the Infoprint 6500 User’s Guide for instructions.

Chapter 2 Configuration Tools

4. Always print an Ethernet Adapter test page before performing
any updates or network configuration using the following steps:
For 6500-v printers:
a. Press STOP to take the printer offline. The printer is in the
NOT READY state.
b. Press RETURN + ENTER simultaneously to unlock the
printer menu.
c.

Press MENU to display OPERATOR MENU.

d. Press ↑ Scroll/Micro until “OPERATOR PRINT TESTS”
displays, then press ENTER.
e. Press ↑ Scroll/Micro until the following displays:
“ETHERNET TEST PAGE” for the integrated or wireless
Ethernet.
“ADAPTER TEST PAGE” for the Ethernet Adapter.
f.

Press ENTER.

5. Verify the current Ethernet Interface firmware version number.
NOTE: Firmware exists within the Ethernet Interface and the
printer itself. Each firmware is a separate entity with its own
version number. Please pay close attention to the type of
firmware referenced in the remaining sections of this
document.
The Ethernet Interface version should be 1.1.3 or higher for
10/100Base-T Ethernet adapters. If the Ethernet Interface
version is current, skip to step 6 below. If the Ethernet Interface
version is not current, you need to update both the Ethernet
Interface and printer firmware.
If you need to update the printer firmware, you must do so now.
After the update is complete, you must restart this instruction
from the beginning. To upgrade the printer firmware, contact
your IBM service representative.

Configuration Using The Control Panel

CAUTION

Turning off the printer before the firmware update is complete
may permanently damage the Ethernet Interface adapter.
Updating the printer firmware takes time. Please be patient
and wait for the “ETHERNET IS READY” message to display
on the LCD. Do not turn off the printer before it has completed
the firmware download procedure. The LCD will display
“ONLINE / ETHERNET IS READY” when the download is
complete. Wait for this message before turning off the printer.
6. To enter IP Address parameters, do the following:
a. Press STOP to get to the NOT READY state.
b. Press RETURN + ENTER to unlock the printer menu.
c.

Press Menu to display OPERATOR MENU.

d. Press ↑ Scroll/Micro until NETWORK SETUP displays,
then press Enter.
e. Press ↑ Scroll/Micro until ADAPTER ADDRESS or
ETHERNET ADDRESS displays, then press Enter.
f.

Press ↑ Scroll/Micro until IP ADDRESS displays, then
press Enter.

g. Press Enter again, then ↑ Scroll/Micro to choose an IP
address octet to change. Press Enter.
h. Press ↑ Scroll/Micro to choose the desired value for the
octet, then press Enter. The new value is shown with an
asterisk. Press Return.
i.

Repeat steps d and e until you have set all IP address
octets to the desired value.

Press Return until ADAPTER ADDRESS or ETHERNET
ADDRESS is on the first display line.

Press ↑ Scroll/Micro to choose other IP parameters to
change, then follow the above steps for each of these.

When finished, press Return multiple times until NOT
READY displays.

m. Press Start.
55

Chapter 2 Configuration Tools

n. Wait for “ETHERNET IS READY” to display.
o. Press RETURN + ENTER to lock the printer menu.
7. Put the printer online and wait for the “ETHERNET IS READY”
message to display on the front panel. Placing the printer
online starts the Ethernet Interface IP Address and Netmask
update process. This process will take several minutes.
NOTE: If you do not put the printer online, the setting you just
entered will not take effect. Do not turn the printer off until
you see the “ETHERNET IS READY” message. If you turn
the printer off before the new values are written to memory
in the Ethernet Interface adapter, you will need to repower
the printer and repeat steps 6 and 7 above immediately.
8. Once the “ETHERNET IS READY” message displays, you may
enter the Gateway Address by repeating front panel steps 6
and 7 above. This will ensure the correct Netmask becomes
associated with the Gateway value you enter. From the front
panel navigate to the Gateway Address and enter the
appropriate value. You must press ENTER after inputting each
segment of the Gateway Address.
9. Put the printer online and wait for the “ETHERNET IS READY”
message to display on the front panel.
10. Enable the Power Saver mode if desired.

Ethernet Interface Verification

Ethernet Interface Verification
Before performing the verification, you must connect the Ethernet
Interface card to the network.
1. Print an Ethernet test page (following the steps on page 53) to
verify the settings you made.
2. Verify the Netmask is correct in two locations on the Ethernet
test page:

•

NETWORK INTERFACES

•

TCP/IP ROUTING TABLE

The Netmask must be the same in both locations. For example,
if the Netmask is listed as 255.255.255.0 in NETWORK
INTERFACES and is listed as 255.255.255.255 in the TCP/IP
ROUTING TABLE, they do not match and you must correct it
for the Gateway. Also, if a Gateway Address was entered,
verify that “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is alive” is printed under the Default
Gateway Ping Test, where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the Gateway
Address. If a Gateway Address was not entered, the Default
Gateway Ping test is not required and will not display on the
page.
If the Netmask does not match, complete the following steps:
a. Place the printer offline.
b. Using the front panel, modify the Gateway value to 0.0.0.0.
(non-configured).
c.

Place the printer online and wait for the “ETHERNET IS
READY” message to display.

d. Place the printer offline and enter the Gateway Address
you desire.
e. Place the printer online and wait for the “ETHERNET IS
READY” message. This saves the new Gateway Address.
Your Ethernet Interface is now configured and connected to your
network.

Chapter 2 Configuration Tools

Wireless Ethernet Interface Configuration Using
The Control Panel
WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

NOTE: The Access Point must be configured according to the
manufacturer's installation guide.
To configure Wireless Ethernet Interface, configure the ethernet
and wireless IP addresses so they can be seen on the network.
This includes several network-related settings (e.g., an IP address
within TCP/IP environments) configured through the built-in
command shell, npsh, or from the control panel.

IP Address Configuration
You can set the wireless Ethernet Interface IP settings from the
printer control panel.

CAUTION

•

IP Address

This is the host for IP addresses that have four segments. They are
displayed as SEG1, SEG2, SEG3, and SEG4 which can be set to
any value in the range of 0 to 255.

Wireless Ethernet Interface Configuration Using The Control Panel

•

Subnet Mask

This is the subnet mask for the host IP that has four segments.
They are displayed as SEG1, SEG2, SEG3, and SEG4 which can
be set to any value in the range of of 0 to 255.

•

Gateway Address

This is the gateway IP addresses that have four segments. They
are displayed as SEG1, SEG2, SEG3, and SEG4 which can be set
to any value in the range of 0 to 255.

•

DHCP

The DHCP option allows you to obtain host server IP addresses
when powering onto the network. The DHCP can be configured to:

•

Enable – each time you power on, the host server
automatically assigns you a different address (if the IP address
has not been previously assigned).

•

Disable – You choose the host server IP address. After the
selection, the IP Address remains fixed even after you reboot.

Wireless Parameter Configuration
Certain "WIRELESS PARAMETERS" must be configured to match
the Access Point settings:
NOTE: The "ETHERNET PARAMETERS" are configured the
same way as the 10/100 Ethernet external Ethernet
Interface. Please refer to the Ethernet menu.

•

Signal Strength

This menu displays the strength of the wireless signal.
NOTE: This is a display value only and cannot be changed.

•

Operation Mode

This is the operation mode of the wireless network. The options
include “Infrastructure” or “Ad Hoc” mode.

Chapter 2 Configuration Tools

•

SSID Name

This is the Service Set Identifier which must be identical to the
Access Point's SSID name. The SSID name can be configured to a
maximum of 32 alphanumeric characters. The SSID name and
alphanumeric characters are divided into three parts in the control
panel menu as "SSID Name (01-15)", "SSID Name (16-30)" and
"SSID Name (31-32)".
NOTE: When two or more consecutive space characters are used
in the SSID, enclose it in a double quoted string;otherwise
upon resetting the Ethernet, the SSID Name wil be saved
in the Wireless Ethernet with only one space.

•

Minimum Transfer Rate

Allows you to set the minimum speed at which the Wireless Option
will accept a connection (in million bits per second).
This is the wireless transfer rate, and can be set to either “enable”
or “disable.” It is set to “enable” when the operation mode is
"Infrastructure" so that the Ethernet Interface can automatically
detect the optimal transfer rate. If the operation mode is "Ad Hoc"
and the transfer rate is known, the user can enable or disable the
corresponding transfer rate in the menus "Xfer Rate 1Mb", "Xfer
Rate 2Mb", "Xfer Rate 5.5Mb" or "Xfer Rate 11Mb".

•

Channel

This is the frequency used for wireless communication. The
2.4GHz band spectrum is divided into different channels (1-15). It is
set to "Default" so that the Ethernet Interface can detect the correct
channel to communicate with the Access Point in infrastructure
mode. If the operation mode is "Ad Hoc" and the channel is known,
the user can set the corresponding channel in this menu.

•

Antenna Diversity

This is used to select the antenna for communication. It is
recommended to set to "Diverse" for the Ethernet Interface to
detect for optimal communication. It can also be set to "Primary" or
"Auxiliary".

Wireless Ethernet Interface Configuration Using The Control Panel

•

Preamble

This is the preamble used in the wireless packets. It is
recommended to set to "Default" so that the Ethernet Interface can
detect the correct preamble. The preamble is approximately 8 bytes
of the packet header generated by the AP and is attached to the
packet prior to transmission. The preamble length is transmission
data rate dependent. The "short" preamble is 50% shorter than the
"long" preamble. It must match the Access Point's preamble
configuration.

•

Power Management

This option allows you to set power-save mode and sleep time. A
value specifying the sleep time in milliseconds will be provided. If
set to zero, power-save mode will be disabled.

•

Transmit Power

This option allows you to specify the power level used by the
wireless card to send network packets to the access point. Transmit
power is specified as a percentage of full pwer (0 – 100%).

•

International Mode

When enabled, the Wireless option adapts to international
frequency requirements in Europe.

•

Authentication Method

This feature allows the user to select the authentication method
used for the wireless network interface. The options include open,
shared, kerberos, and leap.

•

Default WEP Key

The default key must match the Access Point's configuration. If the
Access Point is configured to use "Open System", the default key
should be set to 0. If the Access Point is configured to use 40-bit or
128-bit WEP encryption key, the encryption key must be set to the
same setting as the Access Point's setting. See the following
section on how to set up the encryption key. In addition, there may
be four keys (1-4) that an Access Point can use. If the Access Point
is set to use key 1, the default key must be set to 1 to correspond to
the Access Point's setting.
61

Chapter 2 Configuration Tools

Encryption Key Configuration
As mentioned above, there are four encryption keys that can be
configured through the control panel. For each encryption key x
(where x can be 1 to 4), the following control menu can be used to
configure the key:

•

WEP Key x Format

This is the format of the key. It can be set to either ASCII or
Hexadecimal.

•

WEP Key x Width

This is the number of bits used for encryption. This can be set to
either 40 Bits or 128 Bits and must match the Access Point's
configuration.

•

WEP Key X

This is the key value. If the "KEY WIDTH" is set to 40 Bits, the key
values can be entered in the following 5 sub menus
(BYTE 1, …, BYTE 5). If the "KEY WIDTH" is set to 128 Bits, the
key values can be entered in the following 13 sub menus
(BYTE 1, …, BYTE 13). The key values must configure to match
the corresponding key in the Access Point's key configuration.

Authentication Method
This feature allows the user to select the authentication method
used for the wireless network interface. The options include open,
shared, kerberos, and leap.

Wireless Ethernet Interface Configuration Using The Control Panel

Kerberos Parameters
NOTE: Kerberos parameters are available only with a Symbol
radio card.
Kerberos Enable

•

Enable. Enable Kerberos authentication in the wireless
network interface.

•

Disable (default). Disable Kerberos authentication in the
wireless network interface.

Kerb. Pwd (01–15)
First 15 characters of the Kerberos password (maximum number of
characters is 40).
Kerb. Pwd (16–30)
Characters 31 to 40 of the Kerberos password (maximum numer of
characters is 40).
Kerb. Pwd (31–40)
Characters 31 to 40 of the Kerberos password (maximum number
of characters is 40).
Reset Kerb. Pwd.
Reset Kerberos password to an empty string.
KDC Port Number
KDC (Key Distribution Center) port number is the 2-byte UDP/TCP
port used for Kerberos Communication.

•
•

88 (default)
0–65535

Chapter 2 Configuration Tools

Clock Skew Units

•
•

Seconds (default)
Minutes

Clock Skew (SEC)
Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in seconds (SEC) or
minutes (MIN), as specified by the Clock Skew Units, that Kerberos
authentication will tolerate before assuming that a Kerberos
message is invalid.

•
•

Seconds: The range is 60-900, and the default is 300.
Minutes: The range is 1-15, and the default is 5.

NOTE: Whatever submenu is selected in Clock Skew Units will
display on the Clock Skew (SEC) menu. For example, if
you select Minutes, the Clock Skew (SEC) menu name will
change to Clock Skew (MIN).
Tckt Life Units
Ticket lifetime unit in either seconds, minutes, hours, or days.

•
•
•
•

Seconds (default)
Minutes
Hours
Days

Wireless Ethernet Interface Configuration Using The Control Panel

Tckt Life (SEC)
Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in seconds (SEC),
minutes (MIN), hours (HR), or days (DAY), as specified by the Tckt
Life Units, that a ticket obtained from the Kerberos server is valid
before getting a new one.

•
•
•
•

Seconds: The range is 300-259200, and the default is 43200.
Minutes: The range is 5-4320, and the default is 720.
Hours: The range is 1-72, and the default is 12.
Days: The range is 1-3, and the default is 1.

NOTE: Whatever submenu is selected in Tckt Life Units will
display on the Tckt Life (SEC) menu. For example, if you
select Hours, the Tckt Life (SEC) menu name will change
to Tckt Life (HR).
Renew Life Units
Renew lifetime unit in either seconds, minutes, hours, or days.

•
•
•
•

Seconds (default)
Minutes
Hours
Days

Renew Life (SEC)
Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in seconds (SEC),
minutes (MIN), hours (HR) or days (DAY), as specified by the
Renew Life Units, before warning for a new Kerberos password.

•
•
•
•

Seconds: The range is 0-604800, and the default is 0.
Minutes: The range is 0-10080, and the default is 0.
Hours: The range is 0-168, and the default is 0.
Days: The range is 0-7, and the default is 0.

The selected submenu is in Renew Life Units will display on the
Renew Life (SEC) menu. For example, if you select Days, the
Renew Life (SEC) menu name will change to Renew Life (DAY).
65

Chapter 2 Configuration Tools

Equivalent Wireless Ethernet Interface
Configuration Using The Telnet Command
store ifc 2 wlan ssid
store ifc 2 wlan mode adhoc|pseudo|managed
store ifc 2 wlan speed auto|(1 2 5 11)
store ifc 2 wlan channel default|(1-15)
store ifc 2 wlan antenna diverse|primary|aux
store ifc 2 wlan preamble default|long|short
store ifc 2 wlan pmm on|off
store ifc 2 wlan txpwr (0-100)
store ifc 2 wlan opts [[-]openauth][[-]intnl]
store ifc 2 wlan defkey disable|(1-4)
store ifc 2 wlan key
store ifc 2 wlan auth (e.g. openauth, shared, leap,
kerb)
store ifc 2 wlan user
store ifc 2 wlan pass
Refer to page 328 for the complete command set.

Wireless Cisco LEAP
LEAP is a Cisco wireless security scheme. The Cisco LEAP allows
for a WEP key timeout that forces re-authentication, resulting in the
derivation of a new WEP key for the session. To enable LEAP in
the NIC, enter the username and password corresponding to the
RADIUS server with the following commands:
store ifc 2 wlan auth leap
store ifc 2 wlan user
store ifc 2 wlan pass
NOTE: Disable the defkey to use LEAP.

Kerberos Enabled Wireless NIC Configuration

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Kerberos Enabled Wireless NIC Configuration
This section provides an example of how a user configures the
Print Server to use the Kerberos authentication via the wired Telnet
session.
This example assumes Symbol’s Access Point and RF card is used
and the Print Server has not been configured for Kerberos
authentication. It also assumes that the KDC, Access Point and the
Print Server are in the same realm.
To set up the Print Server for Kerberos authentication, the
administrator first has to enable Kerberos in the Access Point
according to Symbol’s instructions. Symbol’s Access Point must
have its Network time set up with the correct time server. Once the
Access Point is configured, the Print Server is ready to be
configured for Kerberos authentication.

Configuring the Print Server for Kerberos
Authentication
1. Create a user in the Windows 2000 server that identifies the
Print Server.
NOTE: The user name should be the Print Server’s name. The
password selected will be used as the Kerberos password
and should be set with no expiration.
2. In a secure networked environment, log in as a root user via
Telnet in the wired LAN.
3. Once logged in, use the Telnet commands to set up the
wireless LAN parameters (e.g. SSID = 103, operating mode =
Infra Structure mode, etc.) that match the Access Point
configuration.
In addition to the normal wireless LAN parameter settings, use
the following commands to enable Kerberos on the wireless
LAN interface and Kerberos for authentication (minimum
settings):
4. Set the wireless LAN interface parameters to enable Kerberos.
store kerberos opts auth
67

Chapter 2 Configuration Tools

5. Set the Kerberos parameters to enable Kerberos
authentication.
The Kerberos password must match the Windows 2000 user
password for the Print Server. The administrator should choose
at least 9 alphanumeric characters with a combination of upper
and lower case.
The following is a suggestion for creating strong password for
computer security. Make sure the password:

•

is at least seven characters long. The most secure
passwords are seven to 14 characters long.

•

contains characters from each of the following groups:
letters (uppercase and lowercase), numerals, and symbols (all
characters not defined as letters or numerals, i.e., ! @ # $ % ^
& *, etc.)

The kname is default to “krbtgt” which is the default name used in
Windows 2000 KDC. It must be configured to match with the KDC if
the default is changed. The krealm is case sensitive; it must match
the Access Point’s realm.
The SSID of the Print Server must be configured to match the
Access Point’s SSID which also has Kerberos enabled. For
example, if a Windows 2000 user created the password
aBcd-12345 and the Access Point’s realm is set to
REALM.PRINTRONIX.COM, the following telnet commands are
used:
store kerberos password aBcd-12345
store kerberos config krealm REALM.IBM.COM
NOTE: If the Kerberos authentication fails, the user will not be able
to Telnet to the Print Server via the wireless LAN interface.
In this case, Telnet to the Print Server via the wired LAN
interface. It should display an error message indicating the
reason for the Kerberos authenticaion failure.

HTML Forms

HTML Forms
The Ethernet Interface settings can be configured over TCP/IP
through a standard Web browser. The Ethernet Interface Web
pages provide a handy way to access some of the commands built
into the print server.
NOTE: If a router is used, make sure a Gateway value is
configured.
To access the Ethernet Interface home page:
1. Make sure the print server has an IP address and Subnet Mask
so it is recognizable on your TCP/IP network.
2. Make sure your network station can successfully ping the
Ethernet Interface over the network.
3. Direct your Web browser to the URL:
http://IPaddress
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9)
where IPaddress is the IP address of your Ethernet Interface.
The Ethernet Interface HTML structure is divided into several
menus as shown in Figure 4.

Chapter 2 Configuration Tools

Index/Home

Configuration

Status

Help

About

IBM Printing
Systems

I/O Port
Network

Network
TCP/IP
802.11b
Windows
Novell

Print Path
d1prn
d2prn
d3prn
d4prn
d5prn
d6prn
d7prn
d8prn

SNMP

m1
m2
m3
m4
m5
m6
m7
m8

Administration

TN5250/
TN3270

Log Path

Print Model
l1
l2
l3
l4
l5
l6
l7
l8

d1prn
d2prn
d3prn
d4prn
d5prn
d6prn
d7prn
d8prn

System

Alert Config 1
Alert Config 2
Alert Config 3
Alert Config 4
Alert Config 5
Alert Config 6
Alert Config 7
Alert Config 8
Alert Config 9
Alert Config 10

Figure 4. Ethernet Interface HTML Structure
NOTE: Online help is available for all HTML pages.

HTML Forms

Printer Status Screen
Using the printer IP Address and any standard Web browser, you
can check the status of the printer. Figure 5 shows the exact state
of the printer by showing the printer LCD message. (This screen
automatically refreshes every minute.)

Figure 5. Printer Status Screen
71

Chapter 2 Configuration Tools

Configuration Alternatives
Besides the HTML forms and software provided, the Ethernet
Interface internal command shell, npsh, can also be reached using
Telnet and Remote Shell, and FTP.

Telnet
A TCP/IP command that helps configure Ethernet Interface settings
remotely. A TCP/IP host starts a Telnet session with the print
server and logs into the device command shell to alter and view
settings.
Example:
telnet 192.75.11.9

Remote Shell
A TCP/IP command that helps configure print server settings
remotely. A TCP/IP host uses this command to remotely execute a
single command on the Ethernet Interface.
Example:
rsh spike list prn
This command remotely executes the npsh command list prn
on the Ethernet Interface named spike.

FTP
FTP can also be used to configure print server settings remotely. A
TCP/IP host uses FTP to store a file containing 1 or more NPSH
commands on the FTP file system. The configuration file must be
FTP ‘put’ to the /config/default/defaultCfg file. The configuration file
can later be executed on demand using the ‘load oem’ command
during a telnet (NPSH) session. The configuration file is also
executed automatically during the power-up sequence when DIP
switch 1 is closed.

Embedded Ethernet
Interface Web Page

Overview
The Ethernet Interface comes with an extremely powerful printer
management tool that allows you to monitor, configure, and
manage both the printer and its print job. The Ethernet Interface
comes with an embedded web server that allows System
Administrators and users access to its printer management
capabilities from a standard web browser.
The Ethernet Interface printer’s IP address is used as a URL,
similar to the URL of an Internet web page. When a web browser is
activated and the printer’s IP address is entered, the printer’s
embedded web server will display its home page, with links to the
printer’s status and configuration settings.
All of the Ethernet Interface’s configuration settings are protected
by a password so unauthorized users cannot make changes. When
you try to open any of the Ethernet Interface’s configuration pages,
you are asked for your user name and password. At the prompt,
you need to enter root (unless you have another user configured
with root privileges) followed by the associated password. If there is
no password, just press ENTER. For more information on setting
passwords, refer to “Ethernet Interface Security” on page 365.

Chapter 3 Configuration

After you configure the Ethernet Interface settings, and click the
SUBMIT button on the related form, reset the Ethernet Interface to
ensure the latest settings are in use. To reset the Ethernet
Interface, go to the System form under the Configuration Menu and
click the REBOOT button.
The embedded Ethernet Interface Web server gives you the ability
to configure the network adapter, monitor printer status, and to
manage print jobs. The Ethernet Interface Web page structure is
divided into several menus, as shown in Figure 4.

Configuration
The Configuration menu items allow you to configure the settings
for the following items:

•

Network - this menu item allows you to change the network
setting for each protocol: TCP/IP, 802.11b, NetBIOS over
TCP/IP, and Netware.

•

Print Path - this menu item allows you to change the name of
the destination queues, and define how the print job will be
preprocessed before printing. It allows you to select what
information to log.

•

Print Model - this menu item displays model settings one at a
time.

•

Log Path - this menu item displays log path settings one at a
time.

•

TN5250/3270 - this menu item allows you to configure the
TN5250/3270 settings.

Configuration

•

SNMP - this menu item allows you to configure the SNMP trap
manager settings. It also allows you to define the printer event
types to monitor, and the e-mail address that should receive
alert notifications.

•

Administration - this menu item allows you to define or change
the printer name, location, description, etc. It also allows you to
change the root and guest user passwords and SMTP server.

•

System - this menu item allows you to reboot the Ethernet
Interface, or restore its settings to the factory default.

Chapter 3 Network Configuration

Network Configuration
The network configuration allows you to specify the setting for each
network protocol. Beside each protocol name is a checkbox which
allows you to enable or disable each protocol depending on your
network printing needs.
NOTE: TCP/IP is the only supported protocol which is always
enabled.

TCP/IP Network

Figure 6. TCP/IP Network Configuration

TCP/IP Network

Interface
The two edit fields contain the Ethernet Interface's IP address and
subnet mask. The check boxes enable the RARP, BOOTP, DHCP,
DNS, and Persist DHCP protocols, which are alternate methods of
assigning IP addresses. On most networks, you want to enter a
permanent IP address and subnet mask and disable RARP,
BOOTP, DHCP, DNS, and Persist DHCP. However, if your network
requires one of these, you should clear the IP address (and
possibly the subnet mask) fields and ensure that the appropriate
check box is selected.

Routing
The routing table tells the Ethernet Interface which router or
gateway to use to access other subnets or hosts. In most
situations, you can simply add your router's IP address as the
default router. All packets destined for other subnets will be
forwarded to the default router for delivery to the destination host. If
you have more complex routing requirements, add static routing
entries for specific hosts or networks in the remaining Routing rows.
Packets with IP addresses that match a given Destination and
Mask (from the first two fields in a Routing row) will be routed to the
router/gateway named in the third field. Packets which do not
match any of the listed Destinations and Masks will be routed to the
default router if one is set.

Chapter 3 Network Configuration

802.11b

Network Name
Enter the wireless network name. Maximum length of 32
characters.
NOTE: When you use telnet, Network Name is called SSID.

Mode
Set the mode of operation for the wireless device. Pseudo, Adhoc,
and Managed are the available settings.
NOTE: When you use telnet, the “managed” setting is called
“infrastructure.”

802.11b

Speed
Change the selected bit-rates. Choosing "auto" will select auto
settings even if some or all of the checkboxes are selected. To
manually choose bit-rates, change speed option to "user" and
check the appropriate checkboxes. If "user" is selected, and no
checkboxes are checked, then the automatic setting is used.

Channel
Set the RF Channel for the wireless device. Selecting "Default" will
ignore user entered value in field, and set the RF Channel to the
default setting.

Antenna
Choose the antenna type. Diverse, Primary, and Aux are the
available settings.

Preamble
Change the preamble length. Default, Short, and Long are the
available settings.

Power Management Mode
Change the power management mode and adjust the power-save
sleep time (milliseconds). Selecting "Off" will turn the Power
Management Mode off and set the power-save sleep time to zero.

Transmit Power
Adjust RF transmit power in percent of full power.

Options
Set the International Mode option

Key
Change the key used for WEP encryption. Ascii-Hex Format.
Ex: 0123456789abcdef0123456789
79

Chapter 3 Network Configuration

Default Key
Change the default key number used for WEP encryption.

Authentication Method
Select the desired authentication method to be used when
communicating with an access point.

User
Enter a user name to be used when authenticating with an access
point. Currently only used for LEAP authentication.

Password
Enter the password to be used when authenticating with an access
point. Currently only used for LEAP authentication.

Windows Network (NetBIOS TCP/IP)

Windows Network (NetBIOS TCP/IP)
TCP/IP is used for Windows (i.e. Netbios, Windows 95/98/Me, and
Windows for Workgroups) printing unless another protocol like IPX
is available. Therefore, mandatory TCP/IP settings (i.e. IP address
and subnet mask) are necessary on the Ethernet Interface. Go to
“TCP/IP Network” on this form to fill in these settings if you haven't
done so already.

Figure 7. Windows Network (NetBIOS TCP/IP) Configuration

Workgroup Name
This name specifies which Windows workgroup the Ethernet
Interface will reside in.

Chapter 3 Network Configuration

Novell Network
ADAPTER,

Novell configuration is supported only on the Ethernet Adapter and
Wireless Adapter.

WIRELESS
ADAPTER

Figure 8. Novell Network Configuration

FrameType
This option determines which framing scheme will be used in
processing Novell signals. The different types of Ethernet packet
formats include:

•

Auto Sensing (the default)

•
•
•
•

Ethernet II
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet 802.2
802.2 Snap

Novell Network

Service Type
Allows you to change the Nest Server. The options are:

•
•
•

Bindery
NDS
Auto

File Server
Define a Novell file server for the Ethernet Interface to service as
either a PSERVER or an RPRINTER.

NDS
NDS (Novell Directory Services) is a distributed database of
network information. An NDS contains information that defines
every object on the network. For more information please see your
Novell administrator.

Pserver
Define a password for the Ethernet Interface to use when logging in
to the file server as a PSERVER. This is an optional file server
security feature.

Rprinter
Define an RPRINTER setup so the Ethernet Interface knows to
service a PSERVER.NLM on a Novell file server. Define the
PSERVER.NLM name, the number of the printer serviced by the
Ethernet Interface within this PSERVER.NLM, and the destination
on the Ethernet Interface you want the print jobs to pass through.

Chapter 3 Print Path Configuration

Print Path Configuration
The Ethernet Interface print path is the path a print job takes when
it reaches the network adapter. First the job goes to a destination/
queue (e.g. d1prn) where it then passes through an associated
model (e.g. m1) for extra processing and logpath (e.g., l1) for job
and printer logging. Finally the job reaches the Ethernet Interface's
I/O port (e.g. PRN) where it passes through to the attached printer.
The “Print Path” form displays one destination's settings at a time.
From here, you can then select another destination or you can go
directly to an I/O port to configure port settings.

Destination Settings

Figure 9. Print Path Configuration, Destination Settings

Name
Name of the destination. The default destination queue names are
d1prn, d2prn, d3prn, and d4prn, d5prn, d6prn, d7prn, and d8prn.

Back Channel
I/O port to receive printer feedback when a print job passes through
this destination. By default all print queues have no backchannel.
84

Destination Settings

Services
Define what type(s) of print services the destination will support. By
default all services are enabled.

Parameters

ADAPTER,

socket

Printing to a TCP port number (e.g. 9100) on the
Ethernet Interface

lpd

Remote printing using the Line Printer Daemon

lpsched

System V printing using the “lp” command

rprinter

Novell's remote printer setup

pserver

Novell's PSERVER setup

netbios

Printing from Windows stations relying on
NetBIOS over TCP/IP

ftpd

Printing using the File Transfer Protocol (FTP)

tn5250/3270

Printing using tn5250/3270 configuration

WIRELESS
ADAPTER
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

Selected Model
Defines the model configuration that is to be associated with the
current destination. The default model names are m1, m2, m3, m4,
m5, m6, m7, and m8.

Chapter 3 Print Path Configuration

Current Model Settings

Figure 10. Print Path Configuration, Current Model Settings

Model Type
The option is available on the Print Model web page. For a
description, see page 88.

Banner Page
The option is available on the Print Model web page. For a
description, see page 89.

Filter
The option is available on the Print Model web page. For a
description, see page 89.

Header String
The option is available on the Print Model web page. For a
description, see page 89.

Trailer String
The option is available on the on the Print Model web page. For a
description, see page 90.
86

Current Log Path Settings

Printer Configuration
The option is available on the Print Model web page. For a
description, see page 90.

Selected Log Path
This option defines the log path configuration that is to be
associated with the current destination.

Current Log Path Settings

Figure 11. Print Path Configuration, Current Log Path Settings

Log Path Type
The option is available on the Log Path web page. For a
description, see page 91.

Log Path Port
The option is available on the Log Path web page. For a
description, see page 92.

Chapter 3 Print Model Configuration

Print Model Configuration

Figure 12. Print Model Configuration

Name
Name of the model. The default model names are m1, m2, m3, m4,
m5, m6, m7, and m8.

Model Type
Define what processing (if any) will be performed on print jobs
passing through the associated destination. If set to “raw”, the job
will not be modified by the network adapter.

Print Model
Current
Log Configuration
Path Settings

Banner Page
Tells the Ethernet Interface to produce a banner page with each
print job. The type of banner page data can be text. You can also
specify whether the banner page should come at the front or the
end of a print job.

Filter
Specify whether the Ethernet Interface is to add carriage returns to
print jobs passing through that contain solitary linefeeds. This is
common with Unix text jobs resulting in stair-stepped output.

Header String
Define an escape sequence to be sent to the printer before each
print job. For example, you may want to send a sequence to print
the job in landscape mode or to a certain tray on the printer. You
can specify up to four separate sequences per header string. The
Ethernet Interface will execute them in order from top to bottom. If
specifying fewer than four sequences, be sure to start at the top
leaving undefined fields at the bottom.
The most common sequences are listed on the form:

•
•

Print landscape - tells the printer to print in landscape mode.
Print portrait - tells the printer to print in portrait mode.

Chapter 3 Print Model Configuration

Trailer String
Define an escape sequence to be sent to the printer after each print
job. For example, you may want to send a sequence to add a
formfeed so you don't have to manually press the formfeed button
on the printer. You may also want to tell the printer to reset itself in
case you have set a header string which tells the printer to do
something special with the job. You can specify up to three
separate sequences per trailer string. The Ethernet Interface
executes them in order from top to bottom. If specifying fewer than
three sequences, be sure to start at the top leaving undefined fields
at the bottom.
The most common sequences are listed on the form:

•

PCL Reset - tells the printer to reset itself once the data
completes

•

End of Transmission (EOT) - tells the printer to force the end of
the job

•

Formfeed - tells the printer to do a formfeed at the end of the
data.

Printer Configuration
Specify a printer configuration number to be loaded before
processing the print job. This ability to associate a printer
configuration to a logical printer model allows you to define up to
eight unique and independent printer personalities in a single
printer. Using this feature, you effectively have eight different
printers in one.
To associate a printer configuration to the currently selected
destination queue, just select the desired printer configuration
number from the drop down list. Once a printer configuration has
been associated with a destination queue, any print job sent to that
destination queue name will cause the printer to load the
associated printer configuration before processing the print job.

Log Path
Current
Log Configuration
Path Settings

Log Path Configuration

Figure 13. Log Path Configuration

Name
Name of the log path. The default names are l1, l2, l3, l4, l5, l6, l7,
and l8.

Logpath Type
Define what type of log information will be tracked for each print job
passing through the associated destination. The types are:

•
•

job - job ID, username, etc.

•

checksum - value used when troubleshooting integrity of data
transferred

•
•

printer - miscellaneous messages from the printer

user - user ID and three messages per job about the start and
finish

i/o port - status of the printer based on the port interface
signals.
91

Chapter 3 Log Path Configuration

Logpath Port
Define where logging information for print jobs passing through the
associated destination will be reported. The choices are:

•
•
•
•

prn - reported to the PRN port

•

email - to an e-mail address (specified by the e-mail address
and the SMTP server IP address edit fields). You can set the
option on the Administration web page.

none - don't report any logging information
TCP/IP port - to a TCP port number (specified in the edit field)
syslog - to a host (specified by the IP address in the edit field)
running a SYSLOG daemon

NOTE: The values defined in Logpath Type and Logpath Port are
common among all destination queue.

Default: no logging turned on.

TN5250/3270
Current Log Configuration
Path Settings

TN5250/3270 Configuration
The TN5250/3270 configuration form allows you to specify settings
for up to eight different TN5250/3270 sessions.
NOTE: The standard Ethernet module does not support TN5250/
3270 protocol. However, the TN5250/3270 software is
available as an option you can order or as factory installed.

Figure 14. TN5250/3270 Configuration, TN5250 Mode

Chapter 3 TN5250/3270 Configuration

Figure 15. TN5250/3270 Configuration, TN3270 Mode

Mode
Specifies the TN protocol mode for the current configuration.

Default: TN5250

Host IP
Specifies the IP address or domain name of the host (iSeries for
TN5250) for the current configuration.

Default: Unconfigured (empty) host.

TN5250/3270
Current Log Configuration
Path Settings

Port
Specifies the UDP port number of the TN5250 or TN3270 server for
the current configuration.

Default: 23

Resource Name
(TN3270 mode) Specifies the name of the iSeries LU session for
the current configuration. The resource name entered will be the
name of the printer device created on the iSeries host for the
current session. The name is limited to 10 characters in length,
must start with an alpha character (a-z, A-Z), and contain only
alphanumeric characters and underscores.

Default: Unconfigured (empty) resource name

Device Description
(TN5250 mode) Specifies the name of the printer device for the
current configuration. The description entered will be the name of
the printer device created on the iSeries host for the current
session. The name is limited to 10 characters in length, must start
with an alpha character (a-z, A-Z), and contain only alphanumeric
characters and underscores.

Default: Unconfigured (empty) description

Message Queue Name
(TN5250 mode) Specifies the queue name to which system
messages will be logged.

Default: QSYSOPR

Message Queue Library
(TN5250 mode) Specifies the queue library to which system
messages will be logged.
Default: *LIBL

Chapter 3 TN5250/3270 Configuration

Device Type
By default, the device type is always set to IBM.

WSCST Name
(TN5250 mode) As declared on the iSeries host for the created
printer device.
Default: Unconfigured (empty) name

WSCST Library
(TN5250 mode) As declared on the iSeries host for the created
printer device.

Auto Connect
Specifies whether the Ethernet will automatically connect to the
iSeries host.
Default: Disabled

Start/Stop Auto Connect
Specifies whether the Ethernet should retry automatic connection
to the iSeries host.
Default: 'Start' if Auto Connect is currently stopped, 'Stop' if Auto
Connect is currently started.

SNMP
Current
Log Configuration
Path Settings

SNMP Configuration
The SNMP Configuration form allows you to configure SNMP trap
managers and the e-mail alert features of the Ethernet Interface. It
allows you to configure how SNMP alerts are processed by a
SNMP trap manager, an Unix syslog logging daemon, and/or have
e-mail notifications sent. Up to 10 SNMP trap managers and e-mail
recipients may be specified. Individual alerts fall into one of 12 alert
group categories, providing the ability to filter alert notices as
desired.

SNMP Manager Alert Posting Settings

Figure 16. SNMP Manager Alert Posting Configuration
Specifies whether alerts from the enabled alert group categories for
this configuration will be sent to the SNMP manager. If this option is
enabled, the following information must be entered:

•

SNMP Manager IP Address - specifies the IP address of the
SNMP trap manager

•

UDP Port - specifies the UDP port number used by the SNMP
trap manager for receiving trap messages. Acceptable values
are 162, and 49152 through 65535

•

Community Name - up to 15 character string specifying the trap
community name.
97

Chapter 3 SNMP Configuration

Syslog Alert Posting Settings

Figure 17. SNMP Syslog Alert Posting Configuration
Specifies whether alerts from the enabled alert group categories for
this configuration will be sent to the Unix syslog daemon. If this
option is enabled, the syslog daemon IP address must be entered
in the syslog field in the System Information section of the
Administration Configuration form.

Email Alert Posting Settings

Figure 18. SNMP Email Alert Posting Configuration
Specifies whether alerts from the enabled alert group categories for
this configuration will be sent to the specified e-mail address. If this
option is enabled, the following information must be entered:

SNMP
Current
Log Configuration
Path Settings

Email Address
Specifies an e-mail address to which alert information will be sent.

Short E-mail Format
Specifies whether a short (15-80 character) alert e-mail message
should be sent.
If enabled, the message will contain the alert description, the
severity level, the device description, and device name (unless the
length of the message exceeds the Short E-mail Message Length,
in which case the message will be truncated).
If disabled, the message will contain additional information
including the device description, device name and location, alert
description, alert group, alert severity level, and printer status.

Default: Disabled

Short E-mail Message Length
Specifies the maximum size of the short e-mail message.
Acceptable values are 15 to 80 characters.

Default: 80 characters

Send Test Message
provides a way to test the validity of the e-mail address/SMTP
server address. If checked, a test message will be sent to the
specified e-mail address when the submit button is pressed.

Default: All alert groups are disabled by default.
If the alert message is to be sent to a cellular phone or pager, the
Short Email Format option should be enabled. Once this option is
enabled, you may specify the maximum e-mail message length
(15-80 characters). When enabled, the message will contain the
alert description, the severity level, device description, and device
name (unless the length of the message exceeds the Short Email
Message Length, in which case the message will be truncated).

Chapter 3 SNMP Configuration

If the Short Email format is disabled, the message will contain
additional information including the device description, device
name and location, alert description, alert group, alert severity
level, and printer status.
To test the validity of the e-mail address and the SMTP server
address, enable the Send Test Message option. If the Send Test
Message box is checked, a test message will be sent to the
specified email address when the submit button is pressed.

Alert Groups

Figure 19. SNMP Alert Groups Configuration
Specifies which alert groups are enabled for reporting for this
configuration. When an alert occurs that is contained in one of the
enabled alert groups, it will be posted to the specified SNMP
manager, Unix syslog daemon, and/or e-mail address. The
following table describes which printer events belongs to which
Alert Group.

100

SNMP
Current
Log Configuration
Path Settings

Table 8. Alert Groups and Printer Events
Alert Group

Printer Events

Offline

Printer is Offline
Hold Print Time Out

Warning

COMM Check
Invalid Address
CU Time Out
CU Not Enabled
File System Full
File Exist
Hex Dump Mode
Half Speed Mode
Printer Warm
Print Head Warm
2B-Toner Density Too High
2C-Toner Density Too Low

Media Input

Load Paper
Paper Out Time Out
Fanfold Paper Empty
No Fanfold Paper
63-CutSheet Feeder Fail
Cutsheet Pick Miss
No Paper Tray
Paper Jam at Entrance
Cutsheet Cover Open
Cutsheet Paper Empty
Tray Mismatch

101

Chapter 3 SNMP Configuration

Table 8. Alert Groups and Printer Events
Alert Group

102

Printer Events

Media Output

Stacker Full
Stacker Jam Time Out
Stacker Full Time Out
Stacker Fault Time Out
Stacker Jam
Stacker Fault
Stack Over Flow
Stack Under Flow
Stacker Fail
Stacker Interlock Fail
Stacker Not Ready

Media Path

Clear Paper Jam
Paper Jam Time Out
Paper Jam Fuser
Paper Jam Exit
Cutsheet Path Open
Paper Jam at Drum
Paper Jam at Fuser
Paper Jam at Exit
Tractor MTR FWD Speed Error
Tracker MTR BKWD Speed Error
Paper Jam at Entrance
Cutsheet Motor Fail
Cutsheet Feeder Fail
Clear Jam at Fuser Input
Clear Jam at Fuser Exit
Clear Jam Near TOF Lever

SNMP
Current
Log Configuration
Path Settings

Table 8. Alert Groups and Printer Events
Alert Group

Printer Events

Marker

Ribbon Stall Time Out
Ribbon Ink Out
Ribbon Stall
Ribbon Drive
Shuttle Over Speed
Ribbon Fault
Ribbon Detected
Print Head Up
Ribbon Broken
Ribbon Load Bad
Ribbon Take-up Full
2A-Toner Empty
Add Toner
Install Toner Cup

Cutter

Cutter Fault
Cutter Fail

Bar Code

Barcode Fail Specification
Barcode Quiet Zone Too Small
Barcode Improper Data Format

Scanner

Unscannable Check Media
Poor Scanning Check Head and Heat
Poor Scanning Inspect Head
Poor Scanning Check Media
Contrast Too Low Check Media

Intervention

These are error messages that need
some kind of user intervention to solve
them.

Consumable

Ribbon Low
Toner Low

Label

Label Present
Gap Not Detected

103

Chapter 3 SNMP Configuration

Table 8. Alert Groups and Printer Events
Alert Group

Printer Events

Power Cart

Recharge Battery
Batt High Volt
Batt Low Volt

RFID

RFID Tag Failed
RFID Max Retry
RFID Comm Error
RFID Read-Only Tag

NOTE: Not all of the alerts are available on all of the printers. The
alerts available for monitoring will depend on the printer
type and the options installed on the printer.

104

System Information

Administration Configuration
The Administration Configuration form is broken down into general
print server-related settings and password security.

System Information

Figure 20. Administration Configuration, System Information

105

Chapter 3 Administration Configuration

The System Information form allows you to specify the following
information about the printer:

Name
Name given to the print server in Novell and Windows
environments.

•
•

For the integrated Ethernet, the default is P_xxxxxx
For the external (E-Net) Adapter, the default is M_xxxxxx

where xxxxxx represents the last six digits of the network adapter's
Ethernet address (e.g., P_01001C and M_091C1A, respectively).
For the Wireless Adapter, the default name is “M302_xxxxx” where
“xxxxx” equals the five digit adapter serial number.

Description
Optional field to help identify the printer’s features and capabilities.

Location
Optional field to help identify the printer’s physical location.

Contact
Optional field to help identify the individual or group responsible for
the printer.

Printer Serial Number
A serial number that the user can enter through the PrintNet
Webpage to keep track of the PrintNet/printer.
NOTE: If the user has not entered a serial number through one of
the Ethernet Interface cards, the printer may use its internal
serial number from EEPROM. If EEPROM is blank, i.e. no
serial number on the board, it will use the MAC address of
the embedded Ethernet, embedded wireless Ethernet, or
external Ethernet, respectively, as the printer’s serial
number.
106

System Information

Syslog
Specifies the IP address of a host running the SYSLOG daemon.
IBM 6500-v debugging or printer logging information can be sent to
the IP address.

Default: Unconfigured (empty).

Email
Defines the user email address to receive printer and job logging
information from log paths on the IBM 6500-v.

Default: Unconfigured (empty).

SMTP Server
Specifies the IP address of the SMTP server to be used for
processing email messages generated by the IBM 6500-v.
Default: Unconfigured (empty).

DNS Server
Specifies the IP address of the domain name server to be used for
resolving host names (e.g. host.domain.com) to IP addresses (e.g.
192.168.0.42).
Default: Unconfigured (empty).
NOTE: If the DNS server is initially blank, the Ethernet will
automatically use the IP address of the DNS server and
enter it in the DNS server field when DHCP is enabled.

107

Chapter 3 System Configuration

Passwords

Figure 21. Administration Configuration, Passwords
Only a user with root privileges can alter the Ethernet Interface's
settings. Guest users can only view settings but cannot alter them.
Both types of users can be assigned passwords. To change a
password, type in the old password in the “Old” field. Then type the
new password twice: once in the “New” field, and once in the
“Confirm” field.

Default: No passwords for root or guest users.

System Configuration

Figure 22. System Configuration

108

Status - I/O Port

The System Configuration form allows you to change the Ethernet
Interface's operation mode. Select “Reboot” to re-power the print
server. Select “Default” to reset the print server and have it come
up with factory default settings.

Status
The Status menu items allow you to view the current status of both
the printer and the network. The submenu items available are as
follows:

•

I/O Port - this menu item allows you to view the current status
of the printer, including the print jobs that are queued or are
currently active.

•

Network - this menu item allows you to view the current status
of the network connection.

Status - I/O Port
The I/O Port Status form allows you to remotely see what is
happening on the Ethernet Interface I/O port. The port's status and
a list of active and queued jobs will be displayed. You can cancel a
job (as long as you have permission to) by clicking on the Cancel
icon beside the desired job. If you see “waiting” in the “Status” line,
this indicates the network adapter is either waiting for data from the
host or for feedback from the printer. If you see “blocked” in this
line, this indicates the printer is not allowing the Ethernet Interface
to send any more data. The printer could be busy processing data it
has already received or it could be in an error state.
The printer status display is automatically refreshed every minute.
NOTE: You cannot cancel a print job with an IPDS Emulation. Do
not click the Cancel icon.
The printer’s buffer size may not allow you to monitor the
real time status of the printer and the print job at the same
time. The status feedback to the host usually reads “printer
idle” unless the print job is significantly large.
109

Chapter 3 IBM Printing Systems

Status - Network
This form allows you to view the current status of the network. The
statistical data provided is broken down by network protocol. You
can use this form to troubleshoot network-related problems.

IBM Printing Systems
The IBM Printing Systems web site which contains product
information, technical support, and more.

110

Windows
Configuration

Overview
This chapter details a complete Windows configuration setup
including:

•

Identifying the Ethernet Interface on the network using TCP/IP
as the underlying protocol

•

Configuring the Ethernet Interface with its mandatory TCP/IP
settings
(IP address and subnet mask)

•

Configuring a new printer on the Windows station

Windows Environment Description
The Ethernet Interface supports network printing under Windows
environments by using TCP/IP. In a Windows NT® setup, pure
TCP/IP is used as the network protocol whereas with Windows
95/98® or Windows Me®, NetBIOS is used over TCP/IP.
The ideal configuration is a network printer defined on the NT/2000
server to be shared by Windows 95/98/Me clients. However, any
Windows station can also go directly to the Ethernet Interface.

111

Chapter 4 Windows Ethernet Interface Configuration

Windows Ethernet Interface Configuration
The IP address and subnet mask are mandatory TCP/IP settings
and are needed before the print server can be detected on the
network. There are also additional optional settings. This section
offers alternative methods for configuring your Ethernet Interface in
a Windows environment and describes some of the more common
optional settings available.

Mandatory
Since TCP/IP is used for Windows printing, the Ethernet Interface
must be configured with a minimum of an IP address and subnet
mask before it can be seen on the network.

Optional
Additional settings, like routing entries, can be configured. This
allows communication across subnets when no other router exists.
You can configure the Ethernet Interface from the printer control
panel, Web browser, host commands, or other IBM utility software.
To configure these options, see “Configuration Tools” on page 52.

Configuration Using ARP
To configure the Ethernet Interface with its IP settings using a
manual arp command:
1. Log on to a Windows station with TCP/IP loaded and located
on the same subnet as the Ethernet Interface.
2. Find the Ethernet address for the Ethernet Interface on the
configuration printout. It must be entered as part of this
procedure.

112

Configuration Using ARP

3. Use the arp command to add an entry into the Windows
station ARP table for the Ethernet Interface. This is the most
common syntax for this command:
Syntax:
arp -s
Example for Microsoft® TCP stacks:

arp -s 192.75.11.9 00-80-72-07-00-60
This example specifies a Ethernet Interface using IP address
192.75.11.9 and Ethernet address 00-80-72-07-00-60.
4. Check if the ARP entry was accepted.
arp -a
You should see an entry in the listed ARP table with the IP
address and Ethernet address specified in Step 3.
5. Ping this IP address to see if the Ethernet Interface can be
seen on your network.
At this point, you should be able to communicate with the
Ethernet Interface from your local Windows station. This means
the print server knows about an IP address and subnet mask
and has these settings in its current memory. However, if the
Ethernet Interface is power cycled, these settings will
disappear unless you store them into flash memory. To do this:
a. Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it
to the URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
NOTE:If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type
root for the ID and press ENTER at the password
prompt (since there is no password by default).
b. At the “Network Configuration” HTML form that displays,
click in the field below the “IP Address” heading and type in
the IP address for the Ethernet Interface.

113

Chapter 4 Windows Ethernet Interface Configuration

Under the “Subnet Mask” heading, enter the Ethernet
Interface subnet mask.

NOTE:If you would like to communicate with the Ethernet
Interface from across routers, you will need to fill in an
entry within the “Routing” section. Please see
“Communicating Across Routers” on page 114 for
more details.
6. Click the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the printer to make the new settings take effect.

Communicating Across Routers
Since Windows environments rely on TCP/IP to communicate with
the Ethernet Interface, crossing routers becomes an issue.
After you have followed one of the Ethernet Interface configuration
methods mentioned, most likely you will only be able to
communicate with the print server from the same subnet. This
means any hosts across a router will not be able to see your
Ethernet Interface. In order for hosts across a router to see your
Ethernet Interface, store a default
router/gateway within the print server so that any packets destined
for another subnet get forwarded to this router automatically. The
router (or series of routers) can then take over, ensuring the
packets get to their final destination on another subnet on your
network.
To configure a default router/gateway within the Ethernet Interface:
1. Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to
the URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type in root
for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).

114

Changing Workgroup Names

2. At the “Network Configuration” HTML form that displays, click in
the first field below the “Gateway” heading and type in the IP
address of the default router/gateway for the Ethernet Interface
subnet.
3. Click the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the print server to make the new settings take effect.

Changing Workgroup Names
Windows environments define groups of related computers as
“workgroups.” By default, “WORKGROUP” is the name that is
assigned to the Ethernet Interface workgroup. However, you may
want to change this to suit your network better. To do this:
1. Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to
the URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type in root
for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
2. At the “Network Configuration” HTML form that displays,
search for the “Windows (NetBIOS TCP/IP)” section and
highlight the “Workgroup Name” field.
3. Type in the new workgroup name for the Ethernet Interface.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the print server to make the new settings take effect.

115

Chapter 4 Windows Ethernet Interface Configuration

Changing Destination Names
When defining some printers within Windows environments, the
Ethernet Interface requires that you specify a predefined
destination rather than any name you would like. For example,
when creating a new printer under Windows NT, a screen similar to
Figure 23 displays.

Figure 23. Windows NT Print Setup Dialogue Box
The first field requires the IP address for the Ethernet Interface, and
the second field must be filled in with a valid destination from the
print server (e.g., d1prn). Otherwise, LPR will not be able to access
the printer. Table 9 outlines the default destinations to choose from.
Table 9. Ethernet Interface Default Destinations

116

Destination

Mapped I/O Port

d1prn

PRN

d2prn

PRN

d3prn

PRN

d4prn

PRN

d5prn

PRN

d6prn

PRN

d7prn

PRN

d8prn

PRN

Changing Destination Names

This name can be changed to something more meaningful using
the built-in HTML forms. To do this:
1. Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to
the URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
destConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/destConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type in root
for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
2. At the “Print Path Configuration” HTML form that displays,
select a destination link from the top of the page to bring up the
appropriate destination form. By default, you should see a line
near the top of the form showing the destinations listed in
Table 9.
3. Once the desired destination HTML form displays, highlight the
“Name” field and type in the new name for this destination.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the print server to make the new setting take effect.

117

Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration

Windows Host Configuration
This section covers Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows NT,
Windows Me, and Windows 9x.

Windows XP/2000 Host Setup
This installation procedure assumes that the Ethernet Interface
adapter is configured with the correct IP address, subnet mask, and
gateway (if required). In addition, the administrator can “ping” and
Telnet to the Ethernet Interface adapter from the server console.
If this is not the case, use the printer front panel to configure the
Ethernet Interface adapter before proceeding.
1. For Windows 2000: select Start Settings Printers.
For Windows XP: select Start Printers and Faxes.
2. For Windows 2000: double click the Add Printer icon.
For Windows XP: click Add A Printer.
The Add Printer Wizard window displays.

118

Windows XP/2000 Host Setup

3. Click Next.

4. If necessary, uncheck the Automatically detect and install
my Plug and Play printer box. Click Next.

119

Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration

5. Click Create a new port and select Standard TCP/IP Port
from the pull down menu. Click Next.

6. Click Next.

120

Windows XP/2000 Host Setup

7. Input the printer name or IP address in the “Printer Name or IP
Address” field. Click Next.

8. Select Custom and click Settings...

121

Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration

9. Complete the Port Settings tab as desired:

•

Raw. (The default.) Make sure “Raw” is selected in the
“Protocol” field. Leave the setting at 9100 (the default) in
the “Raw Settings Port Number” field.

•

LPR. To select the LPR setting, click LPR in the “Protocol”
field. In lowercase characters, type the desired queue
name of d1prn through d8prn in the “LPR Settings Queue
Name” field.

•

SNMP Status Enable. Check the SNMP Status Enable
box if you want the status returned using SNMP. You must
also enter the appropriate information in the “Community
Name” and “SNMP Device Index” fields.

Upon completion, click OK. The Port Settings text box
disappears and the Additional Port Information Required text
box reappears.
122

Windows XP/2000 Host Setup

10. Click Next.

11. Click Finish.
123

Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration

12. Select the IBM 6500 printer driver or download and install it
from the IBM Printer’s Web page at www.printers.ibm.com.
Click Next.

IBM 6500 series

13. Select Yes then click Next.
124

Windows XP/2000 Host Setup

14. Click Next.

15. If you want to print a test page, select Yes and click Next.
If not, click Next.
125

Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration

IBM 6500 series

16. Upon completion, click Finish.

Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup
This installation procedure assumes that the Ethernet Interface
adapter is configured with the correct IP address, subnet mask and
gateway (if required). In addition, the administrator can “ping” and
Telnet to the Ethernet Interface adapter from the server console.
If this is not the case, use the printer front panel to configure the
Ethernet Interface adapter before proceeding.
1. Select Start

Settings Printers.

2. Double click the Add Printer icon. The Add Printer Wizard
window displays.

126

Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup

3. Select My Computer and click Next.

4. Click Add Port ...

127

Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration

5. Double click LPR Port. If LPR Port is not listed, the Microsoft
TCP/IP Printing service is not installed. To install the Microsoft
TCP/IP Printing service, refer to “Installing Microsoft TCP/IP
Printing” on page 140.

6. Enter the IP address of the Ethernet Interface in the Name or
address of server providing lpd: field.
Enter the name of the print queue in the Name of printer or
print queue on that server: field.
NOTE: This name must be a name of an existing destination/
queue on the Ethernet Interface, and it must be lowercase
by default. You will probably use d1prn.
128

Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup

7. Select the Generic/Text only printer driver or install the IBM
6500-v driver from the IBM Printer’s Web page at
www.printers.ibm.com. The generic driver is good for
troubleshooting installation problems. The network
administrator can always go back and install the printer driver
at a later time.

8. Enter a name for the printer in the Printer Name field.
129

Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration

9. Determine if the printer is shared with other network users. If it
is shared, the share name and operating system(s) of the other
workstations that may use this printer must be selected.

10. Print a Windows test page.
130

Windows NT 3.51 Host Setup

11. If there are any problems during or after installation, see
“Windows NT 4.0 Or 2000 Host Setup Problems” on page 139.

Windows NT 3.51 Host Setup
To configure a new printer on a Windows NT 3.51 station:
1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Double click Printers.
3. Select Create a Printer from the Printer menu to display the
dialog box in Figure 24.

Figure 24. Create a Printer Dialog Box
4. Define a name to represent this print setup and select the
appropriate driver for the printer that will be used in this setup.
For the printer driver, choose generic text, Epson FX1050, or
Proprinter.
5. Select Other... under the Print To field.
6. Select LPR Port from the list that displays, and click OK to
display a dialog box similar to the one in Figure 25.

131

Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration

Figure 25. Add LPR Compatible Printer Dialog Box
7. Enter the IP address or host name of the Ethernet Interface in
the Name or address of server providing lpd: field.
8. Enter the name of a predefined destination/queue on the
Ethernet Interface in the Name of printer or print queue on
that server: field.
NOTE: This name must be a name of an existing destination/
queue on the Ethernet Interface, and it must be lowercase
by default. You will probably use d1prn.
9. Click OK when you have specified these two fields.
You now have a new network printer which relies on the standard
TCP/IP print protocol, LPD, to print remotely to a printer with the
Ethernet Interface.

Windows Me or 9x Host Setup
To configure a new printer on a Windows Me or 9x station:
1. Select Start

Settings Printers.

2. Double click the Add Printer icon.
3. Select Network Printer from the Add Printer wizard window.
4. Click Browse to fill in the network path of this printer. The
Browse for Printer dialog box displays.
5. Double click the appropriate workgroup containing the Ethernet
Interface. By default, the print server falls under the workgroup,
“WORKGROUP.”
132

Windows Me or 9x Host Setup

6. Continue searching the network until you see the Ethernet
Interface name, “P_xxxxxx” or “M_xxxxxx”, where “xxxxxx”
equals the last six digits of the print server Ethernet address
found when a configuration is printed.
7. Once you see the Ethernet Interface, double click it to display a
list of predefined destinations/queues from which to choose.
8. Select a destination/queue that will use d1prn.
9. Click OK once you have selected a destination. The network
path window reappears with the path filled in.
10. Click Next.
11. Select the appropriate print driver and click Next.
12. Fill in a name for this new network printer at the next window
and decide if you want this to be the default printer. This printer
name can be anything you would like as long as it is unique.
13. When prompted for a test page, select either Yes or No
depending on the state of the attached printer, and click Finish.
NOTE: Windows may ask for a disk or CD-ROM to load the
appropriate printer driver to complete this new printer
setup.
There should now be a new printer icon within the “Printers” folder.
This new network printer relies on NetBIOS over TCP/IP as the
underlying protocol to print to the Ethernet Interface.

133

Chapter 4 Windows Troubleshooting Tips

Windows Troubleshooting Tips
This section provides information on possible solutions to some
standard Windows and Ethernet Interface configuration errors.

Technical Support
If you require technical support, please have the following
information available when you call:
1. Level of software are you running.
2. Type of attachment do you have.
3. Your host operating system.
4. A detailed description of the problem.
5. How often, and when the problem occurs
6. A detailed description of your network and the components
attached.

Ethernet Interface Cannot Be Found On The
Network
Please follow these tips to determine what the problem may be with
your Ethernet Interface configuration.

134

•

Have you assigned the Ethernet Interface a unique and valid IP
address which corresponds with the other IP addresses on
your network? For example, are you sure no other device is
using this IP address?

•

Are you sure you are trying to talk to the Ethernet Interface
from a Windows station on the same subnet? The print server
can only be seen locally unless you configured a routing entry
earlier.

HTML Configuration Forms Will Not Display

•

If you look at the back of the printer, is the STAT LED flashing
once a second, or is it quicker than that? A slower, once-asecond rate indicates that the print server is in fact configured
with an IP address. A faster rate means it knows nothing about
this, so you may need to try the configuration process again.

•

Have you confirmed that the network connection to the
Ethernet Interface is working correctly? Trying different network
cables and locations will help narrow down the problem.

•

For wireless NIC, is the SSID correct? Is the operation mode
correct?

HTML Configuration Forms Will Not Display
•

Can you ping the Ethernet Interface from the Windows
station? If not, refer to “Ethernet Interface Cannot Be Found On
The Network” on page 134.

•

Have you used the correct URL for the Ethernet Interface home
page? It should be
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9).

•

Is HTTP support enabled? If not, refer to “Web Browser/HTTP
Problem” on page 139.

Errors Occur When Defining An LPR Printer
•

Can you ping the Ethernet Interface from your Windows NT
station? If not, please refer to “Ethernet Interface Cannot Be
Found On The Network” on page 134.

•

Did you specify the correct IP address or host name for the
Ethernet Interface in the first field of the “Add LPR Compatible
Printer” box?

•

Did you specify a valid destination/queue on the Ethernet
Interface in the second field of the “Add LPR Compatible
Printer” dialogue box? If so, did you also enter it in lowercase
letters?
135

Chapter 4 Windows Troubleshooting Tips

Cannot Browse The Ethernet Interface On The
Network
•

Have you looked under the right Windows workgroup? By
default, the Ethernet Interface will be found under
“WORKGROUP.”

•

Are you able to browse other Windows stations and devices on
the network from this same station?

•

Has this Windows station been given enough time to update its
registry so it can see this newly added workgroup device?
Sometimes Windows stations can take considerable time,
depending on the size of the network.

Printer Errors When Printing Or No Output
•

Is there a large job currently printing which is taking up all of the
printer resources? Usually when printing from Windows 95/98
stations, a busy printer can cause Windows to display a printer
error message. This is because it demands immediate printer
attention rather than holding the data until the printer is ready
again. The best way around this is to use a central spooling
station like an NT server.

•

Have you tried restarting the spooler under “Control
Panel:Services?” Sometimes this is needed to get printing
started.

NOTE: As a last resort, you may want to reboot the Windows
station. Sometimes this is the only option to completely
clear this situation. The Ethernet Interface usually has
nothing to do with this problem.

136

TCP/IP Access Problem

TCP/IP Access Problem
If you can ping the printer from a workstation, but you cannot Web
browse, Telnet, or print to the printer through the Ethernet Interface,
there may be an incorrect entry in the TCP access list. For this
workstation to use the Ethernet Interface interface in this case, one
of two things must happen.

•

The TCP list must have an entry added to grant access to this
workstation
— OR —

•

All entries must be deleted from the TCP list to grant all
workstations/hosts access to the above TCP services.

To view the current access list, use the printer control panel to
access the configuration menu (see the User's Manual for
configuration menu information). From the DIAGNOSTICS/Printer
Tests menu choose the E-Net Test Page. When the page prints,
look under the “TCP ACCESS TABLE” section for the TCP access
list entries.
To add/delete a TCP access list entry, refer to “TCP Access Lists”
on page 369.
NOTE: When the following procedure is used, the TCP access list
will be cleared, but all IP addresses will need to be entered
again after the procedure is complete.

ADAPTER,

To reset all Ethernet Adapter or Wireless TCP/IP values to the
factory defaults when access is impossible:

WIRELESS
ADAPTER

1. Obtain a printer configuration printout using the control panel.
See the User's Manual for configuration menu information.
2. Power off the printer.
3. On the Ethernet Adapter or Wireless Interface, place SWITCH
1 in the down position.
4. Power on the printer and wait for the ONLINE state.
5. On the Ethernet Adapter or Wireless Interface, place SWITCH
1 in the up position.
137

Chapter 4 Windows Troubleshooting Tips

6. From a workstation attached to this network segment, create
an ARP entry. The Ethernet Interface IP address and hardware
or Machine Address Code (MAC) address are needed. At the
workstation enter:
arp -s
ping
7. Try to ping this IP address to see if the Ethernet Interface can
be seen on your network. If the interface does not respond,
verify you are on the same network segment as the printer and
that the ARP entry was created.
8. Telnet into the Ethernet Interface using the same IP address
as above. Log in as root. There is no password by default.
9. At the system prompt, enter:
store tcpip from default
config http on
save
reset
NOTE: This will reset all TCP/IP settings to factory default and
reset the Ethernet Interface.
10. Power the printer off and then back on.
11. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
parameters to the desired values.

WIRELESS,
ETHERNET

138

To reset all Integrated Ethernet Interface TCP/IP values to the
factory defaults when access is impossible, contact your IBM
service representative for assistance.

Web Browser/HTTP Problem

Web Browser/HTTP Problem
In some cases, you may not be able to browse the printer Web
page simply because the Ethernet Interface HTTP may be turned
off.
If you cannot ping the Ethernet Interface IP address, make sure
the IP Address, subnet mask, and default gateway are set correctly
by checking the Ethernet Parameters menu from the operator
panel. See the User's Manual for configuration menu information.
If you can ping the Ethernet Interface IP address but cannot
access the Web pages, perform the following procedure to verify
the Ethernet Interface HTTP is turned on.
1. Telnet into the Ethernet Interface and log in as root. There is
no password by default.
2. At the system prompt, enter the following commands:
config http on
save
reset
3. After approximately 30 seconds, point your browser to the
Ethernet Interface IP address. The printer Web pages should
now be accessible.

Windows NT 4.0 Or 2000 Host Setup Problems
The installation procedure covered earlier in this chapter assumes
that the Ethernet Interface adapter is configured with the correct IP
address, subnet mask and gateway (if required), and that the
administrator can ping and telnet to the Ethernet Interface
adapter from the server console. If this is not the case, use the
printer front panel to configure the Ethernet Interface adapter
before proceeding.

139

Chapter 4 Windows Troubleshooting Tips

Installing Microsoft TCP/IP Printing
The Ethernet Interface installation for Windows NT 4.0/2000 also
requires the “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” service on the server. To
install this service, click the Network icon in the Control Panel and
click the “Services” tab. Click “Add Service” and select “Microsoft
TCP/IP printing.” You may encounter the following:

•

Do you have administrative privileges?
This installation requires administrator privileges.

•

“LPR port” is not listed in step 6 on page 128.
Cancel the installation and install the Microsoft TCP/IP printing
service on the server.

•

LPR configuration warning during step 7 on page 128.

The Ethernet cable is not plugged in or the printer is not turned
on. This message is a communication failure between the
NT/2000 server and the Ethernet Interface. Check cabling, IP
address settings, gateway, etc.

140

Windows NT 4.0 Or 2000 Host Setup Problems

•

Test page does not print or prints incorrectly:
1.Is the printer online? Re-send test page.
2.The print queue name in step 6 on page 128 should be d1prn;
however, the name can be changed. To verify the queue
names, print an E-Net Test Page. Refer to your User's
Manual for information.
3.The IBM NT print driver requires P-Series emulation active on
the printer. The Generic/Text driver should print in any
printer emulation.
4.Delete then re-install the Microsoft TCP/IP Print service on
the server.

If you are still experiencing difficulty accessing or browsing the
printer, contact an IBM representative for further assistance.

141

Chapter 4 Windows Troubleshooting Tips

142

AIX/Unix
Configuration

Overview
This chapter details a complete Unix setup including:

•

Configuring the Ethernet Interface with its mandatory TCP/IP
settings (e.g., IP address and subnet mask).

•

Configuring the Unix host station with a new printer.

Unix Environment Description
The Ethernet Interface supports network printing under various
TCP/IP environments including all variations of Unix. Printing can
come from multiple hosts directly or through central spooling
machines.

143

Chapter 5 Unix Ethernet Interface Configuration

Unix Ethernet Interface Configuration
There are mandatory and optional settings needed before the print
server can be detected on the network. This section offers
alternative methods for configuring your Ethernet Interface and
mentions some of the more common optional settings available.

Mandatory
Since TCP/IP is used, the Ethernet Interface must be configured
with a minimum of an IP address and subnet mask before it can be
seen on the network. To configure these options, see
“Configuration Tools” on page 52.

Optional
Additional settings, like routing entries, can be configured allowing
for communication across subnets.
Configuration of the Ethernet Interface can be done from the control
panel through host commands via Telnet or through the Web
browser interface. To configure these options, see “Configuration
Tools” on page 52.

Using ARP
To configure the Ethernet Interface with its TCP/IP settings using a
manual arp command, the syntax is:
arp -s ipaddress ethernetaddress
For the aix command, the syntax is:
aix -s ether ipaddress Mac_address
To use either of these commands:
1. Log on to a Unix station as superuser or root. This station
must be located on the same subnet as the Ethernet Interface
since ARP is limited to subnets.

144

Using ARP

2. Find the Ethernet address for the Ethernet Interface by printing
a configuration or reading it from the control panel. It must be
entered as part of this procedure.
3. Use the arp command to add an entry into the Unix station
ARP table for this Ethernet Interface. Here is the most common
syntax for this command:
arp -s
Example for Microsoft TCP stacks:
arp -s 192.75.11.9 00:80:72:07:00:60
This example specifies an Ethernet Interface using IP address
192.75.11.9 and Ethernet address 00:80:72:07:00:60.
4. Verify that the ARP entry was properly applied.
arp -a
You should see an entry in the listed ARP table with the IP
address and Ethernet address specified in step 3.
5. Try to ping this IP address to see if the Ethernet Interface can
be seen on your network.
At this point, you should be able to communicate with the Ethernet
Interface from your local Unix station. This means the printer knows
about an IP address and subnet mask and has these settings in its
current memory. However, if the Ethernet Interface is shut off,
these settings will be lost unless you store them in flash memory,
as follows:
1. Start a Web browser on your local station and direct it to the
URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type in
root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt
(since there is no default password).
2. At the “Network Configuration” HTML form that displays, click in
the field below the “IP Address” heading and type in the IP
address for the Ethernet Interface.
145

Chapter 5 Unix Ethernet Interface Configuration

3. Under the “Subnet Mask” heading, enter the Ethernet Interface
subnet mask.
NOTE: If you would like to communicate with the Ethernet
Interface from across routers, you will need to fill in an entry
within the “Routing” section. Please see “Communicating
Across Routers” on page 148 for further details.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the print server to make sure the new settings are in effect.

Using RARP
RARP allows you to dynamically assign an IP address to the
Ethernet Interface upon bootup. To configure the Ethernet Interface
with its TCP/IP settings using RARP:
1. On your RARP server, make an entry in the /etc/ethers file for
the Ethernet Interface.
Syntax:

Example:
00:80:72:07:00:60 192.75.11.9
2. Start the RARP daemon on the RARP server if not already
running. If it is running, send an HUP signal to it with the kill
command:
Syntax:
kill -HUP
where is the process ID of the RARP daemon.
3. Power on the Ethernet Interface so that it immediately sends
out an RARP request. Wait one minute to allow the address
assignment process to complete. You should see the STAT
LED on the Ethernet Interface slow down, to indicate that it
knows about an IP address to use.

146

Using BOOTP

4. Try to ping the Ethernet Interface IP address from a local Unix
station to see if it can be seen on your network.
NOTE: You will only be able to communicate with the Ethernet
Interface from a network station on the same subnet as the
print server. The Ethernet Interface needs to be told about
a default router/gateway so any packets that come in from
a different subnet can be returned via this gateway. Please
see “Communicating Across Routers” on page 148 to set
this up.

Using BOOTP
BOOTP allows you to dynamically assign an IP address to the
Ethernet Interface upon bootup. In addition, the BOOTP server can
provide additional details like a default router/gateway address. To
configure the Ethernet Interface with its TCP/IP settings using
BOOTP:
1. On your BOOTP server, make an entry in the /etc/bootptab file
for the Ethernet Interface.
Syntax:
EthernetInterfaceIPname:\
:sm=netmask:\
:hd=homedirectory:\
:bf=null:\
:gw=defaultgateway:\
:ht=ethernet:\
:ha=ethernetaddress:\
:ip=ipaddress:\
:ts=timeserver:\
:to=timezone:
Example:
spike:\
:sm=255.255.255.0:\
:hd=/usr/null:\
:bf=null:\
:gw=192.75.11.1:\
:ht=ethernet:\
:ha=008072070060:\
:ip=192.75.11.9:\
:ts=192.75.11.7:\
:to=25200:
147

Chapter 5 Unix Ethernet Interface Configuration

2. Turn the Ethernet Interface on so that it immediately sends out
a BOOTP request. Wait one minute to allow the IP address
assignment process to complete. You should see the STAT
LED (on the Ethernet Interface) slow down, indicating it knows
about an IP address to use.
3. Try to ping the Ethernet Interface IP address from a network
station to see if it can be seen on your network.
NOTE: You will be able to communicate with the Ethernet Interface
from network stations on different subnets if the print server
has been told about its default router/gateway in the
BOOTP response from the BOOTP server.

Communicating Across Routers
Since Unix environments rely on TCP/IP to communicate with the
Ethernet Interface, crossing routers becomes an issue.
After you have followed one of the Ethernet Interface configuration
methods mentioned (other than the BOOTP method), most likely,
you will only be able to communicate with the print server from the
same subnet. This means any host across a router will not be able
to see your Ethernet Interface. To communicate across a router,
store a default router/gateway within the print server so that any
packets destined for another subnet get forwarded to this router
automatically. The router (or series of routers) can then take over
the process of ensuring the packets get to their final destination on
another subnet on your network.
To configure a default router/gateway within the Ethernet Interface:
1. Start a Web browser on your local station and direct it to the
URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type in root
for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no default password).
148

Manual System V Host Setup

Unix Host Configuration
There may be times when you would prefer or need to perform the
manual setup steps for a new printer definition. There may also be
times when you require a less common print solution such as direct
socket capabilities. This section covers these additional setups.

Manual System V Host Setup
This setup involves any Unix operating system using System V
print spooling (e.g., SCO, Solaris®, HP-UX®, DG/UX®, etc.). This
means an interface file is used for each defined printer and, in the
case of any System V print setup involving an Ethernet Interface,
the RSHD protocol is used to transfer data from the host to the print
server.
To manually configure a new System V printer on a Unix station,
create a dummy device file that acts as a locking mechanism
between contending print jobs.
Syntax:
touch /dev/EthernetInterfacename.portname
where EthernetInterfacename is the host or IP name of the print
server and portname is one of its four I/O ports.
Example:
touch /dev/spike.prn

149

Chapter 5 Ethernet Installation on HP-UX

Ethernet Installation on HP-UX
LPR is supported in HP/UX Version 9.0 and greater. To configure a
print queue using LPR, issue the following commands.
NOTE: Requires root privilege. The default BSD interface file
“rmodel” will be used.
Syntax:
lpshut
lpadmin -pqueue_name -mrmodel -v/dev/null
-orm[printer_ip] -orpd1prn -ob3
lpsched
accept queue_name
enable queue_name
queue_name = any unique printer name
[printer_ip] = IP address of the printer or the DNS name (without
brackets)
d1prn = Ethernet remote printer name*
Explanation of command line:
-m indicates the model rmodel
-v indicates the use of /dev/null as a file interlock to avoid
contention
-orm is the name of remote Print Server
-orp is the name of the remote printer on the remote Print Server
-ob3 declares that the remote Print Server is a BSD type
NOTE: The “lpshut” command stops the HP spooling system; do
not perform when print jobs are active.
The default Ethernet destination name is d1prn, however, this
name can be changed. To verify the queue name, print an Ethernet
Test Page or telnet to the adapter and run a “list dest” command.
To print to this queue, use normal lp syntax:
# lp -dqueue_name filename
150

Solaris
– 7 Ethernet
Manual2.6
System
V Host Setup

Solaris 2.6 – 7 Ethernet Setup
NOTE: Requires Superuser privilege in the borne shell. Assume
that you can ping and Telnet to the adapter.
The IP address of the Ethernet adapter must be placed in the /etc/
hosts file.
Syntax:
lpadmin -p [queue_name] -v
lpadmin -p [queue_name] -i
netstandard
lpadmin -p [queue_name] -o
protocol=bsd -o timeout=60
lpadmin -p [queue_name] -s
enable {queue_name]
accept [queue_name]

/dev/null
/usr/lib/lp/model/
dest=[host_name] -o
[host_name]!d1prn -I any

where
[queue _name] = any name, but not the name in the etc/hosts file or
d1prn
[host_name] = name in etc/hosts file

Troubleshooting
This installation procedure assumes that the Ethernet adapter is
configured with the correct IP address, subnet mask, and gateway
(if required). You can also ping and telnet to the Ethernet adapter.
Print an E-Net Test Page to verify the Ethernet settings.
DIAGNOSTICS Printer Tests E-Net Test Page or Ethernet
TestEnter.
The default Ethernet queue name is d1prn, however, the name can
be changed. To verify the queue name, print an E-net Test Page or
telnet to the adapter and run a “list dest” command.
NOTE: Depending on the shell, preceed the ! character with a \ to
avoid shell script errors.

151

Chapter 5 SCO Setup

SCO Setup
1. Login as a root or administrator privileges user.
2. Acquire an unused Internet address (IP) from your Network
Administrator and choose a unique name for the Ethernet
adapter.
3. Add your Ethernet Internet address and host name to your
system host table by appending the following line to the /etc/
hosts file:

Example:
199.230.23.76

salesdept

4. If you have not installed the SCO RLP (BSD lpd) package
which is part of the TCP/IP package, run mkdev to invoke the
RLP installation script:
#mkdev rip
The following screen displays:

Remote printing configuration
Do you want to install or delete remote printing (i/d/q)?

152

SCO Setup
Manual System V Host

Type i to install and press Enter or Return. The additional
prompts display.

Remote printing configuration
Do you want to install or delete remote printing (i/d/q)? i
Installing Remote Line Printing

Remote line printing working directory already exists.
Now type y and press Enter or Return. y allows you to
configure an LPD printer. Type n and press Enter or Return.
n will exit.
5. Run rlpconf as root user. The following prompts display:

Remote printing configuration
Enter information for remote printers or local printers accepting
remote printing requests

Please enter the printer name (q to quit):

153

Chapter 5 SCO Setup

Type in the name you wish to call this printer within SCO and
press Enter or Return. The following prompt displays:

Remote printing configuration
Enter information for remote printers or local printers accepting
remote printing requests

Please enter the printer name (q to quit): d1prn

Is d1prn a remote printer or a local printer (r/l)?
Type r for a remote printer and press Enter or Return. The
following prompt displays:

Remote printing configuration
Enter information for remote printers or local printers accepting
remote printing requests

Please enter the printer name (q to quit): d1prn

Is d1prn a remote printer or a local printer (r/l)? r

Please enter the name of the remote host that d1prn is attached
to:

154

SCO Setup
Manual System V Host

Type in the host name as configured in teh /etc/hosts file. Press
Enter or Return. The following prompt displays:

Remote printing configuration
Enter information for remote printers or local printers accepting
remote printing requests

Please enter the printer name (q to quit): d1prn

Is d1prn a remote printer or a local printer (r/l)? r

Please enter the name of the remote host that d1prn is attached
to:
salesdept

Printer d1prn is connected to host salesdept
Is this correct (y/n)?

155

Chapter 5 SCO Setup

Type y and press Enter or Return. The following prompt
displays:

Remote printing configuration
Enter information for remote printers or local printers accepting
remote printing requests

Please enter the printer name (q to quit): d1prn

Is d1prn a remote printer or a local printer (r/l)? r

Please enter the name of the remote host that d1prn is attached
to:
salesdept

Printer d1prn is connected to host salesdept

Is this correct (y/n)? y

If ‘salesdept’ currently runs SCO OpenServer Release 5 or
above, it can support the extended remote printer protocol.

Do you want to turn on the “extended RLP protocol” support flag.
If you’re not sure, answer ‘n’? (y/n) [n]:

156

SCO Setup
Manual System V Host

Type n and press Enter or Return. The following prompt
displays:

Remote printing configuration
Enter information for remote printers or local printers accepting
remote printing requests

Please enter the printer name (q to quit): d1prn

Is d1prn a remote printer or a local printer (r/l)? r

Please enter the name of the remote host that d1prn is attached
to:
salesdept

Printer d1prn is connected to host salesdept

Is this correct (y/n)? y

If ‘salesdept’ currently runs SCO OpenServer Release 5 or
above, it can support the extended remote printer protocol.

Do you want to turn on the “extended RLP protocol” support flag.
If you’re not sure, answer ‘n’? (y/n) [n]: n

Would you like this to be teh system default printer? (y/n):

157

Chapter 5 SCO Setup

If it is the system default, then all jobs submitted without a
printer name will go to this printer. If it is not the system default,
it must be specified when printing. Type y or n and press Enter
or Return.
The printer is now installed and ready to print.
6. From a shell prompt, use this command to test the printer:
#lp -dprint_name file_name
where print_name is the name of the printer you created and
file_name is the name of an appropriate file to test print.

Troubleshooting
This installation procedure assumes that the Ethernet adapter is
configured with the correct IP address, subnet mask and gateway
(if required). In addition, the administrator can ping and telnet to the
Ethernet adapter from the server console.
NOTE: If this is not the case, use the printer front panel or the
IPAssign utility to configure the Ethernet adapter before
proceeding.

158

Manual LPR/LPD Host Setup

Manual LPR/LPD Host Setup
The Ethernet Interface also supports Unix operating systems which
follow a BSD print system (e.g., SunOS 4.1.x). This means a
printcap file is used to define all printers available on the host, and
interface scripts are not commonly used. Instead, LPR/LPD printers
are defined.
To manually configure an LPR/LPD printer on a BSD Unix system:
1. Define an entry for this new printer within the printcap file, /etc/
printcap.
Syntax:
printername:
:sh:pw#80:mx#0:\
:rm=EthernetInterfacename:\
:rp=EthernetInterfacedestination:\
:lp=:\
:sd=/usr/spool/lpd/printername:\
:lf=/usr/spool/lpd/printername/log:\
:af=/usr/spool/lpd/printername/acct:
where printername is any name you would like to give to this
new printer, EthernetInterfacename is the host or IP name
of the print server, and EthernetInterfacedestination
is one of the pre-defined destinations/queues on the device.
Example:
6500-v:
:sh:pw#80:mx#0:\
:rm=spike:\
:rp=d1prn:\
:lp=:\
:sd=/usr/spool/lpd/ 6500-v:\
:lf=/usr/spool/lpd/ 6500-v/log:\
:af=/usr/spool/lpd/ 6500-v/acct:
2. Create the spool directory specified by the sd= entry in the
printcap entry for this printer.
Example:
touch /usr/spool/lpd/ 6500-v

159

Chapter 5 SCO Setup

3. Create the log and account files specified by the lf= and af=
entries in the printcap entry for this printer.
Example:
touch /usr/spool/lpd/6500-v/log
touch /usr/spool/lpd/6500-v/acct
4. Change permissions and ownership on the spool directory and
everything within it.
Example:
chmod -R g+rwX,o+rX /usr/spool/lpd/ 6500-v
chmod -R daemon.daemon /usr/spool/lpd/ 6500-v
5. Start the printer daemon for this new printer.
Example:
lpc start 6500-v
You now have a new printer which relies on LPR/LPD to print to a
Ethernet Interface printer. Use the following command to test
printing:
Syntax:
lpr -P printername filename
Example:
lpr -P 6500-v /etc/hosts

160

Ethernet Configuration for AIX 4

Ethernet Configuration for AIX 4
Before you set up the printer, it is good to know the ways a print job
can be filtered.
1. Standard processing. Filtering is done on the printer with no
processing on the host.
2. Local Filtering. Filtering is done on the host. Be sure to specify
the printer model during install.

Standard Processing
1. Enter SMIT select devices.
2. Select Printer/Plotter.
3. Select Print Spooling.
4. Add a Remote Print Queue.
5. Set the type of Remote Printing to Standard processing.
6. Enter the following Remote printer settings:

Name of queue

any_name, user selectable

Host Name of Remote Server

name in /etc/hosts file or the
NIC IP address

Name of Queue on Remote
Server

d1prn

Type of Print Spooler

BSD (Press the list button and
choose BSD)

161

Chapter 5 SCO Setup

Local Filtering
1. Enter smitty mkvirprt.
2. Add a Remote Print Queue.
3. Set the type of Remote Printing to Local Filtering...
4. Set the Printer Manufacturer to IBM.
5. Set the Printer Type to IBM4202.

IMPORTANT

You must change the printer emulation to Proprinter.
6. Enter the following Remote Print Queue with Local Filtering
settings:

Name of queue

any_name, user selectable

Host Name of Remote Server

name in /etc/hosts file or the
Ethernet IP address

Name of Queue on Remote
Server

d1prn

Type of Print Spooler

BSD (Press the list button and
choose BSD)

Leave Pass-Through Flag

Yes

162

AIX Remote Queue Time–Out Setting

To verify the Ethernet settings, print an E-net Test Page by doing
the following:

•

DIAGNOSTICS Printer Tests
Ethernet Test Enter.

E-Net Test Page or

The default Ethernet queue name is d1prn (in lower case), however
the name can be changed. To verify the queue name, print an E-net
Test Page or telnet to the adapter and do a “list dest” command.

AIX Remote Queue Time–Out Setting
Symptoms: Print jobs restart or queue goes down.
If the queue is set up for standard processing (not local filtering),
add -T50 flag to rembak to the queue device stanza for the queue
in /etc/qconfig
backend = /usr/lib/lpd/rembak -T50
If the queue was set up for local filtering edit the file
/usr/lib/lpd/pio/etc/piorlfb and change the line;
typeset piorlfb_rbflags=’’’’
to
typeset priorlfb_rbflags=”-T50”

Printing With FTP
Print jobs can also be sent to the Ethernet Interface using the File
Transfer Protocol (FTP). To do this:
1. On your network station, change to the directory containing the
file you want to print.
2. Open an FTP session with the Ethernet Interface.
Syntax:
ftp EthernetInterfaceIPaddress
3. Log in as root.
4. At the password prompt, press ENTER (since there is no
default password).
163

Chapter 5 SCO Setup

5. Change to the dest directory.
Syntax:
cd dest
6. List the contents of this directory using the dir command and
determine which destination/queue you would like to send the
print job through. Most likely, you will select d1prn for the PRN
port.
7. Change to this destination directory.
Example:
cd d1prn
8. Change the mode to correspond with the type of file you are
going to print. By default, ASCII is set for text-only files, but if
you need to print both text and graphics, select binary using the
bin command.
9. Place the file to be printed within this directory on the Ethernet
Interface, so it can be spooled and printed.
Syntax:
put filename
10. Close the FTP session, unless you have more jobs to print.
Syntax:
quit

164

Direct Socket Printing

Direct Socket Printing
Within TCP/IP environments, there are some setups which require
the host to print directly to a TCP port number on the Ethernet
Interface, bypassing all of the higher level destination/queue
names. If you run into a setup which requires this, you will need to
define two parameters for a new print setup:
1. Ethernet Interface IP address. The IP address or host name
of the print server to which you want to print.
2. Ethernet Interface TCP port number. A pre-defined number
for the I/O port on the print server. 9100 is the default port
number.
Though the host will be sending directly to a TCP port number on
the Ethernet Interface, the port numbers are still mapped to
destinations/queues in case there is some type of special
processing or logging to be done to the job. However, the
destination name is of no concern in this type of printer definition.
Only the two parameters mentioned above need to be defined for
printing to work.

Printing From AIX
Version 4.0 and higher of AIX® offers LPR/LPD support for network
printing. This means, to set up a new printer under this operating
system, you only need to define these two parameters:
1. Ethernet Interface IP address. The IP address or host name
of the print server to which you want to print.
2. Ethernet Interface destination/queue. A pre-defined name
on the print server telling the device to which I/O port to send
the jobs. Most likely, you will use d1prn for the PRN.

165

Chapter 5 Printing From AIX

Setting Up AIX 4.x
1. Ensure the 6500-v AIX driver/colon files are installed on the
AIX machine. Syntax:
lsdev -P -c printer -F “type subclass description”
| sort -u | grep 6500-v
If “ibm6500-v” does not appear on the list, the proper driver files
are not installed. Obtain the driver files and follow the
instructions included with them to install the files on your
machine.
2. At the command prompt, enter smitty mkvirprt.
3. At the “Add a Printer Queue” screen, select “remote.”
4. At “Type of Remote Printing,” select “Local Filtering...”
5. At “Remote Printing Type,” select “IBM.”
6. At the next “Remote Printing Type,” select “ibm6500-v.”
7. At “Add a Remote Print Queue with Local Filtering,” perform the
following:
a. Type in any print queue names desired in the entry fields
next to the desired emulation(s).
NOTE: At least one print queue name field must be filed in.
b. In the “HOSTNAME” field, type in the hostname or IP
address of the printer Ethernet.
c.

In the “QUEUE” field, type in one of the four possible print
queue names found on the printer Ethernet. d1prn, d2prn,
d3prn, and d4prn are the four default LPD print queues on
the Ethernet. If the defaults have not been changed,
choose any one of these queues.
NOTE: When the IPDS feature is installed, queue name
d4prn is not available.

d. In the “TYPE” field, leave the value as “AIX Version 3 or 4.”
e. Leave “PASS-THROUGH FLAG” field as “yes.”
f.

Press ENTER to complete the setup.

g. After processing has finished, press F10 to exit SMIT.
166

Ethernet Interface Cannot Be Found On The Network

8. At the command prompt, enter eng -A to view the print queues
just entered.
9. Enter qprt -Pqueuename filename to send a job to the
printer.

Unix Troubleshooting Tips
This section provides information on possible solutions to some
standard configuration errors. If you require technical support,
please have as much of the following information available when
you call:
1. Level of software are you running.
2. Type of attachment do you have.
3. Your host operating system.
4. How often, and when the problem occurs.
5. A detailed description of the problem.
6. A detailed description of your network and the components
attached.

Ethernet Interface Cannot Be Found On The
Network
•

Have you configured the Ethernet Interface with a unique and
valid IP address which corresponds with the other IP addresses
on your network? For example, are you sure no other device is
using this IP address?

•

Are you sure you are trying to talk to the Ethernet Interface
from a Unix station on the same subnet? Currently, the print
server can only be seen locally unless you configured it with a
routing entry.

167

Chapter 5 Unix Troubleshooting Tips

•

If you look at the back of the printer, is the STAT LED flashing
once a second or is it quicker than that? A slower, once-asecond rate tells you that the print server is in fact configured
with an IP address. A faster rate indicates it knows nothing
about this, so you may need to try the configuration process
again.

•

Have you confirmed that the network connection to the
Ethernet Interface is working correctly? Trying different network
cables and locations will help narrow down the problem.

Nothing Prints
•

Can you ping the Ethernet Interface from your Unix station? If
not, please refer to “Ethernet Interface Cannot Be Found On
The Network” shown above.

•

Is the Ethernet Interface able to communicate with the attached
printer? To test this, you can:
1.Telnet to the print server (e.g., telnet 192.75.11.9)
and log in as root.
2.Enter the command start fox prn.
3.Execute stop prn right after starting the test.
4.This test will send the same text line over and over to the
attached printer.

168

•

Is the job getting stuck in the Unix host queue? If so, check that
the printer is online. If it is, there is a configuration error on the
Unix station, so creating a new print setup may be needed.

•

Is the control panel showing any activity to indicate it is
receiving data? If so, but there is nothing printing, check if a
manual form feed is needed. Also, ensure that the printer can
support the type of job coming through.

Stair-Stepped Output

•

Do all jobs fail or just certain ones? For example, is it possible
that jobs from a certain application are the only ones to fail? If
so, check the type of data it sends to make sure it matches the
printer emulation. Check the application printer configuration
for mistakes.

•

If you are using System V, was the spooler restarted?

Stair-Stepped Output
Stair-stepped output is print which starts at the top left of the page
but every line thereafter starts a little further over to the right. It also
refers to Unix jobs that print one line of text at the top of a page
followed by a series of blank pages.
This kind of output happens only with Unix text jobs if carriage
return insertion is not incorporated into the print setup. The printer
may be told to do a linefeed, but the Unix job does not specify
anything about a carriage return to follow this.
To fix this, carriage return insertion must be enabled somewhere in
the print setup. The easiest and most common location is on the
Ethernet Interface itself within the appropriate model. The feature is
called “onlcr” and the command syntax is:
set model modelname stty onlcr
save
For example, if printing to the destination, d1prn, the associated
model is m1. Therefore, the command is:
set model m1 stty onlcr
save

169

Chapter 5 Unix Troubleshooting Tips

No Form Feed Or Extra Page Comes Out
Unix text jobs may also have problems outputting the last page of a
job especially when the BSD Remote (LPD) print method is used.
This means the form feed button has to be pressed on the printer to
get this last page out.
To make this process automatic, tell the Ethernet Interface to
handle this task by setting this feature “on” in the appropriate
model. The command syntax is:
set model trailer $FF
save
For example, if printing to the destination, d2prn, the associated
model is m2. Therefore, the command is:
set model m2 trailer $FF
save
For default destination model mappings of the Ethernet Interface,
please see “Ethernet Interface Naming Schemes” on page 373.

TCP/IP Access Problem
If you can ping the printer from a workstation, but you cannot Web
browse, Telnet, or print to the printer through the Ethernet Interface,
there may be an incorrect entry in the TCP access list. In order for
this workstation to use the Ethernet Interface in this case, one of
two things must happen:

•

the TCP list must have an entry added to grant access to this
workstation, or

•

all entries must be deleted from the TCP list to grant all
workstations/hosts access to the above TCP services.

TCP/IP Access Problem

To add/delete a TCP access list entry, refer to “TCP Access Lists”
on page 369.
NOTE: When the following procedure is used, the TCP access list
will be cleared, but all IP addresses will need to be entered
again after the procedure is complete.

ADAPTER,

To reset all Ethernet Adapter or Wireless TCP/IP values to the
factory defaults when access is impossible:

WIRELESS
ADAPTER

1. Obtain a configuration printout using the control panel. See the
User's Manual for configuration menu information.
2. Power off the printer.
3. On the Ethernet Adapter or Wireless Interface, place SWITCH
1 in the down position.
4. Power on the printer and wait for the ONLINE state.
5. On the Ethernet Adapter or Wireless Interface, place SWITCH
1 in the up position.
6. From a workstation attached to this network segment, create
an ARP entry. The Ethernet Interface IP address and hardware
or Machine Address Code (MAC) address are needed. At the
workstation enter:
arp -s
ping
7. Try to ping this IP address to see if the Ethernet Interface can
be seen on your network. If the interface does not respond,
verify you are on the same network segment as the printer and
that the ARP entry was created.
8. Telnet into the Ethernet Interface using the same IP address
as above. Log in as root with no password.
9. At the system prompt, enter:
store tcpip from default
config http on
reset
NOTE: This will reset all TCP/IP settings to factory default and
reset the Ethernet Interface.
171

Chapter 5 Unix Troubleshooting Tips

10. Power the printer off and then back on.
11. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
parameters to the desired values.
12. If the Web browser access does not work, telnet into the
Ethernet Interface as root. Enter the following command:
config http on

ETHERNET,
WIRELESS

To reset all Integrated Ethernet Interface TCP/IP values to the
factory defaults when access is impossible, contact your IBM
service representative for assistance.

Front Panel Message - Dynamically Set Params
Read Only
This is not an error. It is an informational message warning that the
IP address has been dynamically set by dhcp, rarp, or bootp.
To assign a static IP address, turn off the rarp, bootp, and dhcp on
the adapter. Use the following procedure:
1. Telnet to the adapter. Login = root, password = (Enter key)
Telnet commands are:
store tcpip 1 opts -rarp -bootp -dhcp
reset
Wait two minutes for the adapter to reset.
2. Program the IP address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway (if
required) from the front panel.

172

Novell Configuration

Overview
NOTE: Novell configuration is not applicable to the integrated
Ethernet.

ADAPTER,

This chapter applies to the Ethernet Adapter and Wireless Adapter
and details a complete Novell setup, including:

WIRELESS
ADAPTER

•
•

Identifying the Ethernet Interface on the network.

•

Configuring a new print queue on the file server.

Configuring the Ethernet Interface with its mandatory print
setup settings.

For information about additional options available with the 10/100
Base-T interface, see “Novell Configuration For 10/100Base-T
Interfaces” on page 191.
NOTE: The NetWare 3.x PConsole procedures (page 176) use
PConsole v3.75. The NetWare 4.x PConsole procedures
(page 182) use PConsole v4.15.

Novell Environment Description
The Ethernet Interface supports network printing under Novell
environments by using IPX. It supports all 3.x versions of NetWare.
Version 4.x and 5.x is supported under bindery emulation only.

173

Chapter 6 Novell Ethernet Interface Configuration

Novell Ethernet Interface Configuration
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

Mandatory
Under all Novell environments, the Ethernet Interface does not
require any network settings to make it visible on the network.
Simply plug it in to your network and power it on. However, with a
new print queue setup on a Novell file server, there can be
mandatory settings needed on the Ethernet Interface.

Optional
Additional settings are available to fine-tune the Ethernet
Interface’s Novell functionality. These options include:

174

•

NDS Context. The NDS context in which the print server object
was created. If you create the printer server object in a different
file server object from the file server you logged into, then to
ensure the absolute path, you must activate the NDS context.

•

NDS Tree. The NDS tree the print server object was created in.
This is only needed if your environment uses more than one
NDS tree.

•

Mode. The mode the Ethernet Interface will run in. This can be
auto, bindery, or NDS. The default is auto so that the Ethernet
Interface can autosense which mode it should run in. See
“NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x RPRINTER Setup” on page 185
for information on what to do when using both bindery and NDS
file servers at the same time.

Using HTML Forms

•

Preferred File Server. In a bindery setup, this specifies the file
server that the print server object was created on. In an NDS
setup, this specifies a file server(s) that the print server object
resides on. Since NDS is distributed, most administrators will
not know which file server(s) the print server object is actually
stored on, so in most NDS environments this option is not used.

For additional information about these options, see “Novell
Configuration For 10/100Base-T Interfaces” on page 191.

Using HTML Forms
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

When defining a new print queue on a Novell file server, a new print
server must be defined to represent the Ethernet Interface. This
name must match the predefined name given to the print server.
The default print queue name is M_xxxxxx, where xxxxxx
represents the last six digits of the Ethernet Interface address found
on the configuration printout or control panel settings under
Ethernet Parameters, MAC address (e.g., M_091C1A)
To use the HTML forms to define a print queue, do the following:
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can
communicate with the print server over TCP/IP. The command
to change the print server name is:
Syntax:
store pserver name newname
Example to change the name to micro1:
store pserver name micro1
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
adminConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/adminConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type in root
for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).

175

Chapter 6 Novell Host Configuration

3. At the “Administration Configuration” HTML form that displays,
highlight the field beside the “Name” heading and type in the
new name of the print server.
4. Click the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the printer to make the new setting take effect.

Novell Host Configuration
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

Under all versions of NetWare, both PSERVER and RPRINTER
setups are supported by the Ethernet Interface. Since a PSERVER
setup is the most common, you will find the necessary steps to
configure the Ethernet Interface as a PSERVER shown first.
Configuration for RPRINTER and NPRINTER setup follow the
PSERVER information.
NOTE: In a NetWare environment the Ethernet Interface will
service only one of the four available printer objects (such
as d1prn); do not configure more than one printer object
from the printer. The Ethernet Interface cannot service
multiple file servers at one time; do not configure multiple
file servers to access the printer.

NetWare Version 3.x PSERVER Setup
To configure a print queue on a NetWare 3.x network:
1. Log on to the Novell file server as supervisor.
2. Enter PCONSOLE.
3. Select “Print Queue Information” from the PCONSOLE Main
Menu.
4. Press INSERT to add a new queue to the list of currently
defined queues showing.
5. Type in the name of this new queue when prompted and press
ENTER. This can be any name you would like.
6. Press ESCAPE to return to the Main Menu.
7. Select “Print Server Information” and press ENTER.
176

NetWare Version 3.x PSERVER Setup

8. Press INSERT when the list of existing print servers displays.
9. Type the name of the Ethernet Interface when prompted for a
print server name, and press ENTER when done. The default is
M_xxxxxx, where xxxxxx represents the last six digits of the
Ethernet address found on the configuration printout or control
panel settings under Ethernet Parameters, MAC address
(e.g., M_091C1A).
10. Back at the print server list, select this newly defined Ethernet
Interface and press ENTER.
11. Select “Print Server Configuration” from the menu that displays.
12. Select “Printer Configuration” from the next menu to display a
list of configured printers.
13. Select the first item listed as “NOT INSTALLED” and press
ENTER.
14. At the printer configuration window, type in the name for this
new printer. The name must be one of the predefined
destinations/queues on the Ethernet Interface, normally
d1prn.
15. Go to the “Type” field and press ENTER to see the possible
choices.
16. Select “Defined Elsewhere” from this list.
17. When done, press ESCAPE and select “Yes” to save the
changes to this new printer.
18. Press ESCAPE again to return to the “Print Server
Configuration” menu.
19. Select “Queues Serviced by Printer.”
20. Select this new printer from the printer list that displays and
press ENTER.
21. At the empty queue list that displays, press INSERT.
22. Select the queue created in step 5 and press ENTER.
23. When prompted for the priority, press ENTER to select the
default or select a priority.
177

Chapter 6 Novell Host Configuration

24. Press ESCAPE until back at the PCONSOLE Main Menu.
25. Repower the printer.
26. Wait two minutes and then select “Print Queue Information”
from the PCONSOLE Main Menu.
27. Select this new queue from the menu that displays.
28. Select “Currently Attached Servers” to see which print server is
servicing this queue.
At this point, the Ethernet Interface name (e.g., M_091C1A) should
show within this window. This means the Ethernet Interface knows
about this new Novell print queue it must service as a PSERVER.
Therefore, it will poll this queue regularly looking for jobs to print.
NOTE: In a NetWare environment the Ethernet Interface will
service only one of the four available printer objects (such
as d1prn); do not configure more than one printer object
from the printer. The Ethernet Interface cannot service
multiple file servers at one time; do not configure multiple
file servers to access the printer.

178

NetWare Version 3.x RPRINTER Setup

NetWare Version 3.x RPRINTER Setup
These steps are for Novell environments with Netware 3.x (or
earlier) file servers.
To configure a new RPRINTER on a NetWare 3.x network:
1. Log in to the Ethernet Interface command shell, npsh, as root.
If you have TCP/IP available and this print server already has
an IP address stored within it, you can use the built-in HTML
configuration forms or a Telnet session. Please see
“Configuration Tools” on page 52 for further details. If you have
only Novell available, you will need to use a PC, laptop, or
terminal.
NOTE: If you use HTML configuration, you will need to go to the
“Network Configuration” HTML form
(i.e., http://IPaddress/networkConf.html;
e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
and look under the “Novell” section. The settings in the
following step are found there. If using a Telnet session,
you will need to manually execute the commands listed in
the next step.
2. Store the RPRINTER settings on the Ethernet Interface. This
will refer to an existing PSERVER.NLM on the file server or to
one that you will create later in these steps.
Syntax:
store rprinter add

An example for an RPRINTER servicing printer 0 of the
PSERVER.NLM called pserver1 and sending jobs to the
Ethernet Interface destination d1prn is:
store rprinter add pserver1 0 d1prn
3. Leave this Ethernet Interface login session and log on to the
NetWare 3.x file server as “Supervisor.”

179

Chapter 6 Novell Host Configuration

4. Load a PSERVER.NLM if one is not already loaded. This will
be the PSERVER that the Ethernet Interface services as an
RPRINTER, so it must match the PSERVER name given in
step 2.
5. Enter PCONSOLE.
6. Select “Print Queue Information” from the PCONSOLE Main
Menu.
7. Press INSERT to add a new queue to the list of currently
defined queues.
8. Type in the name of this new queue when prompted, and press
ENTER. This can be any name you would like.
9. Click ESCAPE to return to the Main Menu.
10. Select “Print Server Information” and press ENTER.
11. Press INSERT when the list of existing print servers displays.
12. Select the print server that you want the Ethernet Interface to
service as an RPRINTER. This is the PSERVER.NLM loaded
in step 4.
13. Select “Print Server Configuration” from the menu that displays.
14. Select “Printer Configuration” from the next menu to display a
list of configured printers.
15. Select an item from the list (e.g., an existing printer name or
“Not Installed”) to display the printer configuration window.
16. Assign a name (if not an existing printer) to this printer.
17. At the “Type” field, select “Remote Other/Unknown.”
18. Click ESCAPE to save the changes.
19. Click ESCAPE until you are back at the “Print Server
Configuration” menu.
20. Select “Queues Serviced by Printer” to display a list of defined
printers.
21. Select the printer you just defined and press ENTER.
22. At the list of queues that displays, press INSERT to add a
queue to the list.
180

NetWare Version 3.x RPRINTER Setup

23. Select the queue defined and press ENTER.
24. When prompted for a priority, press ENTER to select the
default or select a priority.
25. Click ESCAPE until you have exited PCONSOLE.
26. Reload the PSERVER.NLM that the Ethernet Interface is to
service as an RPRINTER.
27. Repower the Ethernet Interface by turning the printer off and
then back on.
28. Wait two minutes and then check your PSERVER to see if the
appropriate printer is being serviced. The PSERVER should
indicate that the printer is “Waiting for job.”
At this point, the Ethernet Interface knows to receive any jobs this
PSERVER.NLM has to send to it through the defined printer.

181

Chapter 6 Novell Host Configuration

NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x PSERVER Setup
Ethernet Interface destinations are case sensitive and will not be
recognized if they are typed incorrectly. By default, they are all
lower case. If you are setting up a NetWare 4 environment, the
destination must be renamed to uppercase to match the
PCONSOLE entry.
The Ethernet Interface can be used in a NetWare 4 or 5
environment with either of the following options:

•

Set the Ethernet Interface up as a PSERVER, replacing a
dedicated printer.

•

Set the Ethernet Interface up as an RPRINTER, interacting with
an existing PSERVER (see page 185).

NOTE: Following a PSERVER setup, bindery emulation is
required.
To configure the Ethernet Interface as a PSERVER in a NetWare 4
environment:
1. Log in to the Novell as supervisor.
2. Enter PCONSOLE.
3. Press F4.
4. Select PRINT QUEUES.
5. Press INSERT to add a queue.
6. Type in a new queue name and press ENTER.
7. Press ESCAPE.
8. Select PRINT SERVERS.
9. Press INSERT to add the new print server.

182

NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x PSERVER Setup

10. Type the name of the Ethernet Interface. The default is
M_xxxxxx, where xxxxxx represents the last six digits of the
network adapter's Ethernet address (e.g., M_091C1A).
11. Select this new print server and press ENTER.
12. Select PRINTERS.
13. Press INSERT to add a new printer (d1prn) to the list.
14. Select this new printer and press ENTER. Go to the Type field.
15. Press ENTER at this field and select DEFINED ELSEWHERE.
If DEFINED ELSEWHERE is not available, choose PARALLEL.
16. Press ENTER on the Print Queues Assigned field.
17. Press INSERT to display all queues; select the one you defined
in step 5 and press ENTER.
18. Select a priority and press ENTER. Priority 1 should be
sufficient.
19. Press ESCAPE, saving your changes, until you are back to
Main Menu.
20. Reboot the Print Server by repowering the printer.
21. Check the CURRENTLY ATTACHED SERVERS and verify the
print server is active.
22. Press ESCAPE until you are out of the PCONSOLE.
Even though the entire print set up is done through PCONSOLE,
you may want to communicate directly with the print server to
modify settings, monitor the unit, etc. To communicate with the print
server, the optional host software, npsh.exe, is included.
npsh.exe is a DOS executable program that can be run from a
DOS prompt on a NetWare workstation.

183

Chapter 6 Novell Host Configuration

npsh.exe performs the following:
npsh nvplist
Lists all of the Ethernet Interface devices on the network; each
name is in the following format:

•

For the Ethernet Adapter, the default is M_xxxxxx

where xxxxxx represents the last six digits of the network adapter's
Ethernet address (e.g., M_091C1A). This is regardless of whether it
is configured as a PSERVER or as an RPRINTER.
npsh
Starts a Telnet-like session with the named print server, allowing
you to configure, monitor, and troubleshoot the unit with the built-in
command set.
npsh
Initiates a single command with guest access only to the unit
instead of entering into a complete session.
To communicate with the unit using npsh.exe:
1. From a DOS prompt on a Novell workstation, begin an npsh
session with the unit:
npsh unitname
Starts a Telnet-like session with the named print server with
guest access only.
2. To obtain root access to the unit, type:
supervisor
A standard login screen displays prompting you for the login
name and password.
3. Log in to the unit as root user:
root
NOTE: Root users require the use of a password as configured in
the unit user list.

184

NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x RPRINTER Setup

4. Enter the password. If this password is not yet set, press
ENTER at the password prompt. Otherwise, enter the
password that is already stored in the unit:
password
You are now logged in to the unit as a root user and can access
any npsh command on the unit.
NOTE: Because npsh.exe makes use of broadcasts, you may
have problems communicating across a router.

NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x RPRINTER Setup
The Ethernet Interface can be configured to service both
RPRINTER, NDS mode, and PSERVER, bindery mode.
Use the following procedure to set up an RPRINTER form of
attachment on a 4.x or 5.x server:
1. The Ethernet Interface requires a bindery server login on the 4.x
or 5.x as the first step to servicing RPRINTER. This bindery
login is necessary for registering the Ethernet Interface Pserver
name; no bindery queues or printers are set up. Using
PCONSOLE, bindery mode, create a bindery printer server
object whose name matches that of the Ethernet Interface at
the root context of the 4.x or 5.x box (e.g., M_03092B). After
creating the bindery PrintServer on the 4.x or 5.x server, reboot
the Ethernet Interface and print out the E-NET Test Page to
make sure there is a successful server login.
2. Using either PCONSOLE in NDS mode or NWADMIN:
a. Create an NDS queue (any name you want), or simply use
an existing one
b. Create a print server to use (any valid name, or choose one
already in existence)
c.

Create a printer object to use with the print server object
you chose or created, and attach it to the chosen queue

185

Chapter 6 Novell Host Configuration

NOTE: The 4.x or 5.x queue name, print server name, and printer
object do not have to match any Ethernet Interface name;
multiple printers can be defined, but only one print server
can be attached to.
Example:
NDS queue name:
NDS print server name:
NDS printer name:
NDS printer name:

Finance
Fin_Q
Fin_Prt_1
Accounting_Prt_1

3. At a 4.x or 5.x console session, if a pserver.nlm session is
already running for Fin_Q, first unload it, then reload it to find
the new objects, or simply issue load pserver Fin_Q.
If you are successful, the print server console screen will show
a “printer status” option. In the “printer status” window, note the
numbers assigned to the printers you created. Assume for our
example that one printer previously existed (number 0), and we
are adding two more whose numbers became 1 and 2.
NOTE: On the load command, you must strictly follow the case of
the name (this is not required on the Ethernet Interface).
4. Via a Telnet or npsh session, create RPRINTER attachments:
store rprinter add Fin_Q 1 d1prn
This command assigns destination d1prn as the RPRINTER 1
service path.
store rprinter add Fin_Q 2 d4prn
This command assigns destination d4prn as the RPRINTER 2
service path.
For Ethernet Interface entries, case does not have to be
observed. Also, if you want to change the destination names
from dxprn, do so first with the set dest name command, being sure to use the save command so
these reappear after a reboot.
5. Reboot the Ethernet Interface adapter (power the printer off
and on, or use the reset command) so the new RPRINTER
service names are broadcast.
186

Novell
Tips
NetWare Version 4.x
andTroubleshooting
5.x RPRINTER Setup

6. Open a Telnet or npsh session and log into the Ethernet
Interface. Wait a minute or two, then use the list rprinter
command, and you should see your entries. You could also do
this by looking at the connection status on the 4.x or 5.x
PSERVER printer status entries.
7. If you add, delete, or change RPRINTER entries on the
Ethernet Interface or 4.x or 5.x console, you should always
unload and reload the pserver.nlm module to register the
changes. The Ethernet Interface can be configured and ready
before the pserver.nlm is reloaded, or the Ethernet Interface
can be reset after pserver.nlm is reloaded.
8. A Web browser can also be used to see the RPRINTER
attachments and status.

Novell Troubleshooting Tips
This section provides information on possible solutions to some
standard configuration errors. If you require technical support,
please have as much of the following information available when
you call:
1. Level of software are you running.
2. Type of attachment do you have.
3. Your host operating system.
4. A detailed description of the problem.
5. When and how often the problem occurs.
6. A detailed description of your network and the components
attached.
Please follow these tips to determine what the problem may be with
your Ethernet Interface configuration.

187

Chapter 6 Novell Troubleshooting Tips

NetWare 3.x - No PSERVER Connection
•

Was the Ethernet Interface power cycled after the PCONSOLE
steps were completed? This will make the print server boot up
and realize which print queue and file server it needs to service.

•

Is the Ethernet Interface already servicing a queue on another
file server? If so, it cannot service another file server at the
same time.

•

When defining a new print server within PCONSOLE, did
you use the correct name for the Ethernet Interface
(e.g., M_091C1A)?
For the Ethernet Adapter, it recognizes itself as the default,
M_xxxxxx, where xxxxxx represents the last six digits of the
network adapter's Ethernet address (e.g., M_091C1A) found
on the configuration printout.

188

•

When defining a new printer name within PCONSOLE, did
you use a predefined destination/queue rather than a name of
your own? By default, the Ethernet Interface only recognizes
names like d1prn. All other names will be ignored by the
device.

•

Is the Ethernet Interface in Bindery mode as seen under the
list pserver output on the device? If servicing only a
NetWare 3.x file server, it must be set to handle Bindery
services. The default setting is Bindery.

•

Is there an available NetWare user license for the Ethernet
Interface to use while it acts as a PSERVER? Every PSERVER
takes up one user license since it logs into the Novell file
server.

•

Have you given the connection process some time after
repowering the Ethernet Interface? In larger Novell
environments, the file server identification and connection
process can take several minutes.

NetWare 4.x and 5.x- No PSERVER Connection

NetWare 4.x and 5.x- No PSERVER Connection
•

Was the Ethernet Interface power cycled after the PCONSOLE
steps were completed? This will make the print server boot up
and realize which print queue and file server it needs to service.

•

Is the Ethernet Interface already servicing a queue on another
file server? If so, it cannot service another file server at the
same time.

•

When defining a new print server within PCONSOLE, did
you use the correct name for the Ethernet Interface (e.g.,
M_091C1A)?
For the Ethernet Adapter, it recognizes itself as the default,
M_xxxxxx, where xxxxxx represents the last six digits of the
network adapter's Ethernet address (e.g., M_091C1A) found
on the configuration printout.

•

Is the Ethernet Interface in Bindery mode as seen under the
list pserver output on the device? If servicing only a
NetWare 4.x or 5.x file server, it must be set to handle Bindery
services. The default setting is Bindery.

•

Is there an available NetWare user license for the Ethernet
Interface to use while it acts as a PSERVER? Every PSERVER
takes up one user license since it logs into the Novell file
server.

•

Have you given the connection process some time after
repowering the Ethernet Interface? In larger Novell
environments, the file server identification and connection
process can take several minutes.

189

Chapter 6 Novell Troubleshooting Tips

190

Novell Configuration
For 10/100Base-T
Interfaces

Overview
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

This chapter applies to the Ethernet Adapter and Wireless Adapter
and provides additional information for Novell environments using
the 10/100Base-T interface, including:

•

Ethernet Interface Configuration. This section includes
setting the preferred file server, setting password security,
adjusting polling time, changing the Ethernet Interface name,
changing the Ethernet Interface frame type, changing the
Ethernet Interface mode, setting the Ethernet Interface NDS
context, and setting the Ethernet Interface preferred NDS tree.

•

Host Configuration. This section includes NDS PSERVER
setup, Bindery PSERVER setup, referencing a Bindery queue
in NDS, and RPRINTER/NPRINTER setups.

•

Troubleshooting tips. This section covers PSERVER setups,
RPRINTER/NPRINTER setups, and printing related problems.

191

Chapter 7 Novell Ethernet Interface Configuration (10/100Base-T)

Novell Ethernet Interface Configuration (10/100Base-T)
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

There are no mandatory Novell settings needed before the print
server can be detected on the network. However, there can be
some mandatory settings needed before a Novell print queue can
be serviced by the Ethernet Interface. These mandatory settings
are covered separately for Netware 3.x, 4.x and 5.x under the Host
Configuration heading.
The print server setup in a Novell environment is much simpler than
that required in a TCP/IP one. No addresses, masks, or router
entries are necessary and, in most cases, the Ethernet Interface
can simply be connected to the network, turned on, and then
configured for printing from a Novell station through PCONSOLE or
Netware Administrator.
However, there are some optional parameters you may wish to
change, such as the preferred file server(s), print server password,
polling time, frame type, print server name, NDS context, and NDS
preferred tree. The following sections describe these optional
parameters.

Preferred File Server (NDS and Bindery Setups)
In a bindery setup, the preferred file server specifies the file server
on which the print server object was created. In an NDS setup, it
specifies a file server on which the print server object resides.
Since NDS is distributed, most administrators will not know which
file server(s) the print server object is actually stored on, so in most
NDS environments this option is not used. This feature is useful in a
large Novell network, so that the Ethernet Interface does not ignore
important file servers. If you are setting up the Ethernet Interface to
work with a Bindery file server, it is a good idea to set a preferred
server on the Ethernet Interface.

192

Preferred File Server (NDS and Bindery Setups)

Adding Preferred File Server
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can
communicate with the print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type in root
for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
3. Look under the “Novell” section and add the name of the
preferred file server in the “File Server” field.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the print server to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type in root
for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
2. You should see a prompt with the Ethernet Interface IP
address:
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell fserver add fservername
where fservername is the name of the Novell file server you
want to add as a preferred file server. This adds the specified
file server as a preferred file server on the Ethernet Interface.
4. Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect.
reset

193

Chapter 7 Novell Ethernet Interface Configuration (10/100Base-T)

Removing Preferred File Server
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can
communicate with the print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type in root
for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
3. Look under the “Novell” section and remove the name of the
preferred file server from the “File Server” field.
4. Click the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the print server to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server:
telnet ipaddress
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type in root
for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
2. You should see a prompt with the Ethernet Interface IP
address:
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell fserver del fservername
where fservername is the name of the Novell file server you
want to remove as a preferred file server.
4. Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect.
reset

194

Setting Password Security (NDS and Bindery Setups)

Setting Password Security
(NDS and Bindery Setups)
Besides the general security measures, a Novell setup provides
further password security. A password can be set on the Ethernet
Interface and within your PCONSOLE or Netware Administrator
setup so that when the Ethernet Interface tries to login to the file
server, the passwords are compared.
To set the password on the Novell host for use in a PSERVER
setup, you will need to:

Netware 4.x and 5.x
1. Log in to Netware Administrator on your Novell host as a user
with security equal to “Admin.”
2. Double click the print server object you are using for your
setup. This will bring up the print server objects details page.
3. Select the “Change Password...” button on the “Identification”
page.
4. At the prompts, type and retype the new password. Click OK
when you are finished.
5. Proceed to the next section to store the password on the
Ethernet Interface.

Netware 3.x
1. Log in to PCONSOLE on your Novell host as supervisor.
2. Select “Print Server Information” from the main menu.
3. Select the appropriate printer and press ENTER.
4. Select “Change Password.”
5. At the prompts, type and retype the new password. Press
ENTER when you are finished.
6. Proceed to the next section to store the password on the
Ethernet Interface.

195

Chapter 7 Novell Ethernet Interface Configuration (10/100Base-T)

Print Server Setup - HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can
communicate with the print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type root for
the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
3. Look under the “Novell” section and add the new password to
the “Pserver Password” field.
NOTE: The passwords entered in Netware Administrator or
PCONSOLE must match the password set on the unit.
4. Click the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the printer to make the new settings take effect.

Print Server Setup - Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server:
telnet ipaddress
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type root for
the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since
there is no password by default.
2. You should see a prompt with the Ethernet Interface IP
address:
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell passwd password
NOTE: The passwords entered in Netware Administrator or
PCONSOLE must match the password set on the unit.
4. Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect:
reset

196

Adjusting Polling Time (NDS and Bindery Setups)

Adjusting Polling Time
(NDS and Bindery Setups)
To set the poll time the Ethernet Interface will use when checking
for new jobs under a PSERVER setup:

Netware 4.x and 5.x
1. Log in to Netware Administrator as a user with security equal to
“Admin” on your Novell host.
2. Double click the printer object for which you wish to change the
poll time. This will bring up the printer object detail pages.
3. Click “Configuration” to display the configuration page.
4. Change the “Service Interval” to the desired number (in
seconds).
NOTE: You may also want to change the “Service mode for forms”
to “Change forms as needed.” If you do not do this, the
Ethernet Interface will need to poll the file server twice as
much to get all the information it needs.
5. Repower the Ethernet Interface by turning the printer off and on
to make the changes take effect.

Netware 3.x
1. Log in to PCONSOLE on your Novell host as supervisor.
2. Select “Print Server Information” from the main menu and press
ENTER.
3. Select the print server you have been using for your PSERVER
setup and press ENTER. By default, this will be “P_xxxxxx” or
“M_xxxxxx” where “xxxxxx” equals the last six digits of the print
server’s Ethernet address found on the bottom of the device
(e.g., “P_01001C” or “M_091C1A”).
4. Select “Print Server Configuration” from the menu that displays.
5. Select “Printer Configuration” from the next menu to display a
list of configured printers.
197

Chapter 7 Novell Ethernet Interface Configuration (10/100Base-T)

6. Select the printer for which you wish to alter the poll time, and
press ENTER.
7. Change the “Sampling Interval” to the desired number (in
seconds).
NOTE: You may also want to change the “Service mode for forms”
to “Change forms as needed.” If you do not do this, the
Ethernet Interface will need to poll the file server twice as
much to get all the information it needs.
8. Press ESCAPE and select “Yes” to save the changes to this
new printer.
9. Repower the Ethernet Interface by turning the printer off and on
to make the changes take effect.

Changing The Ethernet Interface Name
(NDS and Bindery Setups)
When defining a new print queue on a Novell file server, you must
define a new print server to represent the Ethernet Interface. This
name must match the predefined name given to the print server.
For the Ethernet Adapter, the default is M_xxxxxx, where xxxxxx
represents the last six digits of the network adapter's Ethernet
address (e.g., M_091C1A).
Make sure that the print server object you are using for your
PSERVER setup has the same name as that stored on the
Ethernet Interface. If you need to rename the print server object in
Netware Administrator, delete the object and re-create it with the
new name. Netware Administrator seems to have some problems
with renaming objects.
NOTE: Changing the name will affect all of the protocols that are
running on the Ethernet Interface.

198

Changing The Ethernet Interface Name (NDS and Bindery Setups)

HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can
communicate with the print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
adminConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/adminConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type in root
for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
3. Look under the “System Information” section and enter the new
name into the “Name” field.
4. Click the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the printer to make the new settings take effect.

Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server:
telnet ipaddress
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type root for
the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
2. You should see a prompt with the Ethernet Interface IP
address:
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver name name
4. Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect.
reset

199

Chapter 7 Novell Ethernet Interface Configuration (10/100Base-T)

Changing The Ethernet Interface Frame Type
(NDS and Bindery Setups)
The Ethernet Interface allows you to store a particular frame type
for the unit to adhere to in a Novell environment.

HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can
communicate with the print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type root for
the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
3. Look under the “Novell” section and go to the “Frame Type”
field to select the appropriate frametype.
4. Click the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the printer to make the new settings take effect.

Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type root for
the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
2. You should see a prompt with the Ethernet Interface IP
address:
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell frametype [ethernet2 | 802.3
|802.2 |802.2snap | autosense]

200

Changing The Ethernet Interface Mode (NDS and Bindery Setups)

4. Reset the unit to make the changes take effect:
reset

Changing The Ethernet Interface Mode
(NDS and Bindery Setups)
The Ethernet Interface allows you to store a particular mode for the
unit to operate in. This will be either NDS, Bindery, or autosense. If
you use autosense, the Ethernet Interface will first attempt to log in
to an NDS file server and, if it fails, will try to log in to a Bindery file
server.
NOTE: If you are using both NDS and Bindery file servers in your
setup, set the mode to auto.

HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can
communicate with the print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type root for
the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
3. Look under the “Novell” section and go to the “Service Type”
field to select the appropriate mode.
4. Click the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the printer to make the new settings take effect.

201

Chapter 7 Novell Ethernet Interface Configuration (10/100Base-T)

Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server:
telnet ipaddress
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type root for
the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
2. You should see a prompt with the Ethernet Interface IP
address:
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell mode [nds | bindery | auto]
4. Reset the unit to make the changes take effect:
reset

Setting The Ethernet Interface NDS Context
(NDS Setups)
The Ethernet Interface allows you to store the print server object in
any context within the NDS tree you choose. By default the
Ethernet Interface will look for the print server object in the same
context as the file server object it connects to is stored in.

HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can
communicate with the print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type root for
the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
3. Look under the “Novell” section and enter the new context in
the “NDS Context” field.
202

Setting The Ethernet Interface Preferred NDS Tree (NDS Setups)

4. Click the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the printer to make the new settings take effect.

Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server:
telnet ipaddress
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type root for
the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
2. You should see a prompt with the Ethernet Interface IP
address:
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell context context
4. Reset the unit to make the changes take effect:
reset

Setting The Ethernet Interface Preferred NDS
Tree (NDS Setups)
The Ethernet Interface supports Novell environments that have
multiple trees. If your environment has more than one tree you may
want to set a preferred tree. By default, the Ethernet Interface will
try to log in to each tree it finds until it is successful.

Chapter 7 Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T)

3. Look under the “Novell” section and enter the preferred tree in
the “NDS Preferred Tree” field.
4. Click the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the printer to make the new settings take effect.

Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server:
telnet ipaddress
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type root for
the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
2. You should see a prompt with the Ethernet Interface IP
address:
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell tree tree
4. Reset the unit to make the changes take effect.
reset

Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T)
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

This section covers PSERVER and RPRINTER/NPRINTER setups
on the Ethernet Interface. The Ethernet Interface can handle up to
eight RPRINTER/NPPRINTER setups.
Although the entire print setup is done through Netware
Administrator or PCONSOLE, you may need to communicate
directly with the print server in order to modify settings, monitor the
unit, etc.
For Netware 4.x and Netware 5.x environments, you can obtain a
NWAdmn3x snap-in program called MPAdmin. This snap-in can be
used to configure PSERVER setups as well as additional settings
on the Ethernet Interface.

204

NDS PSERVER Setup (Netware 4.x/5.x)

NOTE: NWAdmn3x is only included with Netware 4.11 and higher
releases. If you are using Netware 4.10, you can either
upgrade to Netware 4.11 or go to Novell’s Web site and get
the patches to upgrade the Nwadmin program for Netware
4.10 to Nwadmn3x for Netware 4.11. Alternatively, you can
perform the setup without using MPAdmin.

NDS PSERVER Setup (Netware 4.x/5.x)
There are a number of ways to configure the Ethernet Interface for
use in a Novell NDS PSERVER setup. These include using the
MPAdmin snap-in for Netware Administrator, using generic print
server objects in Netware Administrator, or by using PCONSOLE.
The following steps describe a setup using a generic print server
object in Netware Administrator. Setups using PCONSOLE are less
common and will not be discussed.
To create a printer/print queue in an NDS environment using
Netware Administrator print server objects:
1. Log in to Netware Administrator as a user with security equal to
“Admin” on your Novell host.
2. Click the right mouse button on a branch in the tree in which
you would like to create a print queue object.
3. Select “Create...” from the pop-up menu. The “New Object”
dialog box displays.
4. Select “Print Queue” from the “Class of new object” list, and
click “OK.”
5. Select “Directory Service Queue” and type the name of the
queue into the “Print Queue name” field.
6. Fill in the “Print Queue Volume” field by typing in a volume or
browsing for one. Click “Create.”
7. Click the right mouse button on a branch in the tree in which
you would like to create a printer object.
8. Select “Create...” from the pop-up menu. The “New Object”
dialog box displays.
205

Chapter 7 Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T)

9. Select “Printer” from the “Class of new object” list and click
“OK.”
10. Type the name of the printer in the “Printer name” field.
NOTE: The Printer object name must match one of the destination
names on the Ethernet Interface. Most likely, this will be
d1prn.
In NDS, a printer object can only be attached to one print server
object at a given time, because Novell uses the printer object to
represent a physical printer. A physical printer can only be attached
to one parallel or serial port at a time. Thus, if you assign a printer
object to another print server object, the new print server object will
“steal” it from the old one (this also happens with non-Ethernet
Interface print server objects).
To properly process print jobs sent to the Ethernet Interface, the
printer object created in Novell must refer to the destination on this
server and not to the actual physical printer. On the Ethernet
Interface, print jobs must pass through an extra layer (a
“destination”) before being sent on to the printer.
If you are using multiple print servers, you will have to either
rename all your destinations to ensure that no printer object names
conflict or keep all the printer objects for one print server in a
different context than those for the other print server.
11. Select “Define additional properties” and click “Create.”
12. Click “Assignments” in the dialog box and then click the “Add...”
button.
13. Select the queue you defined earlier or browse for a different
one.
14. Click “OK” to assign the queue to the printer.
15. Click “OK” to close the “Printers Details” dialog box and make
the changes permanent.

206

NDS PSERVER Setup (Netware 4.x/5.x)

16. Click on a branch in the tree (i.e., context) that you would like to
create the Ethernet Interface print server object in.
NOTE: If the context you choose is different than the one the file
server object for the file server you are using is in, you must
set the context on the Ethernet Interface. See “Setting The
Ethernet Interface NDS Context (NDS Setups)” on page
202.
17. Click the right mouse button to bring up a submenu and choose
“Create...” from this menu.
18. A dialog box titled “New Object” displays. In the “Class of new
object” list, select “Print Server” and click “OK.”
19. Type the name for the print server in the “Print Server name”
field. For the Ethernet Adapter, the default is M_xxxxxx, where
xxxxxx represents the last six digits of the network adapter's
Ethernet address (e.g., M_091C1A).
NOTE: The name you use here must match the name stored on
the Ethernet Interface. This name can be found by using
the list pserver command. See “List Commands” on
page 356 for more information.
20. Select the “Define additional properties” and click the “Create”
button.
21. Click “Assignments” in the dialog box and then the “Add...”
button.
22. Select the printer you created earlier.
23. Click “OK” to assign this printer to this print server.
24. Click “OK” to close the “Printer Servers Details” dialog box and
make the changes permanent.
25. Physically repower the printer to make the new settings take
effect.

207

Chapter 7 Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T)

Bindery PSERVER Setup
(Netware 3.x, Netware 4.x, and Netware 5.x)
A Bindery PSERVER setup is possible under both Netware 3.x,
Netware 4.x and Netware 5.x. If you are using Netware 4.x or
Netware 5.x, Bindery emulation is required. Please consult your
Novell manual on how to set up Bindery emulation. A Bindery set
up using PCONSOLE in Netware 3.x is described in “NetWare
Version 3.x RPRINTER Setup” on page -179. The setup using
PCONSOLE in Netware 4.x or Netware 5.x is described in
“NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x RPRINTER Setup” on page 185.

Referencing A Bindery Queue In NDS
(Netware 3.x, Netware 4.x, and Netware 5.x)
If you would like to reference a Bindery queue when you perform
your PSERVER setup in NDS, you must create a PSERVER object
for the Ethernet Interface on the file server where the Bindery
queue resides. This is important because, in order to service the
queue, the Ethernet Interface must log in to the queue’s file server.
Since the queue is not an NDS queue, the Ethernet Interface
cannot log in under NDS, so it must log in under Bindery.
This will only work if there is a valid PSERVER object on the file
server. This PSERVER object must have the same name that was
used for the NDS setup. For the Ethernet Adapter, the default is
M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx represents the last six digits of the network
adapter's Ethernet address (e.g., M_091C1A). This PSERVER
object does not need any printers or queues assigned to it. Also,
when referencing a Bindery queue in NDS, set the Novell Mode on
the Ethernet Interface to “auto” so that both NDS and Bindery
logins are possible. See “Setting The Ethernet Interface NDS
Context (NDS Setups)” on page 202.

208

RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup (Netware 3.x, Netware 4.x, and Netware 5.x)

RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup
(Netware 3.x, Netware 4.x, and Netware 5.x)
This procedure associates an existing PSERVER with a remote
Ethernet Interface acting as a RPRINTER/NPRINTER in a Netware
3.x, Netware 4.x, or Netware 5.x environment. It is the PSERVER’s
responsibility to get jobs from the queue and to pass them off to the
Ethernet Interface acting as the remote printer. Unlike a PSERVER
setup, the Ethernet Interface does not deal directly with the queues.
NOTE: As a RPRINTER/NPRINTER, the print server does not use
a login ID. A non-Ethernet Interface print server such as
PSERVER.NLM or PSERVER.EXE must be running for
RPRINTER to operate. Also, if the Ethernet Interface loses
a connection to a PSERVER, it will automatically reconnect
when that server becomes available again.
The following steps assume that you have created a PSERVER
object in Netware 3.x, Netware 4.x, or Netware 5.x and have
assigned printers and queues to it. If you have not already done
this, do it now. The setup is similar to creating a PSERVER setup
for the Ethernet Interface, except that there are no restrictions
about which names may be used for the print server and printer
objects.
NOTE: Write down the printer number(s) assigned to the printer(s)
you are going to be using for this setup. You will need them
in a later step.

HTML Method
1. Load a PSERVER on your Netware 3.x, Netware 4.x, or
Netware 5.x file server (i.e., issue a load pserver
pservername command on the file server).
NOTE: If it is an NDS PSERVER on a Netware 4.x/5.x file server,
you must specify the PSERVER name and context for
pservername. For example:
load pserver .sales_ps.sales.microplex
2. Load a Web browser on a network station that can
communicate with the print server over TCP/IP.
209

Chapter 7 Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T)

3. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type in root
for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
4. Look under the “Novell” section and find a row in the
RPRINTER category.
5. Click “Enabled” and enter the name used with the
PSERVER.NLM into the “Print Server Name” field.
NOTE: If it is an NDS pserver, enter only the PSERVER name and
not the context (e.g., sales_ps).
6. Enter the printer number of the printer you would like serviced
into the “Printer Number” field, and then select the destination
on the Ethernet Interface you would like to use for output.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each additional printer you would
like to have serviced.
8. Click the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the printer to make the new settings take effect.

Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Load a PSERVER on your Netware 3.x, Netware 4.x, or
Netware 5.x file server (i.e., issue a load pserver
pservername command on the file server).
NOTE: If it is an NDS PSERVER on a Netware 4.x/5.x file server,
you must specify the pserver name and context for
pservername. For example:
load pserver .sales_ps.sales.IBM
2. Telnet to the print server:
telnet ipaddress
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type root for
the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt (since
there is no password by default).
210

RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup (Netware 3.x, Netware 4.x, and Netware 5.x)

3. You should see a prompt with the Ethernet Interface’s IP
address:
ipaddress:root>
4. At the prompt, store the RPRINTER settings on the Ethernet
Interface. The pservername refers to the existing
PSERVER.NLM on the file server created in step 1.
Syntax:
store rprinter add

An example of an RPRINTER servicing printer 0 of the
PSERVER.NLM called pserver1 and sending jobs to the
Ethernet Interface destination d1prn is:
store rprinter add pserver1 0 d1prn
NOTE: If it is an NDS pserver, enter only the PSERVER name and
not the context (e.g., sales_ps).
5. Physically repower the printer to make the new settings take
effect.
Wait two minutes and then check your PSERVER to see if the
appropriate printer is being serviced. The printer should display a
message such as “Waiting for job.” At this point, the Ethernet
Interface knows to receive any jobs this PSERVER.NLM has to
send to it through the defined printer.

211

Chapter 7 Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T)

NDPS Configuration (Netware 4.11 and Above)
Overview
In 1998, Novell released a new printing system designed to make
network administration of printers easier and more fully functional.
This system is called Novell Distributed Print Services (NDPS), and
can be used with Novell Netware 4.11 and above along with the
supporting software on clients. This section gives high-level
instructions to install and use NDPS with the printer. These
instructions assume that you understand NDPS architecture well
enough to be able to use these instructions along with Novell's
instructions to install the Ethernet Interface into NDPS. See
Novell’s documentation to understand terms not defined here.
The drivers used with the IBM printer, can be found on
www.printers.ibm.com. For a driver to be automatically downloaded
to a Windows machine when an NDPS printer is installed, the driver
must be installed into the NDPS Broker Resource Management
Service. See Novell’s documentation for more information.
The Ethernet Interface can be installed into NDPS using the Novell
Printer Gateway feature of NDPS. Within this Novell Printer
Gateway, various printer connection modes can be used to install
the printer into NDPS. The ones described here are:

•
•
•

212

Setup using Forward Jobs to a Queue Mode
Setup using LPR Mode
Setup using RPRINTER Mode

NDPS Configuration (Netware 4.11 and Above)

Setup using Forward Jobs to a Queue Mode
In this mode, an NDPS printer agent receives jobs from an NDPS
client, then forwards these jobs to an existing Netware queue. The
Netware queue would then be serviced by the printer in some
manner.
1. The IBM printer must first be set up to service some Netware
queue, either by doing a PSERVER or RPRINTER mode setup
from previous chapters.
2. When setting up the NDPS printer agent, use the “Novell
Printer Gateway”.
3. For the “Novell PDS”, choose “((NONE))”.
4. For the “Port Handler”, choose “Forward Jobs to a Queue”,
then choose the queue used in step 1 above, and note the
Caution statement about the Queue User Name.
5. For the “Select Printer Drivers” dialog, choose no driver unless
you have a driver installed into the Broker's RMS which is to be
used with the printer.
Any jobs sent to this printer agent will then be forwarded to the
specified queue.

Setup using LPR Mode
In this mode, an NDPS printer agent receives jobs from an NDPS
client, then forwards these jobs to a printer using the LPR protocol.
1. The printer must first be set up with IP connectivity and be able
to receive jobs using the LPR protocol.
2. When setting up the NDPS printer agent, use the “Novell
Printer Gateway”.
3. For the “Novell PDS”, choose “((NONE))”.
4. For the “Port Handler”, choose “Remote (LPR on IP)”, then
enter the hostname/ipaddress and printer name
(d1prn – d8prn by default) in the next dialog.
NOTE: When the IPDS feature is installed, queue name d4prn is
not available.
213

Chapter 7 Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T)

5. For the “Select Printer Drivers” dialog, choose no driver unless
you have a driver installed into the Broker's RMS which is to be
used with the printer.

Setup Using RPRINTER Mode
In this mode, an NDPS printer agent receives jobs from an NDPS
client, then forwards these jobs to a printer using the RPRINTER
IPX protocol.
1. The printer must first be set up to function in RPRINTER mode,
choosing any desired Print Server Name and Printer Number.
2. When setting up the NDPS printer agent, use the “Novell
Printer Gateway”.
3. For the “Novell PDS”, choose “((NONE))”.
4. For the “Port Handler”, choose “Remote (rprinter on IPX)”.
5. In the next dialog, for the “SAP Name” enter the Print Server
Name from step 1, and enter the Printer Number from step 1
above.
6. For the “Select Printer Drivers” dialog, choose no driver unless
you have a driver installed into the Broker's RMS which is to be
used with the printer.
The printer will need to be rebooted to attach to the NDPS printer
agent in this mode.

214

PSERVER Setup

Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)
PSERVER Setup
If you cannot get a connection with the Ethernet Interface after
completing the print setup, confirm the following:

•

Have you tried repowering the Ethernet Interface? Wait about a
minute before checking if it has logged in and attached to a
queue.

•
•

Is the network connector fastened tightly to the unit?

•

Is there an available Netware user license for the Ethernet
Interface to utilize while it acts as a PSERVER? Every
PSERVER takes up one user license since it logs in to the
Novell file server.

•

When going through the PSERVER setup steps, did you name
the Ethernet Interface M_xxxxxx, where xxxxxx represents the
last six digits of the network adapter's Ethernet address? This
is the default format of the unit’s name when it is acting as a
PSERVER.

Is the Ethernet Interface already servicing a queue on another
file server? If so, it cannot service another file server at the
same time.

NOTE: This “M_xxxxxx” and name must have six digits after the
“_” so, if necessary, pad out each byte with a zero (0).

•

Has the Ethernet Interface’s name been changed from its
default of “M_xxxxxx” and if so, have you incorporated this new
name into your PSERVER setup?

•

Is there a password set for the print server to utilize when it is
logging in to the file server? Make sure the Ethernet Interface’s
PSERVER password matches that of the PSERVER setup, or
set both places to no password.

215

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)

•

When setting the Ethernet Interface up as a PSERVER, did you
specify a destination on the Ethernet Interface (e.g., d1prn) for
the printer name, and did you remember this name is case
sensitive?

NOTE: Ethernet Interface destinations are case sensitive, so they
will not be recognized if they are typed incorrectly. By
default, they are all in lowercase. If you are setting up in a
Netware 4.x or Netware 5.x environment, the destination
must be renamed to uppercase to match the PCONSOLE
or Netware Administrator entry. Please see “set dest
name ” on page 344 for information
on changing names.

•

Does the destination you used in your PSERVER setup have
the Novell service enabled? Please see “Commands” on page
327 for information on enabling/disabling services.

NOTE: The debug information that follows can be found by trying
to telnet the Ethernet Interface and issuing the
commands given or launching a browser to the Novell
status page on the Ethernet Interface (e.g., http://
192.168.11.9/networkNovellStatus.html).

216

•

Find the “IPX Layer” secion on the Novell HTML status page.
Check that a board has been bound to the Ethernet Interface
and that the network number is correct for your network. If not,
you may want to set a specific frame type for the Ethernet
Interface to use.

•

Find the “File Servers” section on the Novell HTML status
page. If no file servers show up, then there is probably a
problem with the network connection, or the Ethernet Interface
is not on a Novell network. Find the “SAP” section on the Novell
HTML status page to see if the Ethernet Interface is seeing any
network activity.

PSERVER Setup

•

Find the “PSERVER” section on the Novell HTML status page.
Look for a valid queue under the “EPS QUEUES” section. If the
printer field contains a number, and there is a valid file server
but no queue, then you probably made an error in the setup. At
this point try again. If it is an NDS PSERVER setup, look for a
line with the following type of message: “Could not login to NDS
Tree as ”. This indicates
one of the following: the tree is wrong; the context stored on the
Ethernet Interface for the print server object is wrong; the print
server object password is wrong; or the print server object
name is wrong.

•

Find the “RPRINTER” section on the Novell HTML status page.
Look for the following type of line: “(0:ENPReadConfig):[0:213]
Destination = ”, where is between 0 and 3. If they all
read: “Destination = 65536,” then the PSERVER setup did not
complete properly. If there is a valid “Destination =” line, then
double check that there is an entry for this number under the
“ENP INFO” section.

•

Find the “General Messages” section on the Novell HTML
status page. Look for a valid entry for the printer. It will look
similar to: “(0:InitSinglePrinter): printer= name=”.
Then look for the following lines: “(0:Printf):
RemoteMonitor(); printer is” and “(0:Printf):
WAITING_FOR_JOB”. If you see these lines, the Ethernet
Interface is set up properly, and the problem points to a setup
issue on the workstation.

•

If the Ethernet Interface has logged in to the file server but has
not attached to the queue, there may be a permission problem.
Make sure the appropriate users have rights to this queue (they
should be in the group “everyone”). Also, you may have to
assign the queue to root so it is available to everyone.

•

Did you rename any objects in Netware Administrator during
your setup? Netware Administrator seems to have a problems
renaming objects. If so, delete everything and start over.

217

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)

If none of these solutions help your situation, try the whole setup
again. Completely delete the setup that is giving you trouble and go
through the setup again, following each step carefully.
NOTE: After completing a PSERVER setup and before beginning
a new setup, be sure to reboot the printer. Wait at least a
minute for the Print Server to login and attach to a queue.

RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup
If you cannot get a connection with the Ethernet Interface after
completing the print setup, confirm the following:

218

•

Have you tried repowering the printer? Wait about a minute
before checking to see if it has logged in and attached to a
queue.

•
•

Is the network connector fastened tightly to the unit?

•

Is an entry produced when a list rprinter telnet command
is done on the Ethernet Interface (not found on the Novell
HTML status page)? When the Ethernet Interface is configured
as an RPRINTER, this command should produce the
appropriate entry.

•

Is the Ethernet Interface already servicing a queue on another
file server? If so, it cannot service another file server at the
same time.

RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup

•

Does the destination you used in your RPRINTER setup have
the Novell service enabled? Please see “Commands” on page
327 for information on enabling/disabling services.

•

Find the “IPX Layer” section on the Novell HTML status page.
Check that a board has been bound to the Ethernet Interface
and that the network number is correct for your network. If not,
set a specific frame type for the Ethernet Interface to use. You
can find out what frame type is bound to which board number
from the “ODI Layer” section on the Novell HTML status page.

•

Find the “SAP” section on the Novell HTML status page to see
if the Ethernet Interface is seeing any network activity.

•

Find the “RPRINTER” section on the Novell HTML status page.
Look for an entry for one of the numbers 4 to 7 under “ENP
INFO.” The “dest” field should match the destination used on
the Ethernet Interface. If no entry is found, check that the
destination has the Novell service enabled. If the “ERRORCODE” field has an error of 308, make sure no other
RPRINTER setup is servicing this printer object at the same
time. Only one RPRINTER connection is allowed to service a
PSERVER.NLM printer.

•

If none of these help your situation, try the whole setup again.
Completely delete the setup that is giving you trouble and go
through the setup again following each step carefully.
NOTE: After completing a PSERVER set up and before beginning
a new set up, be sure to reboot the printer. Wait at least a
minute for the Print Server to login and attach to a queue.

219

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)

Printing Related
The Job Goes To The Queue But Nothing Prints
If nothing is printing, first make sure you have a connection to the
Ethernet Interface. Please see “RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup” on
page 218 if you are having connection-related problems.
Otherwise, consider these points when trying to solve printing
problems in a Novell environment:

220

•

Does the job leave the queue or is it stuck there indefinitely? If
it leaves properly, the problem points to the actual printing
mechanism on your Novell system (e.g., CAPTURE, NPRINT,
etc.), to the print job format, or to the printer itself. Otherwise,
review the configuration steps you have already followed.

•

Have you confirmed that you can print from the Ethernet
Interface to the printer and ignore the Novell setup altogether?
Please see “start fox|tts|loopb prn” on page -363 for a
good test.

•

Is anything happening on the printer when the print job is sent?
Sometimes, the print job may have arrived at the printer but
might be waiting for a manual form feed. If so see “Commands”
on page 327 for information on trailer strings.

•

Is the printing mechanism you are using (e.g., CAPTURE,
NPRINT, etc.) configured to service the appropriate queue?

•

Is the Ethernet Interface configured as the queue’s “Currently
Attached Server”? If not, make sure you have associated the
queue and the printer. See “Novell Host Configuration” on page
176.

•

Is there a hold on the print job? If you select the job from
PCONSOLE’s CURRENT PRINT JOB ENTRIES, change the
User Hold or Operator Hold to “no.”

•

If you look in PCONSOLE’s CURRENT QUEUE STATUS
within the PRINT QUEUE INFORMATION menu, is the server
configured to service entries in this queue? It is possible to turn
servicing off here.

Printing Related

If you have followed the suggestions above and are still having
printing problems, try rebooting the Ethernet Interface. Then either
review every step you took when configuring the Ethernet Interface
or try redoing the setup, paying special attention to each step
explained in “Novell Host Configuration” on page 176.

The Job Prints Incorrectly
This category can be broken down into several sub-categories such
as lost characters, garbled data, extra banner pages, or blank
pages at the end of a job. However, the reason for these mishaps
can generally be traced back to the printing mechanism used on
your Novell system. Consider these points when configuring your
print method (e.g., CAPTURE, NPRINT, etc.):

•
•
•

Did you include the “No Tabs” option?

•

Are you running the latest version of PSERVER (later than
1.22)? If not, upgrade the PSERVER software.

•

In a PSERVER setup, did you ensure that the printer name
(e.g., d1prn) was set up as “Defined Elsewhere”?

•

Is the timeout option in the CAPTURE command set high
enough so the printer does not time out before the print
processing has had a chance to complete? This can be a
problem with graphic jobs.

•

When garbled data persists, consider the following:

Did you specify “No Banner” with PostScript printers?
Did you turn off banner pages and form feeds if this is already
taken care of within an application or on the Ethernet Interface?
Doubling up these types of print features is easy to do since
these options are provided both on the Ethernet Interface (in a
model) and within the print command.

•

tab expansion (xtab) set on (in a model) with graphic jobs

•

the correct driver for the printer if printing from within
Windows

For additional information on these suggestions, please refer to
your Netware user manuals.
221

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)

222

iSeries Configuration,
ASCII Printer

Overview
This chapter details a complete iSeries configuration setup
including:

•
•
•
•

Developing Line Descriptions with CRTLINETH
Configuring the iSeries for TCP/IP
Configuring the iSeries for Printing
Verifying Printing from the iSeries

This document assumes no iSeries printer configuration has been
done. If any configuration has been done, please follow the
procedure to the point at which continued configuration is required.

Developing Line Descriptions With CRTLINETH
For each LAN adapter on the iSeries, a line description needs to be
created for the Ethernet Interface.
If a line description already exists, make sure the SSAP list
includes default options “AA” and “12.” You must also know the
LAN speed for the iSeries LAN adapter.
NOTE: To change a line description, you need to vary the line off
before making the change. After making the change, you
need to vary the line back on.
To change an existing line description, use the CHGLINETH
command. To create a line description, use CRTLINETH.
223

Chapter 8 Overview

NOTE: SSAPs of “AA” and “12” are automatically set as default
values in the line description when “*CALC” is used in
creating new line descriptions. You do not need to set
these values unless they have been changed.
To create a line description, enter the following command:
CRTLINETH LIND(ETHLAN) RSRCNAME(LIN041)
Your completed screen should look like Figure 26.

Figure 26. Example Ethernet Interface Line Description

224

Configuring With ADDTCPIFC

The following three parameters must be specified:
Line Description (LIND)
The line description name is the user's name for the iSeries
adapter. This name must be identical to the name entered when the
TCP/IP is configured on the iSeries.
Resource Name (RSRCNAME)
The system-assigned name for the interface (for example, LIN041).
SSAP
When *CALC is used, the values of “12” and “AA” are entered
automatically as defaults. Verify that those SSAP values have not
been changed.

Configuring iSeries For ASCII Using TCP/IP
The next step is to configure the interface on the iSeries for
TCP/IP.
NOTE: The iSeries interface is not the Ethernet Interface. Do not
set the iSeries interface address to the same address as
the Ethernet Interface IP address. Also, do not add the
Ethernet Interface to the iSeries TCP/IP interface list.

Configuring With ADDTCPIFC
ADDTCPIFC is used to add a TCP/IP interface to the iSeries. This
step configures the iSeries for attachments to a TCP/IP network.
At the iSeries command line, enter the following command:
ADDTCPIFC INTNETADR ('9.99.15.188') LIND(ETHLAN)
SUBNETMASK('255.255.255.0')
Your completed screen should look like Figure 27.

225

Chapter 8 Configuring iSeries For ASCII Using TCP/IP

System: Add TCP/IP Interface
(ADDTCPIFC)
Internet address:
Line description:

Name, *LOOPBACK...

Subnet mask:
Associated local interference

*NONE

Type of service:

*Normal

*MINDELAY,
*MAXTHRPUT...

Maximum transmission unit:

*Lind

576-16388, *LIND

Autostart:

*Yes

*Yes, *No

X.25 idle circuit timeout

1-600

X.25 maximum virtual circuits

0-64

X.25 DDN interface

*NO

*YES, *NO

TRLAN bit sequencing

*MSB

*MSB, *LSB

PVC logical channel identifer + for
more values

Figure 27. Example of ADDTCPIFC Interface
The following parameters must be specified:
Internet Address
Internet address of the iSeries LAN adapter.
NOTE: Do not use the IP address of the Ethernet Interface.
Subnet Mask
The Subnet Mask for this iSeries TCP/IP interface (for example,
255.255.255.0).

226

Configuring A Router Definition With ADDTCPRTE

Line Description
The name assigned to the iSeries line description as described in
“Developing Line Descriptions With CRTLINETH” on page 223.
NOTE: Each iSeries LAN adapter will have its own line description.

Configuring A Router Definition With
ADDTCPRTE
If necessary, use the ADDTCPRTE command to create a route
definition. This is required if the printer is somewhere other than on
a local segment and must cross bridges.

Configuring A Local Domain And Hostname
The iSeries print commands, described in “Setting Up Printing For
ASCII Files” on page 228, require a local name and hostname. If
you have already configured LAN attached TCP/IP printers on the
iSeries system, you will have a local domain name and hostname
configured on the system.
NOTE: If you already have a local domain name and hostname
configured on the system, do not change your setup.
If the local domain name and hostname file is empty, the file must
be set up. This control file information is used to determine if a print
request comes from an authorized host.
To configure the local domain and hostname, you will run the
CFGTCP command and select Option “12” from the menu. Enter a
local domain name, such as city.company.com. Enter a local
hostname, such as as400-01. This is the name of your iSeries
system and must match the hostname for your system in the host
entry table. Refer to “Configuring A TCP/IP Host Table Entry” for
more information.
NOTE: If the printer and iSeries are not on the same local LAN
segment, use CFGTCP Option 2 to verify that there is a
route defined in the TCP/IP route list.

227

Chapter 8 Configuring The iSeries For Printing

Configuring A TCP/IP Host Table Entry
Although creating a TCP/IP host table entry is optional, it is a good
idea to take this step. Add the iSeries name and the IP address of
the LAN adapter to the “Host Table Entries.”

Configuring The iSeries For Printing
To configure an iSeries for printing, you must:

•
•

set up the printing capability, and
verify the setup with a print job.

You will need the following information:

Remote Printer Queue name
Set to ‘d1prn’ through ‘d8prn’.
NOTE: The Remote Printer Queue name must be in lowercase
letters. Do not use “PASS.”
NOTE: When the IPDS feature is installed, the queue name
‘d4prn’ is not available.

IP Address
The IP address for the Ethernet Interface.

Setting Up Printing For ASCII Files
The next step is to set up the remote printing capability. There are
two ways to do this: you can either specify the LPR parameters
manually each time you send a file to the printer, or use Remote
Writer and a remote output queue for automatic printing to the
printer.

228

Setting Up Printing For ASCII Files

To Use LPR Manually
1. Start TCP/IP, if it is not already running, by entering the
command STRTCP.
2. At the iSeries command line, enter LPR.
3. Figure 28 displays in bold the parameters you need to specify.

Send TCP/IP Spooled File (LPR)

Type choices, press Enter.
Remote system
Printer queue
Spooled file
Job name

Name
*

Name, *

User

Name

Number

000000-999999

Spooled file number

*ONLY

000000-999999,
*ONLY, *LAST

Destination type

*OTHER

*AS400, *PFS2,
*OTHER

Transform SCS to ASCII

*YES

*YES, *NO

User data transform

*NONE

Name, *NONE

Library
Manufacturer type and model

Name, *LIBL,
*CURLIB
*IBM42011

Internet address
Workstation customizing object

*NONE

Name, *NONE

229

Chapter 8 Configuring The iSeries For Printing

Library

Name, *LIBL,
*CURLIB

Delete file after sending

*NO

*NO, *YES

*YES

*NO, *YES

Destination-dependent options
Print separator page

Figure 28. ASCII LPR Parameters
The following parameter values are required:
Remote System
Enter the hostname of your printer or *INTNETADR, which then
prompts you to specify the IP address of your printer.
Printer Queue (PRTQ)
Set to ‘d1prn’ through ‘d8prn’. The remote printer queue name
must be in lowercase letters, entered in single quotes.
NOTE: When the IPDS feature is installed, queue name ‘d4prn’
is not available.
Destination Type (DESTTYP)
Specify *OTHER for the DESTTYP parameter.
Transform (TRANSFORM)
Specify *YES.
Manufacturer Type and Model (MFRTYPMDL)
Select a manufacturer type and model. This is the name of the
WSCO. Select *IBM6500-v for Proprinter Emulation or
IBM6500-vEP for Epson Emulation.

230

Setting Up Printing For ASCII Files

Internet Address (INTNETADR)
The IP address of the Ethernet Interface.
NOTE: You may specify either *INTNETADR (and the Ethernet
Interface IP address) or the hostname for the Ethernet
Interface (if you added the printer to the host table entry as
directed in “Configuring A TCP/IP Host Table Entry” on
page 228).

To Create An Automatic Remote Output Queue
1. From the iSeries command line, enter CRTOUTQ.
2. Figure 29 displays in bold the parameters you need to specify.
Create Output Queue (CRTOUTQ)

Type choices, press Enter.
Output queue
Library

6500

> Name

*CURLIB

Name, *CURLIB

*NONE

Number, *NONE

Maximum spooled file size:
Number of pages
Staring time

Time

Ending time

Time
+ for more values

Order of files on queue

*FIFO

*FIFO, *JOBNBR

Remote system

*NONE

Remote printer queue

*USER

Writer to autostart

*NONE

1-10, *NONE

Queue for writer messages

QSYSOPR

Name

231

Chapter 8 Configuring The iSeries For Printing

Library

*LIBL

*Name, *LIBL,
*CURLIB

Connection type

*SNA

*SNA, *IP, *USRDFN

Destination type

*OS400

*OS400, *OS400V2,
*PSF2...

Host print transform

*YES

*YES, *NO

User data transform

*NONE

Name, *NONE

Library

*Name, *LIBL,
*CURLIB

Manufacturer type and model

*IBM42011

See NOTE on
page 235.

Workstation Customizing Object

*NONE

Name, *NONE

Library
Image configuration

Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
*NONE

*NONE, *IMGA01,
*IMGA02,...

VM/MVS class

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H,
I...

Forms Control Buffer

*NONE

Character value,
*NONE...

Destination options

*NONE

Print separator page

*YES

User defined option

USRDFNOPT

Internet address

*YES, *NO
*NONE

+ for more values
User defined object:
Object
Library

232

*NONE

Name, *NONE
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Setting Up Printing For ASCII Files

Object type

*DTAARA, *DTAQ,
*FILE...

User driver program

*NONE

Name, *NONE

*NONE

*DTAARA, *DTAQ,
*FILE...

Spooled file ASP

*SYSTEM

*SYSTEM, *OUTQASP

Text ‘description’

*BLANK

Libary

Additional Parameters
Display any file

*NO

*NO, *YES, *OWNER

Job separators

0-9, *MSG

Operator controlled

*YES

*YES, *NO

Data queue

*NONE

Name, *NONE

Libary

Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Authority to check

*OWNER

*OWNER, *DTAAUT

Authority

*USE

Name, *USE, *ALL,
*CHANGE...

Figure 29. Automatic Remote Output Queue Configuration
3. Enter values for the following parameters:
Output Queue (OUTQ)
The name of the iSeries output queue. The name can be
anything you would like. This name is not the same as the
printer internal queue name, ‘d1prn’.
Remote System (RMTSYS)
Internet address of the Ethernet Interface on the printer
(*INTNETADR prompts you for this) or the hostname of the
Ethernet Interface.

233

Chapter 8 Configuring The iSeries For Printing

Remote Printer Queue (RMTPRTQ)
Default name of the network printer. Set for any of ‘d1prn’
through ‘d8prn’. The remote printer queue name must be
lowercase, entered in single quotes.
NOTE:When the IPDS feature is installed, queue name
‘d4prn’ is not available.
Writer to Autostart (AUTOSRTWTR)
Set the value to 1. This will start the Remote Writer when the
queue is created, and it automatically starts the Remote Writer
after each IPL of the iSeries and whenever STRTCP is started.
Connection Type (CNNTYPE)
Specify this value as *IP.
Destination Type (DESTTYP)
Specify *OTHER. *OTHER is a performance enhancement, in
which data is not required to be transformed again if the
connection is interrupted and allows printing of multiple copies.
Transform (TRANSFORM)
Specify this value as *YES.
Destination Options (DESTOPT)
Specify XAUTOQ, XAIX. XAUTOQ is a performance
enhancement, in which data is not required to be transformed
again if the connection is interrupted. XAIX allows printing of
multiple copies.

234

Setting Up Printing For ASCII Files

Manufacturer Type (MFRTYPMDL)
NOTE: Select a manufacturer type and model. This is the name of
the WSCO. Select *IBM6500-v for Proprinter Emulation
or 6500-vEP for Proprinter for Epson Emulation. Select the
Manufacturer Type Model based on the data type.
a. Report printing, text only, no IGP or barcodes.
Manufacturer Type Model
= *IBM6500
Workstation customizing object = *NONE
Since IBM42023 is a Printronix XL emulation, the printer
emulation must also be switched to Proprinter emulation.
Be sure to save the printer emulation as the power-up
configuration.
Alternate selection:
Manufacturer Type Model
= *IBM6500EP
Workstation Customizing Object = *NONE
Since IBM6500EP is an Epson emulation, the printer
emulation must be also switched to Epson emulation. Be
sure to save the printer emulation as the power-up
configuration.
b. PGL or VGL program.
Manufacturer Type Model
= *WSCSTCONT132
Workstation Customizing Object = QWPDEFAULT
Library
= QSYS
This selects a generic object that passes the data
unchanged without any escape codes to the printer. Text
files will print in the currently selected printer configuration,
cpi, lpi, and form length. OS/400 versions below V3R7 may
not have this selection and may require manual creation of
a generic WSCST. Please contact your IBM representative
for assistance.
NOTE: For occasional text reports, create a printer configuration
for each report and use the [Job Select] key to select a
report configuration.
235

Chapter 8 Verify Printing On iSeries

Internet address (INTNETADR)
Specify the IP address of the printer.

Troubleshooting
This installation procedure assumes that the Ethernet adapter is
configured with the correct IP address, subnet mask, and gateway
(if required). In addition you can also ping and telnet to the Ethernet
adapter.
Print an E-net Test Page to verify the Ethernet settings.
(6500-v) DIAGNOSTICS Printer Tests E-net Test
PageEnter.
The default Ethernet queue name is d1prn, however, the name can
be changed. Substitute the changed name for the RMTPRTQ
parameter. To verify the queue name, print an E-net Test Page or
telnet to the adapter and perform a “list dest” command.

Verify Printing On iSeries
This section verifies that the printer is capable of printing ASCII files
and that the printer can be pinged on the network.
To test ASCII printing:
1. Start TCP/IP, if it is not already running, by entering the
command STRTCP.
2. Verify that the iSeries TCP/IP interface is active.
3. Ping the printer from an iSeries workstation with the
command:
ping ip_address.
Where ip_address is the Internet address of the remote
system printer (the Ethernet Interface) or the hostname of the
printer (if you put the hostname in the host entry table as
directed in “Configuring A TCP/IP Host Table Entry” on page
228).

236

iSeries
ASCII Troubleshooting
Setting
Up Printing
For ASCII Files

4. If the printer cannot be pinged, proceed to “iSeries ASCII
Troubleshooting” on page 237.
5. Use one of the following methods to send a spooled file to the
printer:

•

Enter the LPR command on the iSeries command line with
the appropriate parameters. See “To Use LPR Manually”
on page 229.

•

Enter STRRMTWTR name on the iSeries command line,
where name is the name of the iSeries remote output
queue (not the printer Internet queue, as described on
“To Create An Automatic Remote Output Queue” on page
231).

•

Use the WRKOUTQ command to send jobs.

iSeries ASCII Troubleshooting
During power up, the printer performs an interface hardware test.
The presence of the ETHERNET PARAMS menu selection at the
printer control panel indicates that the Ethernet Interface hardware
is functioning properly. See the User's Manual for configuration
menu information.
If you have trouble pinging the printer:
1. Verify the configuration of the iSeries, including the printer and
any intervening devices such as routers and bridges.
2. Verify that the iSeries line description is varied on and the
printer is turned on and displays an ONLINE status.
3. Verify that the iSeries TCP/IP is active.

237

Chapter 8 iSeries ASCII Troubleshooting

TCP/IP Access Problem
If you can ping the printer from a workstation, but you cannot Web
browse, Telnet, or print to the printer through the Ethernet Interface,
there may be an incorrect entry in the TCP access list. So that the
workstation can use the Ethernet Interface in this case, one of two
things must happen:

•

the TCP list must have an entry added to grant access to this
workstation, or

•

all entries must be deleted from the TCP list to grant all
workstations/hosts access to the above TCP services.

To view the current access list, use the printer control panel to
access the menu. See the User's Manual for configuration menu
information. From the Operator Print Test menu, choose the
Ethernet Test Page. When the page prints, look under the “TCP
ACCESS TABLE” section for the TCP access list entries.
To add/delete a TCP access list entry, refer to “TCP Access Lists”
on page 369.
NOTE: When the following procedure is used, the TCP access list
will be cleared, but all IP addresses will need to be entered
again after the procedure is complete.
To reset all Ethernet Adapter or Wireless TCP/IP values to the
factory defaults when access is impossible:
1. Obtain a printer configuration printout using the control panel.
See the User's Manual for configuration menu information.
2. Power off the printer.
3. On the Ethernet Adapter or Wireless Interface, place
SWITCH 1 in the down position.
4. Power on the printer and wait for the ONLINE state.
5. On the Ethernet Adapter or Wireless Interface, place
SWITCH 1 in the up position.

238

TCP/IP Access Problem

6. From a workstation attached to this network segment, create
an ARP entry. The Ethernet Interface IP address and hardware
or MAC address are needed. At the workstation, enter:
arp -s
ping
7. Try to ping this IP address to see if the Ethernet Interface can
be seen on your network. If the interface does not respond,
verify you are on the same network segment as the printer and
that the ARP entry was created.
8. Telnet into the Ethernet Interface using the same IP address
as above. Log in as root with no password.
9. At system prompt, enter:
store tcpip from default
config http on
reset
NOTE: This will reset all TCP/IP settings to factory default and
reset the Ethernet Interface.
10. Wait five minutes for the Ethernet Interface to reset.
11. Power the printer off and then back on.
12. Wait for the “ETHERNET IS READY” message to display.
13. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
parameters to the desired values. (See “Configuration Tools”
on page 52.)

239

Chapter 8 iSeries ASCII Troubleshooting

Web Browser/HTTP Problem
In some cases you may not be able to browse the printer Web page
simply because the Ethernet Interface HTTP may be turned off.
If you cannot ping the Ethernet Interface IP address, make sure
the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway are set correctly
by checking the ETHERNET PARAMS menu from the control
panel. See the User's Manual for configuration menu information.
If you can ping the Ethernet Interface IP address but cannot
access the Web pages, perform the following procedure to verify
the Ethernet Interface HTTP is turned on:
1. Telnet into the Ethernet Interface and log in as root with no
password.
2. At the system prompt, enter the following commands:
config http on
save
reset
3. After approximately 5 minutes, point your browser to the
Ethernet Interface IP address. The printer Web pages should
now be accessible.

240

iSeries Configuration,
IPDS Printer

Configuring On iSeries As An IPDS Printer
Use this chapter to configure your printer on iSeries as an IPDS
printer. To print IPDS, you must install the IPDS option on your
printer. Once configured as an IPDS printer, the printer can also
print AFP™ and SCS, but these datastreams must be converted to
IPDS first.
NOTE: Do not cancel IPDS print jobs by using WebPage cancel.

Printing AFP, IPDS, And SCS Files
Printers configured as IPDS only print IPDS files. AFP and SCS
files can be printed, but they must be transformed to IPDS before
printing.

•

APF files are transformed directly by Print Services Facility™
(PSF), which then sends the transformed file to the printer.

•

SCS files are transformed into IPDS by setting the
IPDSPASTHR parameter to YES (see Figure 32 on page 250
or Figure 31 on page 247). This path yields the best
performance by sending IPDS files directly to the printer with
no transform.

241

Chapter 9 Configuring On iSeries As An IPDS Printer

Requirements
Contact technical support to obtain the latest PTFs for PSF.
For IPDS printing, you also need to install the IPDS option on the
printer.

Configuration Checklist
NOTE: All of the following configuration steps carried out on the
iSeries may require “create” or “change” authority.
1. If you have not already done so, set up the printer and install
the Ethernet Interface. See “Configuration Using The Control
Panel” on page 53.
2. Using the printer control panel, set up the printer for IPDS by
setting the parameters and values shown in Table 10.
Table 10. Control Panel Settings
Menu

Item

Setting

C/T PORT

Port Type

Twinax

TWINAX
SETUP
4234-12

IPDS Emulation

I4234-12

3. Set TCP/IP addresses for the printer, such as an IP Address,
Gateway Address, or Subnet Mask. See “Configuration Tools”
on page 52.
4. If the printer and iSeries are not on the same LAN segment,
verify there is a route defined in the TCP/IP route list. If
necessary, use the ADDTCPRTE command to create a route
definition. You need this if your printer is somewhere other than
on a local segment.
5. You need the IP address of the Ethernet Interface to configure
the Ethernet Interface.

242

Configuring An iSeries TCP/IP Interface With ADDTCPIFC

6. If you have not done so yet, create a line description for your
Ethernet Interface. See “Developing Line Descriptions With
CRTLINETH” on page 223.
7. Create or verify the existence of an iSeries TCP/IP interface for
the Ethernet Interface. See “Configuring An iSeries TCP/IP
Interface With ADDTCPIFC” on page 243.
8. The next step depends on your iSeries release. See
“Configuring PSF For IPDS On V3R7 Or V4R1” on page 246 to
configure your printer.
NOTE: When the IPDS feature is installed, the queue name ‘d4prn’
is not available.
9. Verify the printer is ON using the VFYCFG command.
10. Verify that TCP/IP has been started using the STRTCP
command.
11. Test your configuration. See “Verifying The IPDS Configuration
On iSeries” on page 259.
12. To share the printer on the network, verify that the necessary
parameters have been set correctly. See “Sharing The iSeries
Printer On The Network” on page 260.
13. If you have problems, refer to “iSeries Troubleshooting” on
page 262.

Configuring An iSeries TCP/IP Interface With
ADDTCPIFC
NOTE: Do not enter the IP address of the Ethernet Interface. Do
not set the iSeries interface address to the same address
as the Ethernet Interface IP address. Also, do not add the
Ethernet Interface to the iSeries TCP/IP interface list.

243

Chapter 9 Configuring On iSeries As An IPDS Printer

Configuring An Interface For Ethernet
ADDTCPIFC is used to add a TCP/IP interface to iSeries. This step
configures the iSeries for attachments to a TCP/IP network.
1. At the iSeries command line, enter the following command:
ADDTCPIFC INTNETADR ('9.99.15.188') LIND(ETHLAN)
SUBNETMASK('255.255.255.0')
2. Your completed screen should look like Figure 30.
System: ADDTCPIFC
Internet address:
Line description
Subnet mask:
Associated local interface

*NONE

Type of service

*NORMAL

Maximum transmission unit:

*LIND

Autostart:

*YES

PVC logical channel identifier
+ for more values
X.25 idle circuit timeout

X.25 maximum virtual circuits

X.25 DDN interface

*NO

TRLAN bit sequencing

*MSB

Figure 30. Example ADDTCPIFC Interface

244

Configuring An iSeries TCP/IP Interface With ADDTCPIFC

3. The following parameters must be specified:
a. Internet Address
Internet address of the iSeries Ethernet LAN adapter.
NOTE:Do not use the IP address of the Ethernet Interface.
b. Subnet Mask
The Subnet Mask for this iSeries TCP/IP interface (for
example, 255.255.255.0).
c. Line Description
The name assigned to the iSeries line description as
described in “Developing Line Descriptions With
CRTLINETH” on page 223. Each iSeries LAN adapter will
have its own line description.

Configuring A TCP/IP Host Table Entry
Although optional, it is recommended that you create a TCP/IP host
table entry. Add the iSeries name and the IP address of the LAN
adapter to the “Host Table Entries.” Also, add the hostname and IP
address of the printer to the list. You can access the host table
entries function by using the CFGTCP command, then selecting
option 10 from the menu.
You can also add entries to your host table for both the hostname
and the fully qualified network name for your system. The entry
name should match the name you configured for host and domain.
For example, if your hostname is “RCHASM03” and your domain
name is “RCHLAND.IBM.COM”, your fully qualified network name
is “RCHASM03.RCHLAND.IBM.COM”. In your host entry table,
enter both RCHASM03 and RCHASM03.RCHLAND.IBM.COM.

245

Chapter 9 Configuring On iSeries As An IPDS Printer

Configuring PSF For IPDS On V3R7 Or V4R1
To configure IPDS on iSeries V3R7 and above, use the following
commands:

•
•

CRTPSFCFG (Optional)
CRTDEVPRT

Configuring AFP With CRTPSFCFG On V3R7 Or
V4R1 (Optional)
New for V3R7 is the ability to specify three TCP/IP-related
parameters for PSF in a printer device description: RMTLOCNAME,
PORT, and ACTTMR. In V3R2, CRTPSFCFG, which replaced
WRKAFP2, was used to specify these same parameters, along with
other parameters. In V3R7 and higher, these three parameters are
ignored when specified in a PSF configuration object, since they
are specified in a printer device description. However, you may
wish to use a PSF configuration object to specify other parameters,
such as IPDS pass through and so on.
The PSF configuration object created with this command is used by
PSF when printing IPDS files only if the object is specified with the
USRDFNOBJ parameter in the printer device description.
To configure iSeries for IPDS printing on V3R7 or V4R1:
1. At the iSeries command line, enter a command in the form:
CRTPSFCFG

PSFCFG(AFP/NET6500
IPDSPASTHR(*YES) RLSTMR(*SEC15)
TEXT(‘printer_type NETWORK PRINTER’)

2. A completed screen looks like Figure 31.

246

Configuring PSF For IPDS On V3R7 Or V4R1

PSF Configuration Information
PSF configuration: NET6500-v

Library: AFP

User resource library:

*JOBLIBL

IPDS pass through:

*YES

Activate release timer:

*NORDYF

Release timer:

*SEC15

Restart timer:

*IMMED

SNA retry count:

Delay time between retries:

Blank page:

*YES

Page size control:

*YES

Resident fonts:

*YES

Resource retention:

*YES

Edge orient:

*NO

Remote location:
Name or address:

*NONE

TCP/IP port:

*NONE

TCP/IP activation timer:

170

PSF defined options:
*NONE
Text description:

6500-v Network Printer

Device resource library list:

*DFT

Figure 31. Example CRTPSFCFG Command (V3R7 or V4R1)
247

Chapter 9 Configuring On iSeries As An IPDS Printer

NOTE: The lines in bold in Figure 31 are not used by PSF.
Instead, PSF uses the information entered in the device
description screen.
3. The following parameters are recommended:
a. PSF configuration (PSFCFG)
The name used for this PSF configuration object. The
name must match the user-defined object name
(USRDFNOBJ) in the printer DEVD.
b. IPDS pass through (IPDSPASTHR)
To print SCS files, specify *YES, PSF transforms SCS into
IPDS before printing.
c. Activate release timer (ACTRLSTMR)
Specifies the point at which the release timer (RLSTMR) is
activated. Set to *NORDYF.
d. Release timer (RLSTMR)
Specifies the amount of time to wait before a session or
dialog is released without terminating the writer. The
ACTRLSTMR parameter specifies when this timer is to be
activated. Set the parameter to a value at least equal to the
TIMEOUT value on the printer. The recommended value is
*SEC15.
e. Page Size Control (PAGSIZCTL)
Specifies if the page size (FORMS) is set by PSF/400.
Usually set to *YES.

248

Configuring PSF For IPDS On V3R7 Or V4R1

Configuring PSF With CRTDEVPRT On V3R7 Or
V4R1
This section describes how to create a printer device description.
1. At the iSeries command line, enter a command in the form:
CRTDEVPRT DEVD(NETPRT64) DEVCLS(*LAN) TYPE(*IPDS)
MODEL(0) LANATTACH(*IP) AFP(*YES) PORT(5001)
FONT(11) FORMFEED(*CONT)
RMTLOCNAME(‘128.9.12.134’)
USRDFNOBJ(AFP/5000NETPRT *PSFCFG)
TEXT(‘printer_type NETWORK PRINTER’)
NOTE: Only use the USRDFNOBJ parameter if it was defined in
the previous procedure. See “Configuring AFP With
CRTPSFCFG On V3R7 Or V4R1 (Optional)” on page 246.
2. A completed screen looks like the example shown in Figure 32.
Display Device Description
5716SS1 V3R7M0 961108

BLDRB1

Device Description:

DEVD

NETPRT64

Option:

OPTION

*ALL

Category of device:

*PRT

Device class:

DEVCLS

*LAN

Device type:

TYPE

*IPDS

Device model:

MODEL

LAN attachment:

LANATTACH

*IP

User-defined object:

USRDFNOBJ

NET6500-v

Library:

AFP

Object type:

*PSFCFG

Data transform program:

USRDTATFM

*NONE

User-defined driver program:

USRDRVPGM

*NONE

Advanced function printing:

AFP

*YES
249

Chapter 9 Configuring On iSeries As An IPDS Printer

Port number:

PORT

5001

Online at IPL:

ONLINE

*YES

Font:

FONT

Identifier:

011

Point size:

*NONE

Form feed:

FORMFEED

*CONT

Separator drawer:

SEPDRAWER

*FILE

Separator program:

SEPPGM

*NONE

Printer error message:

PRTERRMSG

*INQ

Message queue:

MSGQ

QSYSOPR

Library:

*LIBL

Activation timer:

ACTTMR

170

Maximum pending requests:

MAXPNDRQS

Print while converting:

PRTCVT

*YES

Print request timer:

PRTRQSTMR

*NOMAX

Form definition:

FORMDF

F1C10110

Library:
Remote location:

*LIBL
RMTLOCNAME

Name or address:

128.9.12.134

Dependent location name:

DEPLOCNAME

*NONE

Text:

TEXT

6500-v Network Printer

User-defined options:

USRDFNOPT

Figure 32. Example CRTDEVPRT Command (V3R7 and above)
250

Configuring PSF For IPDS On V3R7 Or V4R1

3. Values must be entered for the following parameters:
a. Device Description (DEVD)
The device description or name.
b. Device Class (DEVCLS)
Specify *LAN
c. Device Type (TYPE)
Specify *IPDS
d. Device Model (MODEL)
Specify 0
e. LAN Attachment (LANATTACH)
Specify *IP
f.

Port Number (PORT)
Specify 5001

g. Font (FONT)
Enter an appropriate value.
h. Form Feed (FORMFEED)
Specify *CONT
i.

Activation Timer (ACTTMR)
This value specifies the number of seconds that PSF waits
for a printer to respond to an activation request. If only one
system is using the printer, use the default value (170
seconds). If more than one system is using the printer,
specify *NOMAX, which causes PSF to wait indefinitely for a
response to an activation request.

Remote Location (RMTLOCNAME)
Enter the IP address or hostname of the printer.

251

Chapter 9 Configuring On iSeries As An IPDS Printer

k. User-Defined Object (USRDFNOBJ)
To use a PSF configuration object, specify its name and
library here. This object type must be *PSFCFG. For V3R7
and higher, a single PSF configuration object may be
referenced by multiple device descriptions, if required.

Configuring PSF for IPDS On V4R2 And Above
To configure IPDS on the iSeries V4R3, use the following
commands:

•
•

CRTDEVPRT
CRTPSFCFG (Optional)

Configuring AFP with CRTPSFCFG on V4R3 and
above (Optional)
To configure the iSeries for IPDS printing on V4R3:
1. At the iSeries command line, enter a command in the form:
CRTPSFCFG PSFCFG(AFP/NETPRT6500-v) IPDSPASTHR(*YES)
RLSTMR(*SEC15) TEXT(‘IBM 6500-v NETWORK ATTACHED
PRINTER’) PAGSIZCTL(*YES) ACTRLSTMR(*NORDYF)
2. A completed screen looks like Figure 33.

252

Configuring PSF for IPDS On V4R2 And Above

Create PSF Configuration (CRTPSFCFG)
PSF configuration ...................
Library ................................
>*CURLIB
User resource library list ...........
*JOBLIBL
Device resource library list ........
*DFT
+ for more values
IPDS pass through ..................
>*NO
Activate release timer................
*NORDYF
Release timer ...........................
>*NOMAX
Restart timer..............................
*IMMED
APPC and TCP/IP retry count ...
15
Delay between APPC retries.....
90
Acknowledgment frequency ......
100
Printer response timer
*NOMAX
Generate PDF output
*NONE
Text 'description' .....................
>*BLANK
Additional Parameters
Automatic session recovery:
Enabled ...............................
Message option ...................
Blank page ................................
Page size control....................
Resident fonts ..........................
Resource retention ...................
Edge orient ...............................
Use outline fonts.......................
PSF defined option...................
Font substitution messages......
Capture host fonts at printer.....
Font resolution for formatting ...
Font mapping table...................
Library..................................

*NO
*YES
>*YES
*YES
*YES
*NO
*NO
*NONE
+ for more values
*YES
*NO
*SEARCH
*NONE

Name
Name, *CURLIB
*JOBLIBL, *CURLIB, *NONE
Name, *DFT
*NO, *YES
*NORDYF, *IMMED...
1-1440, *NOMAX, *SEC15...
1-1440, *IMMED
1-99, *NOMAX
0-999
1-32767
5-3600, *NOMAX
*NONE, SPLF, *STMF, *MAIL

*NO, *YES
*INFO, *INQ
*YES, *NO
*NO, *YES
*YES, *NO
*YES, *NO
*YES, *NO
*YES, *NO

*YES, *NO
*NO, *YES
*SEARCH, 240, 300
Name, *NONE
Name
253

Chapter 9 Configuring On iSeries As An IPDS Printer

Cut sheet emulation mode .........
Use DBCS simulation fonts
Replace ......................................
Authority .....................................

*NONE
*NO
*YES
*LIBCRTAUT

*NONE, *CHKFIRST, *CHKALL
*YES, *NO
*YES, *NO
Name, *LIBCRTAUT,
*CHANGE...

Figure 33. Example CRTPSFCFG Command (V4R2 and above)
3. The following parameters are recommended: PSF
configuration (PSFCFG)
The name used for this PSF configuration object. The name must
match the user-defined object name (USRDFNOBJ) in the printer
DEVD.
PSF configuration (PSFCFG)
The name used for this PSF configuration object. The name must
match the user-defined object name (USRDFNOBJ) in the printer
DEVD.
IPDS pass through (IPDSPASTHR)
To print SCS files, specify *YES, PSF transforms SCS into IPDS
before printing.
Release timer (RLSTMR)
Specifies the amount of time to wait before a session or dialog is
released without terminating the writer. The ACTRLSTMR
parameter specifies when this timer is to be activated. Set the
parameter to a value at least equal to the TIMEOUT value on the
printer. IBM recommends *SEC15.
Page size control (PAGSIZCTL)
Specifies if the page size (forms) is set by PSF. Usually set to
*YES.
Remote Location name or address (RMTLOCNAME)
Enter the IP address or hostname of the printer.
254

Configuring PSF for IPDS On V4R2 And Above

Configuring PSF with CRTDEVPRT On V4R2 and
above
This section describes how to create a printer device description.
1. At the iSeries command line, enter a command in the form:
CRTDEVPRT DEVD(P6500-v) DEVCLS(*LAN) TYPE(*IPDS)
MODEL(0)
LANATTACH(*IP) AFP(*YES) PORT(5001) FONT(11)
FORMFEED(*CONT) RMTLOCNAME(‘128.9.12.134’)
USRDFNOBJ(AFP/NETPRT6500-v *PSFCFG)
TEXT(‘IBM 6500-v NETWORK PRINTER’)
Only use the USRDFNOBJ parameter if it was defined in the
previous procedure.
A completed screen looks like the example shown in Figure 34.

255

Chapter 9 Configuring On iSeries As An IPDS Printer

Create Device Desc (Printer) (CRTDEVPRT)
Device description ........................ : >P6500
Device class................................... : >*LAN
Device type .................................... : >*IPDS
Device model ................................. : >0
LAN attachment ............................. : >*IP
Advanced function printing ..............
*YES
Port number ................................... : >5001
Online at IPL.................................... : *YES
Font:
Identifier....................................
>011
Point size ...................................
*NONE
Form feed ........................................
*CONT
Separator drawer.............................
*FILE
Separator program ..........................
*NONE
Library ........................................
Printer error message......................
*INQ
Message queue ...............................
*CTLD
Library ........................................
Activation timer ................................
170
Image configuration.........................
*NONE
Maximum pending requests ............
6
Print while converting ......................
*YES
Print request timer ...........................
*NOMAX
Form definition.................................
F1C10110
Library ........................................
*LIBL
Remote location:
Name or address ......................
User-defined options .......................
*NONE
+ for more values
User-defined object:
Object........................................
*NONE
Library.................................
Object type ...............................
Data transform program ..................
*NONE
Library ........................................
User-defined driver program ...........
*NONE
Library ........................................
Secure connection...........................
*NO
Validation list....................................
*NONE
Library ........................................

256

Name
*LCL, *RMT, *VRT, *SNPT, *LAN
3287, 3812, 4019, 4201...
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 10, 13, 301...
*LEXLINK, *IP, *USRDFN
*NO, *YES
0-65535
*YES, *NO
3, 5, 11, 12, 13, 18, 19...
000.1-999.9, *NONE
*TYPE, *CONT, *CONT2, *CUT...
1-255, *FILE
Name, *NONE
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
*INQ, *INFO
Name, *CTLD, *SYSOPR, QSYSOPR
Name, LIBL, *CURLIB
1-2550, *NOMAX
*NONE, *IMGA01, *IMGA02...
1-31
*NO, *YES
1-3600, *NOMAX
Name
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Character value, *NONE

Name, *NONE
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
*DTAARA, *DTAQ, *FILE...
Name, *NONE
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
Name, *NONE
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
*NO, *YES
Name, *NONE
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Configuring PSF for IPDS On V4R2 And Above

Publishing information:
Support duplex ...........................
Support color ..............................
Pages per minute black..............
Pages per minute color ..............
Location......................................
Data steams supported ..............
+ for more values
Text ‘description’
Remote network identifier ................
Workstation customizing object .......
Library ........................................
Authority...........................................

*UNKNOWN
*UNKNOWN
*UNKNOWN
*UNKNOWN
*BLANK
*UNKNOWN

*UNKNOWN, *SIMPLEX, *DUPLEX
*UNKNOWN, *NOCOLOR, *COLOR
1-32767, *UNKNOWN
1-32767, *UNKNOWN
*UNKNOWN, *PCL, *PS, *PDF

*BLANK
Additional Parameters
*NETATR
Name, *NETATR, *NONE
*NONE
Name, *NONE
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
*ALL
Name, *LIBCRTAUT, *CHANGE...

Figure 34. Example CRTDEVPRT Command (V4R2 and above)
2. Values must be entered for the following parameters:
Device Description (DEVD)
The device description or name.
Device Class (DEVCLS)
Specify *LAN.
Device Type (TYPE)
Specify *IPDS.
Device Model (MODEL)
Specify 0.
LAN attachment (LANATTACH)
Specify *IP.
Port number (PORT)
Specify 5001.

257

Chapter 9 Configuring On iSeries As An IPDS Printer

Font (FONT)
Enter an appropriate value.
Form Feed (FORMFEED)
Specify *CONT.
Activation timer (ACTTMR)
This value specifies the number of seconds that PSF waits for a
printer to respond to an activation request. If only one system is
using the printer, use the default value (170 seconds). If more than
one system is using the printer, specify *NOMAX, which causes
PSF to wait indefinitely for a response to an activation request.
Remote Location (RMTLOCNAME)
Enter the IP address or hostname of the printer.
User-Defined Object (USRDFNOBJ)
To use a PSF configuration object, specify its name and library
here. This object type must be *PSFCFG. For V3R7 and higher, a
single PSF configuration object may be referenced by multiple
device descriptions, if required.

258

Verifying The
Configuration
On iSeries
Configuring
PSFIPDS
for IPDS
On V4R2 And
Above

Verifying The IPDS Configuration On iSeries
To test IPDS printing:
1. If it is not already on, vary on the line description:
VRYCFG CFGTYPE(*LIN)
2. To start TCP/IP, enter STRTCP.
3. Verify that the iSeries TCP/IP interface is active. Use the
command:
WRKTCPSTS
and then select option 1.
4. Turn the printer on and wait until the printer control panel
displays “ETHERNET IS READY.”
5. To verify the printer is connected to iSeries, ping the printer
from an iSeries workstation with one of the following
commands:
PING ip_address
or
PING hostname
where ip_address is the Internet address of the remote
system printer (the Ethernet Interface), and hostname is the
hostname you defined for the printer, if any.

•

If the ping is not successful, refer to “Cannot PING The
Printer” on page 262.

•

If the ping is successful, vary on the printer device
description with the command:
VRYCFG (printer_device) CFGTYPE(*DEV)
STATUS(*ON)

6. To use PSF to send an IPDS file to the printer, enter:
STRPRTWTR DEV (printer_device)
where printer_device is the name of the printer.
7. If you have problems printing, do the following:

•

Print an Ethernet Test Page. Refer to your User's Manual.

•

Verify that port number 5001 is being used.
259

Chapter 9 Sharing The iSeries Printer On The Network

8. If you are still unable to print IPDS files, contact technical
support.

Sharing The iSeries Printer On The Network
To support printer sharing, your printer automatically switches
among all attached ports (serial, twinax/coax, LAN). Basically, the
printer prints jobs for one port until no new jobs appear and the port
“times out.” The printer then switches to the next port and does the
same thing.
To change the default “time out” value for a port, update the
TIMEOUT value for the port on the appropriate menu (Serial
Interface, Ethernet Parameters, Twinax Interface, or Coax
Interface).

260

Printer Sharing Parameters

Printer Sharing Parameters
To set up iSeries for printer sharing, set the following parameters.
Table 11. Printer Sharing
iSeries
Version

Recommended
Value

Where Set

Parameter

Description

V3R7
V4R1

CRTPSFCFG
CHGPSFCFG

ACTRLSTMR

*NORDYF

Specifies the point at
which the release timer
(RLSTMR) is activated.
Set to *NORDYF. This
means that the release
timer is activated when
there are no spooled
files in the printer’s
output queue with a
status of RDY and the
last page of the last
spooled file processed
has printed. *NORDYF
is used so that all files
with a status of RDY are
printed before releasing
the session (which does
not terminate the
writer).

V3R7
V4R1

CRTPSFCFG
CHGPSFCFG

RLSTMR

*SEC15

Specifies the amount of
time to wait before a
session or dialog is
released without
terminating the writer.
The ACTRLSTMR
parameter specifies
when this timer is to be
activated. Set the
parameter to a value at
least equal to the
TIMEOUT value on the
printer. The
recommended value is
*SEC15.

261

Chapter 9 iSeries Troubleshooting

Table 11. Printer Sharing (continued)
iSeries
Version
V3R7
V4R1

Where Set
CRTDEVPRT
CHGDEVPRT

Parameter
ACTTMR

Recommended
Value
*NOMAX

Description
The value specifies the
number of seconds that
PSF will wait for a
printer to respond to an
activation request. If
only one system will be
using the printer, use
the default value (170
seconds). If more than
one system will be
using the printer, set the
value to *NOMAX,
which causes PSF to
wait indefinitely for a
response to an
activation request.

iSeries Troubleshooting
Use this section to resolve problems configuring iSeries on TCP/IP
networks.

Cannot PING The Printer
If you have problems trying to ping the printer:

262

•

Verify the configuration of iSeries, including the printer and any
intervening devices such as routers and bridges.

•

Verify that the iSeries line description is varied on and the
printer is turned on and displays a status of ONLINE.

•

Verify that the iSeries TCP/IP interface is active.

PSF Terminates When Initialized

PSF Terminates When Initialized
If PSF terminates when you initialize it for IPDS printing and issues
message PQT3603, check for the following error codes:

•

Code 10 means an incorrect RMTSYS or RMTLOCNAME (V3R2,
V3R7, or V4R1) has been specified for the printer.

•

Code 15 means that PSF timed out waiting for the printer’s
response. Check the value you entered for Activation Timer
when using WRKAFP2, CRTPSFCFG (V3R2), or CRTDEVPRT
(V3R7 or V4R1).

•

Codes 20-39 indicate a general communications failure. Make
sure all of the components in your network are operational,
such as routers. If necessary, call IBM technical support.

•

Codes 40-59 indicate a logic error between PSF and the printer
control unit. Contact IBM technical support.

Spooled Print File Remains In PND Status
Check the output queue with the command:
WRKOUTQ queuename
This typically indicates that PSF is waiting for a response from the
printer. This can be verified by displaying the QSPL subsystem,
WRKACTJOBSBS (QSPL). If the status of the PDJ job for the printer
is SELW, then PSF is waiting for a response from the printer. Make
sure that the printer is in ONLINE mode and that all network
connections (for example, routers) between the iSeries and the
printer are active.

263

Chapter 9 iSeries Troubleshooting

Spooled Files Disappear Without Printing
To resolve this problem:

•

Check that the correct printer queue name and correct IP
address have been used.

•

Ping the IP address. If the ping is successful, disconnect the
network cable from the printer/print server, and ping the
address again. If the ping is still successful, there is another
printer with that IP address on the network.

Data Is Being Clipped
To resolve this problem, you may want to set the PSC (Page Size
Control) parameter to *YES in the CRTPSFCFG command (V3R2,
V3R7, or V4R1).

264

z/OS Configuration,
IPDS Printer

Overview
Use this chapter to configure z/OS to print IPDS files on your IBM
6500-v network printer.
To print IPDS files, you must have the IPDS option on the printer.

Requirements
Verify that you have the following required software:

•
•

PSF Version 2.2.0 with APAR OW15599 (for TCP/IP support)

•

TCP/IP Version 3 Release 1, or higher, installed and configured
on z/OS

z/OS Scheduler with APAR OW12236 to support two new
PRINTDEV keywords: IPADDR and PORTNO

To obtain the PTFs associated with these APARs, contact the IBM
Support Center.

265

Chapter 10

Overview

Configuration Checklist
All of the following configuration steps carried out on z/OS require
appropriate RACF authority.
1. Using the printer operator panel, set up the IPDS printer
emulation to 6408/6412.
2. Set TCP/IP addresses for the printer, such as IP address,
gateway address, or subnet mask. See “Configuration Tools”
on page 52.
3. Configure the host environment.
See “Configuring PSF for z/OS to Print IPDS Files” on
page 267.
4. Verify the configuration. See “Verifying a TCP/IP-Attached
Printer on z/OS” on page 277.
5. If you want to share the printer, do the procedure in “Sharing
IBM 6500-v Printers on z/OS” on page 278.
6. If you have problems, refer to “Handling z/OS Connectivity
Problems” on page 280.

266

Configuration Procedure

Configuring PSF for z/OS to Print IPDS Files
To perform this procedure, you need the IP address of the
Ethernet.

Configuration Procedure
Configuring PSF to print IPDS files includes the following steps:
1. Define the z/OS communications control unit to z/OS. See
“Define the Communications Control Unit to z/OS” on page
268.
2. Modify the TCP/IP profile on your z/OS system, if necessary.
See “Modify the TCP/IP Profile in z/OS” on page 268.
3. “Ping” the printer. See “Verify the Printer Connection” on page
271.
4. Define the printer as a writer-controlled printer to JES. See
“Define the Printer to JES” on page 272.
5. Define the printer to PSF with a PRINTDEV statement,
including the IP address. See “Define the Printer to PSF” on
page 273.
This section does not provide all the information you need to install
and configure TCP/IP on your z/OS system. For more information
on installing TCP/IP, refer to TCP/IP for z/OS: Customization and
Administration Guide.
The routing of information is determined on the basis of the IP
address, and is performed by IP gateways. After the network is
configured correctly, the z/OS host appears to be communicating
directly with the TCP/IP-attached printer.

267

Chapter 10

Configuring PSF for z/OS to Print IPDS Files

Define the Communications Control Unit to z/OS
If you have not already done so, define the communications control
unit for the z/OS host, such as the 3172 or the 3745 control unit, to
z/OS. Use either an z/OS configuration program (MVSCP) or a
hardware configuration definition (HCD), depending on the version
of your z/OS system:

•
•

When using a version earlier than z/OS 4.1.0, use an MVSCP.
When using a version of z/OS 4.1.0 or later, use an HCD or an
MVSCP.

For more information about using these methods, refer to:

•
•

MVS/ESA* Migration Planning: Dynamic I/O Configuration
MVS/ESA Hardware Configuration: Using the Dialog

Modify the TCP/IP Profile in z/OS
The TCP/IP profile contains system configuration statements used
to initialize the TCP/IP address space. Of those statements, the
following are subject to special considerations when you are
printing from PSF on TCP/IP-attached printers. Samples of these
statements are printed in bold in the example shown in Figure 35.

268

Configuration Procedure

ACBPOOLSIZE

1000

ADDRESSTRANSLATIONPOOLSIZE

1500

CCBPOOLSIZE

150

DATABUFFERPOOLSIZE

160

ENVELOPEPOOLSIZE

750

IPROUTEPOOLSIZE

300

LARGEENVELOPEPOOLSIZE

RCBPOOLSIZE

SCBPOOLSIZE

256

SKCBPOOLSIZE

256

SMALLDATABUFFERPOOLSIZE

256

TCBPOOLSIZE

512

TINYDATABUFFERPOOLSIZE

256

UCBPOOLSIZE

100

32768

KEEPALIVEOPTIONS INTERVAL 10 SENDGARBAGE FALSE ENDKEEPALIVEOPTIONS
GATEWAY
;

* Network
9
DEFAULTNET

First hop
=
9.99.12.254

Linkname
BPCLAN
BPCLAN

Packet Size
2000
2000

Subnet mask
0.255.255.0
0.255.255.0

Subnet value
0.99.12.0
0

Figure 35. Modifying TCP/IP Profile
This section contains information about the statements, the special
considerations that apply to them, and the changes they may make
necessary. If you change any of the values in the TCP/IP profile,
restart TCP/IP to pick up the changes.

269

Chapter 10

Configuring PSF for z/OS to Print IPDS Files

For information about the TCP/IP profile and the statements
described in this section, refer to:

•
•

IBM TCP/IP z/OS Customization and Administration Guide
IBM TCP/IP Performance and Tuning Guide

DATABUFFERPOOLSIZE
The DATABUFFERPOOLSIZE statement defines the number and
size of the data buffers. For printing on TCP/IP-attached printers,
IBM recommends that you specify at least 160 data buffers, 32768
buffer size.
SMALLDATABUFFERPOOLSIZE
The SMALLDATABUFFERPOOLSIZE statement defines the
number of small data buffers. For printing on TCP/IP-attached
printers, IBM recommends that you specify at least 256 small data
buffers.
TINYDATABUFFERPOOLSIZE
The TINYDATABUFFERPOOLSIZE statement defines the number
of tiny data buffers. For printing on TCP/IP-attached printers, IBM
recommends that you specify at least 256 tiny data buffers.
KEEPALIVEOPTIONS
PSF relies on TCP to detect when a connection with a TCP/IPattached printer is no longer usable. When no data has been
exchanged between PSF and its connection partner, TCP sends
keep-alive probes to the connection partner periodically. These
periodic probes, called keep-alive transmissions, enable TCP to
discover when a connection is no longer usable even if the
connection partner is abruptly powered off or is no longer
accessible through the network.
The frequency of keep-alive transmissions is controlled by the
INTERVAL parameter on the KEEPALIVEOPTIONS statement.
The frequency applies to all TCP applications that direct TCP to
send keep-alive transmissions. The default frequency is after about
two hours of inactivity.
270

Configuration Procedure

For printing on TCP/IP-attached printers, IBM recommends that
you specify a shorter interval than the default, such as 10 minutes,
for the interval between keep-alive transmissions.
Also, if any target host requires that the keep-alive packet contain
data, specify SENDGARBAGE TRUE. For example:
KEEPALIVEOPTIONS INTERVAL 5 SENDGARBAGE TRUE
ENDKEEPALIVEOPTIONS
GATEWAY
The Packet Size parameter of the GATEWAY statement defines
the maximum transmission unit (MTU) for the z/OS host. For IBM
10/100Base-T Ethernet Interface printers, the MTU size is fixed at
1024 bytes. The value cannot be adjusted.

Verify the Printer Connection
To verify that the z/OS system can establish a connection with the
TCP/IP-attached printer, “ping” the printer from the MVS system.
From a TSO session, enter the following command:
TSO PING ip_address
In JES2, enter the following command from the System Display and
Search Facility (SDSF) menu 6:
ping ip_address

ip_address specifies the IP address of the Ethernet.
Here is an example of a successful “ping” command:
EZA0458I Ping V3R1: Pinging host 9.99.12.33
(Use ATTN to interrupt.)
EZA0463I PING: Ping #1 response took 0.084 seconds.
Successes so far = 1.
Here is an example of an unsuccessful “ping” command:
EZA0458I Ping V3R1: Pinging host 9.99.12.33
(Use ATTN to interrupt.)
EZA0464I PING: Ping #1 timed out
NOTE: If you have problems “ping”-ing a printer, refer to “Handling
z/OS Connectivity Problems” on page 280.

271

Chapter 10

Configuring PSF for z/OS to Print IPDS Files

Define the Printer to JES
When a TCP/IP-attached printer is to be used with JES, it must be
defined for deferred printing mode with JES.
JES2 Printer Definitions
Below is an example of the JES2 printer definition initialization
member, located in the system PARMLIB:
FSS(FSS1),PROC=PSFPROC,HASPFSSM=HASPFSSM
PRT1
FSS=FSS1,MODE=FSS,PRMODE=(LINE,PAGE,SOSI1),
CLASS=C,UCS=0,SEP,NOSEPDS,CKPTPAGE=100,
DRAIN,MARK,TRKCELL=YES
The above example is correct for JES2 3.11 and above. For earlier
versions of JES2, the statement is named FSSDEF and would be
stated as FSSDEF FSSNAME=FSS1.
The value you specify for the PROC parameter must match the
name on the PSF Startup procedure.
JES3 Printer Definitions
Below is an example JES3 printer definition. This example is not
executable, but it is intended to help the JES3 systems programmer
define the printer to the z/OS host.
FSSDEF,TYPE=WTR,FSSNAME=FSS1,PNAME=PSFPROC,SYSTEM=SYS1,
TERM=NO DEVICE,JNAME=PRT1,JUNIT=(,SYS1,,OFF),
FSSNAME=FSS1, MODE=FSS,PM=(LINE,PAGE,SOSI1),
CHARS=(YES,GT12),
The value you specify for the JNAME parameter must match the
name of the printer in the PSF Startup procedure.
The value you specify for the PNAME parameter must match the
name on the PSF Startup procedure.

272

Configuration Procedure

Define the Printer to PSF
Each TCP/IP-attached printer must be defined to PSF with a
PRINTDEV statement in the PSF startup procedure.
Figure 36 shows a sample PSFPROC procedure that you can
modify to suit your installation. The PRINTDEV statement shows
the required IPADDR keyword.
No 6500-v printer-specific writer procedure is currently supplied by
IBM. You can, however, copy the APSWPROT sample from the
APAR medium and modify it for the IBM 6500-v printer.
NOTE: The IBM 6500-v printer supports only resident symbol sets.

//PSFPROC PROC
//**************** IBM NETWORK PRINTERS WRITER PROCEDURE ****************
//*
//*01* MODULE-NAME = PSFPROC
//*
//*01* DESCRIPTIVE-NAME = START PROCEDURE FOR PSF:
//*TCP/IP ATTACHED IBM NETWORK PRINTERS
//*
//*01* NOTES = THE FULL NAME OF THE DEFAULT PAGEDEF IS
//*P1A06462.
//*THE FULL NAME OF THE DEFAULT FORMDEF IS
//*F1A10110.
//*THE FULL NAMES OF THE DEFAULT FONTS ARE
//*X0GF10, X0GS10, X0TU10, AND X0GU10.
//*THE FULL NAME OF THE SEPARATOR PAGE PAGEDEF IS
//*P1V06483.
//*THE FULL NAME OF THE SEPARATOR PAGE FONT IS

273

Chapter 10

Configuring PSF for z/OS to Print IPDS Files

//*X0GT15.
//*
//*
//*01* CHANGE-ACTIVITY:
//*
//**** END OF SPECIFICATIONS ***/
//STEP01EXEC PGM=APSPPIEP,REGION=4096K
//JOBHDR OUTPUT PAGEDEF=V06483,/* JOB SEPARATOR PAGEDEF*/
//FORMDEF=A10110,CHARS=GT15/* JOB SEPARATOR FORMDEF*/
//JOBLTR OUTPUT PAGEDEF=V06483,/* JOB SEPARATOR PAGEDEF*/
//FORMDEF=A10110,CHARS=GT15/* JOB SEPARATOR FORMDEF*/
//DSHDR OUTPUT PAGEDEF=V06483,/* DS SEPARATOR PAGEDEF*/
//FORMDEF=A10110,CHARS=GT15/* DS SEPARATOR FORMDEF*/
//MSGDS OUTPUT PAGEDEF=A06462,/* MESSAGE DATASET PAGEDEF*/
//FORMDEF=A10110/* MESSAGE DATASET FORMDEF*/
//FONT300DDDSN=SYS1.FONT300,/* SYSTEM FONTS - 300 PEL*/
//DISP=SHR
//PSEG01DDDSN=SYS1.PSEGLIB,/* SYSTEM PAGE SEGMENTS*/
//DISP=SHR
//OLAY01DDDSN=SYS1.OVERLIB,/* SYSTEM MEDIUM OVERLAYS*/
//DISP=SHR/*
//PDEF01DDDSN=SYS1.PDEFLIB,/* SYSTEM PAGEDEFS*/
//DISP=SHR
//FDEF01DDDSN=SYS1.FDEFLIB,/* SYSTEM FORMDEFS*/
//DISP=SHR
//* ******************************************************************************************/

274

Configuration Procedure

//*PRINTDEV
//* ******************************************************************************************/
//PRT1CNTL
//PRT1PRINTDEV FONTDD=*.FONT300,/* 300 PEL FONT LIBRARY DD*/
//OVLYDD=*.OLAY01,/* OVERLAY LIBRARY DD*/
//PSEGDD=*.PSEG01,/* SEGMENT LIBRARY DD*/
//PDEFDD=*.PDEF01,/* PAGEDEF LIBRARY DD*/
//FDEFDD=*.FDEF01,/* FORMDEF LIBRARY DD*/
//JOBHDR=*.JOBHDR,/* JOB HEADER SEPARATOR*/
//*/* OUTPUT*/
//JOBTRLR=*.JOBTLR,/* JOB TRAILER SEPARATOR*/
//*/* OUTPUT*/
//DSHDR=*.DSHDR,/* DATA SET HEADER*/
//*/* SEPARATOR*/
//MESSAGE=*.MSGDS,/* MESSAGE DATA SET OUTPUT*/
//BUFNO=5,/* NUMBER OF WRITE DATA BUFFERS*/
//PAGEDEF=A06462,/* DEVICE PAGEDEF DEFAULT*/
//FORMDEF=A10110,/* DEVICE FORMDEF DEFAULT*/
//CHARS=(GF10,/* DEVICE*/
//GS10,TU10,GU10),/* DEFAULT FONT SET*/
//PIMSG=YES,/* ACCUMULATE DATA SET*/
//*/* MESSAGES*/
//DATACK=BLOCK,/* REPORT ALL DATA-CHECK*/
//*/* ERRORS*/
//TRACE=NO,/* CREATE INTERNAL TRACE*/
//FAILURE=WCONNECT,/* PSF ACTION ON PRINTER*/

275

Chapter 10

Configuring PSF for z/OS to Print IPDS Files

//*/* FAILURE*/
//TIMEOUT=REDRIVE/* PSF ACTION ON TIMEOUT*/
//MGMTMODE=OUTAVAIL,/* PRINTER MANAGEMENT MODE*/
//DISCINTV=15,/* DISCONNECT INTERVAL IN*/
//*/* SECONDS*/
//IPADDR=’xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx’/* IP ADDRESS FOR TCP/IP*/
//PRT1ENDCNTL

Figure 36. Sample PSFPROC procedure
NOTE: To specify a TCP/IP address space name other than the
default, TCPIP, code the following exec statement in the
writer procedure:
//STEP01EXEC PGM=ASPPIEP,REGION=4096K,
PARM=(,,,,tcpip_name)
where tcpip_name is the name of the TCP/IP address
space. If this parameter is not coded, PSF uses the default
name, TCPIP.
The IP address is the only required parameter. Other parameters
may be set to facilitate printer sharing as described in “Sharing IBM
6500-v Printers on z/OS” on page 278. For a description of the
PRINTDEV statement, which is not given here, see the PSF
System Programming Guide.
IPADDR
Specifies the IP address for the printer or attachment, in dotteddecimal notation. Do not specify a hostname in place of the dotteddecimal address.

276

Verifying a TCP/IP-Attached Printer on z/OS

Verifying a TCP/IP-Attached Printer on z/OS
To operate a TCP/IP-attached printer, use JES operator
commands.

Starting a TCP/IP-attached Printer
To start a TCP/IP-attached printer, do the following:
1. Start TCP/IP.
2. Power on the printer.
3. Start the printer FSA.

•

On JES2, the command is:
$Sprinter_name

•

On JES3, the command is:
*VARY printer_name,ON

Stopping a TCP/IP-attached Printer
You can stop a TCP/IP-attached printer in several ways:

•

The preferred method is to first stop the PSF FSA for the printer
by entering the following command from the z/OS console:
JES2:
$Pprinter_name
JES3:
*VARY printer_name,OFF
*CANCEL printer_name
where printer_name specifies the name of the printer FSA.
Then you can turn off power to the printer.

•

To end the PSF FSA for the printer, use the JES commands. If
you are unable to purge or cancel the printer by use of the JES
commands, enter the following command:
MODIFY FSSname,FORCE,printer_name

277

Chapter 10

Sharing IBM 6500-v Printers on z/OS

Resolving IPDS Printing Problems
If you have problems printing, do the following:

•
•
•
•

Print an Ethernet Test Page. Refer to your User’s Manual.
Verify that the IPDS service is enabled.
Verify the service name.
Verify that port number 5001 is being used.

If you are still unable to print IPDS files, contact IBM support.

Sharing IBM 6500-v Printers on z/OS
IBM 6500-v printers can be shared on PSF in one of two ways:

•

By using the MGMTMODE and DISCINTV parameters via the
JES spool.

•

By port switching on the printer.

JES Spool Printer Sharing
JES spool printer sharing is valid for TCP/IP attached network
printers. A session with the printer is maintained while there is
output on the JES spool and the printer is available. When there is
no more output on the spool and the disconnect interval expires,
PSF ends the session with the printer. PSF attempts to restart the
session when there is more work on the spool for the printer. After
the session is restarted, PSF must reload the resources required
for the print jobs. When using this method of network printer
sharing, PSF cannot determine if another print driver is active.
You can request this method of network printer sharing by
specifying the following parameters in the PSF Startup Proc.
MGMTMODE=OUTAVAIL
FAILURE=WCONNECT
TIMEOUT=REDRIVE
DISCINTV=n

278

JES Spool Printer Sharing

MGMTMODE
Set to OUTAVAIL. OUTAVAIL requests that PSF start a
communications session with the printer only when output is
available on the JES spool.
FAILURE
Specifies the action PSF is to take after a printer failure or a TCP/IP
network failure. If FAILURE=WCONNECT and the printer is
connected to another host when PSF attempts to establish a
connection on TCP/IP, PSF continuously retries (up to the limit
specified by CONNINTV) until the printer becomes available.
FAILURE=STOP stops the attempt to connect to the printer.
TIMEOUT
Specifies the action that PSF is to take after a timeout when no
output is available on JES. The DISCINTV parameter specifies the
timeout interval. TIMEOUT=REDRIVE requests that PSF redrive
the printer FSA using the value of the MGMTMODE parameter.
TIMEOUT=STOP requests that PSF stop the printer FSA, which
can then be restarted only by an operator command.
DISCINTV
Specifies the disconnect interval in seconds. The value can range
from zero through 86400. IBM suggests you set the value to 15.
When no output is available from JES for this time period, PSF
ends the session with the network printer. If the value is set to zero,
PSF does not end the session because of lack of output.
NOTE: PSF supports two other methods of printer sharing, which
are not applicable to IBM 10/100Base-T Ethernet Interface
printers. VTAM RELREQ is available for printer sharing
under SNA. Port switching is available for SNA- and TCP/
IP-attached printers when a printer can support multiple
active ports.

279

Chapter 10

Handling z/OS Connectivity Problems

Port Switching Printer Sharing
To support printer sharing, IBM 10/100Base-T Ethernet Interface
printers automatically switch among all attached ports (serial port,
the twinax or coax port, or the Ethernet network port). Basically, the
printer prints jobs for one port until no new jobs appear and the port
“times out”. The printer then switches to the next port and does the
same thing.
To change the default “time out” value for a port, update the
TIMEOUT value for the port on the appropriate menu (Serial
Interface, Ethernet, Twinax Interface, or Coax Interface).

Handling z/OS Connectivity Problems
If you encounter problems when “ping”-ing a network printer from
z/OS, here is how to resolve them.

Ping is Not Successful
If the “ping” is not successful, verify the following:

•
•

The printer is powered on.

•

The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size of the IP packet
for the z/OS system is equal to the MTU size of the printer. For
information about the values recommended for the z/OS
system, see “Modify the TCP/IP Profile in z/OS” on page 268.

The IP address is unique in the TCP/IP network.
If the IP address of the z/OS system is not unique, see your
network administrator to resolve the IP address problem.

To change the MTU size for the z/OS system, change the
GATEWAY statement in the z/OS TCP/IP profile, and restart
TCP/IP to pick up the changes.
You cannot change the MTU size on an IBM 10/100Base-T
Ethernet Interface printer. The MTU size is fixed at 1024 bytes.
If these items are all in order, consult your TCP/IP network
administrator about a possible network problem.
280

Ping is Successful

Ping is Successful
A successful “ping” usually indicates that the z/OS system can
communicate with the printer; however, you might receive a
successful “ping” even though the IP address of the TCP/IPattached printer is a duplicate of another IP address.
If PSF is unable to establish a network connection with the TCP/IPattached printer or if PSF output for this printer prints elsewhere,
follow these steps to determine whether the IP address of the
printer is unique:
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Wait at least 5 minutes for TCP/IP to clear the Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) tables. (If your installation specified
a longer interval on the ARPAGE configuration statement in the
TCP/IP profile, you may need to wait longer. For information
about the ARPAGE statement, refer to the IBM TCP/IP z/OS
Customization and Administration Guide.)
3. Enter the “ping” command again from the z/OS system.
NOTE: If you receive a successful response to the “ping”
command, there is a duplicate IP address. Consult your
TCP/IP network administrator.

281

Chapter 10

282

Handling z/OS Connectivity Problems

z/OS Configuration,
TN3270E

z/OS Configuration For A TN3270E Printer
The following configuration information shows how a 6500-v printer
can be configured on z/OS and Info Print Server to print TN3270E.
Modtabs are provided for both an SCS and DSC printer. The z/OS
level is 1.3.
These basic configurations provided a starting point for users new
to printing in this manner.
NOTE: Since Info Print Server (IPS) treats the TN3270E printer as
a COAX attached printer, additional COAX feature for IPS
is required.

Coax Printer Support FMID
Coax Printer Support consists of the following FMID:
HPRT100

283

Chapter 11 Program Materials

Program Materials
An IBM program is identified by a program number and a feature
number. The program number for Coax Printer Support is
5697-F51.
Additional information regarding the telnet server and Info Print
Server can be found in the following manuals.

•

For z/OS V1R2 and above, the TCPIP information can be
found in SG24-5227-3, Communications Server for z/OS V1R2
TCP/IP Implementation Guide.

•
•

InfoPrint Server Customization Guide, S544-5744-03.
InfoPrint ServerOperation and Administration, S544-5745-03.

1. Look at the JES definition defining and associating printer,
PRINTER9 with INFOPRINT SERVER.

/* PRT9 AND FSSDEF FOR 6500
06/27/97 MM
*/
PRINTER9 CLASS=K,SEP,NOMARK,MODE=FSS,FSS=PRINTWAY,
PRMODE=(LINE,PAGE),WS=(W,Q),SETUP=NOHALT,START=NO
/* ASSOCIATE PRINTWAY WITH ITS START UP PROCEADURE
FSS(PRINTWAY) PROC=COURWTR,AUTOSTOP=YES

X
*/

Figure 37. JES Definition Defining PRINTER9

//COURWTR PROC
//* -------------------------------------------------------------*
//IEFPROC EXEC PGM=ANFFIEP,REGION=3M,PARM='INV=AOP1' z/OS4 INV
//STEPLIB DD DSN=IPPW.PW311.SANFLOAD,DISP=SHR
//ANFQUEUE DD DSN=ANDREE.z/OS4.QUEUE,DISP=SHR
//ANFMMSG DD DSN=ANDREE.z/OS4.MSGFILE,DISP=SHR
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSABEND DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSUDUMP DD SYSOUT=*
//
Figure 38. Example Of Proc Used To Start INFOPRINT Server
284

VTAM Definitions For SCS and DSE TN3270E

NETSPL1 VBUILD TYPE=APPL
*
* APPL REPRESENTING IPS
*
APIPP101 APPL MODETAB=MODETAB1,DLOGMOD=SCS,AUTH=(ACQ)
LUPRT101 APPL MODETAB=MODETAB1,DLOGMOD=SCS
Figure 39. Example Of The APPLID That Represents A Copy Of IPDS

VTAM Definitions For SCS and DSE TN3270E
The following are VTAM definitions for SCS and DSE TN3270E
printers.
NOTE: These definitions are identical to those of COAX attached
printers.

******************************************************************
* JES2 TN3270E VTAM MAJOR NODE
*
******************************************************************
*
* LU1 Printer
RMT2 APPL AUTH=(ACQ),EAS=1,PARSESS=NO,SESSLIM=YES,
MODETAB=MODETAB1,DLOGMOD=SCS
*
* LU3 Printer
RMT3 APPL AUTH=(ACQ),EAS=1,PARSESS=NO,SESSLIM=YES,
MODETAB=MODE4245,DLOGMOD=LU3PRT

Figure 40. MODTAB Entries

285

Chapter 11 Program Materials

**********************************************************************
*
*
*
PRINTER WITH SNA CHARACTER SET (LU_1)
@DA22961*
*
*
**********************************************************************
SCS
MODEENT
LOGMODE=SCS,FMPROF=X'03',TSPROF=X'03',PRIPROT=X'B1', *
SECPROT=X'90',COMPROT=X'3080',RUSIZES=X'87C6',
*
PSERVIC=X'01000000E100000000000000',
*
PSNDPAC=X'01',SRCVPAC=X'01'
TITLE 'DSC4K'

**********************************************************************
*
*
*
DSC PRINTER (LU_3)
*
*
*
**********************************************************************
LU3PRT MODEENT LOGMODE=LU3PRT,FMPROF=X'03',TSPROF=X'03',
PRIPROT=X'B1',SECPROT=X'20',COMPROT=X'3080',
X
SSNDPAC=X'00',SRCVPAC=X'00',RUSIZES=X'C7C7',
X
PSNDPAC=X'80',PSERVIC=X'03800000000018502B507F00'

286

TCPIP Configuration With TN3270E

TCPIP Configuration With TN3270E
The following is the portion of the system’s TCPIP configuration
involved with TN3270E printers.

;
; Define the VTAM parameters required for the Telnet server.
;
BeginVTAM
;
PRTGROUP PGRPLU1
RMT2
ENDPRTGROUP
PRTGROUP PGRPLU3
RMT3
ENDPRTGROUP
IPGROUP TESTPRT
9.99.98.62
ENDIPGROUP
IPGROUP TESTPRT3
9.99.98.67
ENDIPGROUP
PRTMAP PGRPLU1 TESTPRT GENERIC
PRTMAP PGRPLU3 TESTPRT3 GENERIC
; End telnet printer section
EndVTAM
NOTE: Only additions required for the TN3270E printers are
shown.
287

Chapter 11 Program Materials

Printer Inventory Manager As Defined With
TN3270E
The following screens show areas of the Printer Inventory Manager
involved with the definition of the TN3270E printers.
1. At main panel, select option 4 to look at the FSS definition.

InfoPrint Server: Printer Inventory Manager
Option ===>
Printer Definitions
1 Add
Add a printer definition
2 List
List printer definitions
3 Select
Select printer definitions to list
Other Functions
4 FSS/FSA/Pool
Manage other inventory definitions
5 PrintWay Queue View IP PrintWay transmission queue
6 PrintWay Message View IP PrintWay message log
7 Configure
Change panel configuration

Printer Definition List

288

Row 17 of 23

Printer Inventory Manager As Defined With TN3270E

2. Select option 5 from this panel to list the FSSs.

FSA, FSS, and Pool Management
Option ===>
FSA
1 Add
2 List
3 Select

Add an FSA
List FSAs
Select FSAs to list

FSS
4 Add
5 List
6 Select

Add an FSS
List FSSs
Select FSSs to list

Pool of Printer Definitions
7 Add
Add a Pool
8 List
List Pools
9 Select
Select Pools to list
3. From the panel below, browse the PRINTWAY FSS to see how
the TN3270E FSS was defined.

FSS List
Command ===>

Row 1 of 3
Scroll ===> HALF

Actions:
A-Add B-Browse C-Copy D-Delete E-Edit
A FSS Name Type Description
= ======== ====
==============================================================
B PRINTWAY IPPW APPLID for TN3270E Printers APIPP101
PRT10 IPPW Howard's PrintWay FSS
WTRES700 PSF Howard's FSS
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************
289

Chapter 11 Program Materials

The panel below shows how the FSS (PRINTWAY) is associated
with its VTAM Applid APIPP101.

Browse
Command ==>

IP PrintWay FSS

FSS name. . . PRINTWAY
Description . APPLID for TN3270E Printers APIPP101

(extend)

Old-style translation
Hiperspace blocks . .
TCP/IP job name . . .
Document code page. .
Applid. . . . . . . . APIPP101
National language . . 1 1. English 2. Japanese
Trace mode. . . . . . 1 1. None 2. Internal 3. No printing 4. Full
Trace prompt
Trace table size .
4. Next look at the printer definition for the DSE (LU_3) printer in
the printer inventory.
5. Select option 2 from the Printer Inventory Manager main panel,
to list the printers.

290

Printer Inventory Manager As Defined With TN3270E

Command ===>

Scroll ===> HALF

Actions:
A-Add B-Browse C-Copy D-Delete E-Edit X-Chg type
A Printer Name
Type Description Location DEST C FORMS LU Name
= ================= ==== ============ ============ ======== =
======== ========
PRT717
PSF 6500 IPDS B5 lab
PRT717 Y
B VTAM_DSE1
IPPW A TN327E Pri IMPACT LAB
K
VTAM_SCS1
IPPW A TN327E Pri IMPACT LAB
J
VTAM_SCS2
IPPW
L
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************
6. While browsing VTAM_DSE1, notice that the DSC printer is
defined to IPS as a COAX attached printer.

Browse
Command ==>

IP PrintWay Printer Definition

Printer definition name . VTAM_DSE1
Description . A TN327E Printer using the DSE (LU_3) Datastream.
Location. . . IMPACT LAB
(extend)

Section
Allocation

(extend)

Component name
Custom values
(enter to browse) (enter to browse)
=>
=> *

291

Chapter 11 Program Materials

Processing
=>
NetSpool options
=>
NetSpool end-of-file =>
IP PrintWay options =>
Protocol
=>

=> *
=>
=>
=> *
=> *

/ Use DEST, CLASS, and FORMS for IP PrintWay printer selection
NetSpool LU name .
LU classes . .
(extend)

292

Printer Inventory Manager As Defined With TN3270E

The following panel shows the Allocation section of the setup,
where the printer is associated with Class K jobs.

Browse
Command ==>

Allocation

Printer definition name . VTAM_DSE1
More:

Spool allocation values:
CLASS . . . . K
LINECT. . .
DEST. . . . .
PRMODE. . .
JES node. . .
PRTY. . . .
FCB . . . . .
SEGMENT . .
FLASH count .
THRESHLD. .
FLASH name. .
UCS . . . .
FORMS . . . .
WRITER. . .
GROUPID . . .
USERDATA
..
(extend)
BURST . . . . 1. Yes 2. No
HOLD. . . . . 1. Yes 2. No
OUTDISP . . . 1. Purge 2. Leave 3. Keep 4. Hold 5. Write
Values for Separator Pages:
Address
..
(extend)
Building . .

In the IP Printway options, retry time, retry limit, and response
timeout is already for the printer.
NOTE: The values of these settings are account specific. Other
values may best serve your printing environment.

293

Chapter 11 Program Materials

Browse
Command ==>

IP PrintWay Options

Printer definition name . VTAM_DSE1
More:

Retention period:
Successful. . . .
Failure . .
Retry time . . . . . 0000:05:00
Retry limit. . . . . 2
Connection timeout . 30
Response timeout . . 100
Exits:
Begin data set. .
End data set. .

Record. .

Document header . .
(extend)
/ Translate document header
Document trailer . .
(extend)
/ Translate document trailer
Dataset grouping . . 2 1. None 2. Job 3. Concatenate job
Formatting:
Line termination. . . .

294

Printer Inventory Manager As Defined With TN3270E

Browse
Command ==>

IP PrintWay Options

Printer definition name . VTAM_DSE1
More: Document header . .
(extend)
/ Translate document header
Document trailer . .
(extend)
/ Translate document trailer
Dataset grouping . . 2 1. None 2. Job 3. Concatenate job
Formatting:
Line termination. . . .
Transparent data char . 35
Carriage control type . 2 1. None 2. Machine 3. ANSI
Delete form feed. . . . 4 1. None 2. Leading 3. Trailing 4. Both
Formatting. . . . . . . 1. None
2. Standard
3. Translate only 4. Use FCB
PostScript header . . . 1. Add
2. Ignore
3. Landscape
4. Always landscape
Omit line termination at EOF

295

Chapter 11 Program Materials

The following shows where the VTAM parameters were set for the
printer. For the DSE printer we chose RMT3 and the logmode of
LU3PRT.

Browse
Command ==>

VTAM Protocol

Printer definition name . VTAM_DSE1
Printer LU name. . . RMT3
VTAM Processing Options:
Printer logmode. . . LU3PRT
Checkpoint pages . . 5
Send as transparent data

The next panel shows these settings for the SCS printer.

Browse
Command ==>

VTAM Protocol

Printer definition name . VTAM_SCS1
Printer LU name. . . RMT2
VTAM Processing Options:
Printer logmode. . . SCS
Checkpoint pages . . 5
Send as transparent data

296

Screens
Printer Inventory Manager As Configuration
Defined With TN3270E

The last thing you need to configure is the printer.
NOTE: A this time, InfoPrint Server and all related LUs should be
active.
Using the printer's web pages go to the configuration screen

Configuration Screens
1. To configure the IBM 6500-v, fill out and submit the forms using
the following links.

Table 12. Configuration Forms
Configuration

HTML Forms

Network

TCP/IP (including Windows) and Novell network settings

Print Path

Destination, Model, Log Path, and I/O port configuration

Print Model

Shortcut to the print path model configuration forms

Log Path

Shortcut to the print path log path configurations form

TN5250/3270

TN5250/3270 configuration settings

SNMP

SNMP configuration settings

Administration

Names and passwords

System

System operation modes (reboot, factory defaults)
2. Select the TN5250/3270 section from the configuration screen.
NOTE: Changes will only take effect after you reset the IBM 6500v from the System page.

297

Chapter 11 Configuration Screens

The following displays:
Mode: TN5250
Host

Click here for TN3270 mode
ok (eg. 204.191.175.114 or
host.domain.com)

Port
Device Description
Message Queue Name
Message Queue Library
Device Type
IBM
WSCST Name
WSCST Library
Auto Connect
Start Auto Connect
Click here
3. Select TN3270E Mode.
The following displays:
Configuration for Print Path d2prn
Mode: TN3270
Host
host.domain.com)
Port
Resource Name
Auto Connect
Stop Auto Connect

Click here for TN5250 mode
ok (eg. 204.191.175.114 or
23

Click here

NOTE: Changes will only take effect after you reset the
IBM 6500-v from the System page.
4. Enter the address of your system for the host IP address
The port address is the port configured for your telnet server. It is
usualy port 23.
The Resource name will be the printer name defined in the VTAM
portion of your Telnet server configuration. For this example use
RMT3.
298

Screens
Printer Inventory Manager As Configuration
Defined With TN3270E

5. Select auto connect.
6. Go to the system page and reboot for the changes to take
effect.
7. After the printer reboots, enter the command /DTCPIP, T,
CONN from the SDSF console. The following messages show
that the printer is connected.

D TCPIP,,T,CONN
EZZ6064I TELNET CONNECTION DISPLAY 044
EN
TSP
CONN TY IPADDR..PORT
LUNAME APPLID PTR LOGMODE
-------- -- ---------------------- -------- -------- --- -------00000468 9.99.98.62..2000
RMT3 *PRINTER PPE LU3PRT
----- PORT:
23 ACTIVE
PROF: CURR CONNS:
1
-----------------------------------------------------------3 OF 3 RECORDS DISPLAYED

You are now ready to print.

299

Chapter 11 Configuration Screens

300

iSeries Configuration,
TN5250

Setting Up TN5250 Print Queues on iSeries
Start with V5R1 or later and the most recent PTF level. The iSeries
should have TCP/IP installed, be fully configured, and functional.
To set up the TN5250 print queues, do the following:
1. Make sure the iSeries has sufficient resources to add additional
virtual devices.
2. Establish the IP value (not the dns name) of the iSeries.
3. Set the IP, subnet mask, and default router on the Ethernet
adapter.
4. Use a telnet session or web browser session to configure three
items per dest (logical Ethernet queue) for use as a logical
network connection to the iSeries.
NOTE: The three values (i.e., 192.168.168.34) represent the
iSeries IP in dotted notation and are the entries for the
iSeries.
The newly created TN5250 device/queue (i.e. pallet form, first
chair is alpha, 10 char. max) assumes the new name
“devicedesc.”
5. Determine whether or not to autoconnect (initiate connection
on power up or through Ethernet reset) the TN5250 device/
queue.

301

Chapter 12 Setting Up A TN5250 Connection/Device Via A Telnet Session

NOTE: It is not necessary to set up the devd or queue name on the
iSeries manually or in advance. The configuration and
reset of the Ethernet adapter automatically sets up the
devd or queue name.

Setting Up A TN5250 Connection/Device Via A
Telnet Session
In a telnet session, the command “list tn” shows the configured
values. To set up a TN5250 connection/device via a telnet session,
use the commands “store TN...” and the following:
NOTE: The Ethernet sessions can be configured either by a web
browser or by telnet.
1. Use cmd WRKCTLD *VWS, choice 5, display, enter to list the
number of virtual devices this controller.
2. Use cmd DSPSYSVAL QAUTOVRT. Note the number of autoconfigured virtual devices permitted on the system. This
number must be greater than one.
3. Use cmd DSPYSYVAL QCHRID. This is the system language
(code page) available.
4. Use cmd WRKTCPSTS *IFC to determine the IP address of the
iSeries. This value is used in setting the Ethernet TN5250
devices.

302

User Supplied Values

User Supplied Values
iSeries: For this session, use the IP value from (step 4 above).
Device description: This is the name of the virtual device.
Auto connect:

•
•

If true (enabled) then queue and device automatically attach.
If not true (disabled) the command “tn dest dxprn start/stop”
allows individual sessions to start or stop.

NOTE: Leave other values at their default descriptions.
Example of telnet session commands:
store tn dest d8prn iSeries 192.168.168.34
store tn dest d8prn devicedesc palletform
store tn dest d8prn autoconnect
reset
This example creates a device/queue named “palletform” on the
iSeries with IP 192.168.168.34. The Ethernet adapter initiates the
connection each time it is reset or the printer power is cycled.

Using Telnet Commands for TN5250
Command List
The following commands for TN5250 are available via a Telnet
session with the Ethernet.

Store Commands
store tn dest iSeries
store tn dest port
store tn dest devicedesc
store tn dest msgqnamemsgqlib
store tn dest
WSCSTnameWSCSTlib
store tn dest from default
store tn dest [-]autoconnect
303

Chapter 12 Using Telnet Commands for TN5250

store tn dest copytimeout
See page 329 for store command descriptions.

List Commands
list tn
list stored tn
list default tn
See page 356 for list command descriptions.

TN5250/3270 Auto Connect Command
tn dest start|stop
See page 363 for a detailed description.

Getting Started
Set the following items when first configuring the Ethernet for use
with an iSeries running TN5250:

•

The IP address of the iSeries you are planning to use.
Example: store tn dest d1prn as400 192.75.11.1

•

The device description or queue name you want built on the
iSeries for the printer. This must be unique to the printer.
Example: store tn dest d1prn devicedesc MOCHA3812

•

Enable the printer to automatically connect to the iSeries when
it is first powered up or automatically reconnect if the original
connection is lost.
Example: store tn dest d1prn autoconnect
In most circumstances, all other settings can be left as default.
The printer should be reset (powered off and on again) for the
settings to take effect.
If you do not wish the printer to connect automatically when
powered up then leave the autoconnect disabled and control
the connection manually with the following command:

304

TN5250 Job
Formatting
Getting
Started

Example: tn dest d1prn start
By using the manual method, time is allowed to properly
prepare the iSeries after the printer is powered up but before a
connection is established. This method should only be used
during an initial installation until the printer and the iSeries are
synchronized. The normal method is to have autoconnect
enabled.
The autoconnect feature has a cycle time of approximately one
minute. A little patience may be required when first turning on
the printer before the connection becomes visible on the
iSeries.

TN5250 Job Formatting
Forms width, forms length, CPI and LPI are controlled by the
TN5250 data stream unless the front panel TN5250 Host Override
option is enabled. The CPI is controlled through TN5250 via the
font selection in the Change Device Description (CHGDEVPRT)
command.
A completed screen looks like the example shown in Figure 41.

Change Device Desc (Printer) (CHGDEVPRT)
Type choices, then press Enter.
Device description

DEVD

Online at IPL

ONLINE

Font:

FONT

*NO

Identifier

011

Point Size

*NONE

Form Feed

FORMFEED

*CONT

Separator drawer

SEPDRAWER

*FILE
305

Chapter 12 TN5250 Job Formatting

Separator program

SEPPGM

*NONE

PRTERMSG

*INFO

Library
Printer error message
Library

*LIBL

Host print transform

TRANSFORM

*NO

Manufacturer type and model

MFRTYPMDL

*SAME

Paper source 1

PPRSRC1

*MFRTYPMDL

Paper source 2

PPRSRC2

*MFRTYPMDL

Envelope source

ENVELOPE

*MFRTYPMDL

ASCII code page 899 support

ASCII899

*NO

Image configuration

IMGCFG

*NONE

Character identifier:

CHRID

Graphic character set

*SAME

Code page
User-defined options

USRDFNOPT

*SAME

+ for more values
User-defined object:

USRDTATFM

Object

*NONE

Library
Object type
Data transform program

USRDTATFM

*NONE

USRDRVPGM

*NONE

Library
User-defined driver program
Library

306

Font IdentifierGetting
(FONT)Started
- Help

Text ‘description’
Workstation customizing object

TEXT

‘Device created for
S1045PXM.’

WSCST

*NONE

Library
Figure 41. Example of CHGDEVPRT Command

Font Identifier (FONT) - Help

Specifies the font identifier used by the 3812, 3816, and 5219 printers (including ASCII
printers emulating the 5219 printer), and the IPDS printers.
The Printer Font Table (Font Parameter) in the CRTDEVPRT command lists the valid
font identifiers, the display values, the characters per inch value implied with each font
style, a description of each font style, and whether the font is supported on a particular
printer.
NOTE: Some fonts may be substituted by the printer. Consult the various printer
reference guides of details.
The possible values are:

•

identifier. Specify the 3-, 4-, or 5-digit identifier associated with this printer.

•

point-size. Specify a point size ranging from 0.1 through 999.9. If you do not
specify a point size, the system will set one.

•

*SAME. This value does not change.
The print quality/typeface setting in TN5250 mode is NOT set by
the TN5250 data stream. It is only set through the front panel. This
is true regardless of the front panel TN5250 Host Override setting.

307

Chapter 12 Font Identifier (FONT) - Help

308

ISeries Configuration,
SNMP

Configuring for a *LAN 3812 SNMP Device Description
Support for SNMP is available in the base code for iSeries
OS V4RS and above. *LAN 3812 SNMP device descriptions are
similar to *LAN 3812 PJL device descriptions, and they fully support
the page range function.

Configuration Instructions
To configure a 6500-v, for SNMP system device driver program,
use the CRTDEVPRT command. The following parameters should
be specified:

Device Class (DEVCLS)
This needs to be set to *LAN.

Device Type (TYPE)
This needs to be set to 3812.

Device Model (MODEL)
This needs to be set to 1.

LAN Attachment (LANATTACH)
This needs to be set to *IP.
309

Chapter 13 Configuring for a *LAN 3812 SNMP Device Description

Port number (PORT)
This needs to be set to 9100.

Font (FONT) = 011
This is typically set to 011, which is the default 10 CPI font. A font
ID is required to create the device description. Unless special
requirements in your operation dictate something different, this
should suffice.

Form Feed (FORMFEED)
This should be set to *CONT. Leaving this set at *TYPE or setting it
to the wrong value can cause problems with both drawer selection
and paper size.

Printer Error Message (PRTERRMSG)
This defaults to *INQ, but can be set to *INFO so the printer's
message queue will receive informational messages whenever
possible. If this is set to *INQ and a problem occurs on the printer
(such as out of forms or a paper jam) a message will be sent to the
printer's message queue that must be answered before printing can
continue.

Activation Timer (ACTTMR)
This defaults to 170 (seconds), but can be set to any value from 1
to 2550 seconds (or 42.5 minutes). The activation timer refers to
the amount of time for the system to wait for the LAN-attached
printer device to respond before ending a connection attempt. If the
printer refuses a connection attempt by the host for any reason
before the timer expires, it will be considered not available and an
error message will post.

310

Configuration Instructions

Inactivity Timer (INACTTMR)
This defaults to *ATTACH, but can be set to any value from 1 to 30
(minutes), as well as *SEC15 (15 seconds), *SEC30 (30 seconds)
or *NOMAX (no maximum). This value determines when the print
driver closes the connection to the printer (freeing it up to received
spooled output from another source) once there are no iSeries OS
spooled files left in RDY (ready) status. It is recommended that this
be set to *SEC15 so the iSeries OS will free up the printer 15
seconds after all RDY spooled files have been processed. Setting it
to *NOMAX will cause the iSeries OS to maintain the connection
until the writer ends, so the printer device will not be shared with
other systems.

Host Print Transform (TRANSFORM)
This needs to be set to *YES so the iSeries OS system's Host Print
Transform (HPT) function will convert both SCS and AFPDS
spooled files to the printer's data stream.

Manufacturer Type and Model (MFRTYPMDL)
This indicates the type of ASCII printer being used. This value is
used by HPT to determine what ASCII controls to use when
converting the spooled file from SCS or AFPDS to ASCII. The
recommended values are determined by the ASCII emulation
setting on the printer. The choices are: *IBM6500-vEP for Epson
emulation, *IBM6500-v or *IBM4203 for Proprinter.

Remote Location (RMTLOCNAME)
This should be set to the printer's IP address, host name or DNS
name. If an IP address is used, it should be entered without leading
zeros (for example, use 192.186.10.2 instead of 192.186.010.002).
If an IP address is used, verify that the iSeries OS can reach the
printer by using either the PING or Verify TCP/IP Connection
(VFYTCPCNN) command with that IP address. If a host name or
DNS name is used, verify that the iSeries OS can reach the printer
by using either the PING or Verify TCP/IP Connection
(VFYTCPCNN) command with that host name or DNS name.
311

Chapter 13 Configuring for a *LAN 3812 SNMP Device Description

User-Defined Options (USRDFNOPT)
Specifies, for spooled output only, one or more user-defined
options to be used by user applications, user-specified programs or
the writer. A maximum of four user-defined options can be
specified. This should be set to *IBMSHRCNN whenever
configuring a *LAN 3812 SNMP.
Specifying *IBMSHRCNN will cause the print driver to open and
close the connection to the data port on the printer for every copy of
every spooled file. This allows multiple writers and systems to
access the printer, while the print driver is active and there are files
in ready status. When this option is specified, the printer is capable
of being shared and the value that is specified for the Inactivity
Timer is ignored.

System Driver Program (SYSDRVPGM)
Specifies the name of a system-defined driver program, which
provides the capability to send the iSeries OS printer output to a
printer attached over a TCP/IP network. This should be set to
*IBMSNMPDRV whenever configuring a *LAN 3812 SNMP device
description.

Workstation Customizing Object (WSCST)
This is typically set to *NONE, but can be used to specify a
modified workstation customer object.
All other parameters should be specified like any other printer.

312

Configuration Instructions

Configuration Example
To configure a *LAN 3812 SNMP device description type
CRTDEVPRT and press the F4 (Prompt) key. The following is an
example of using the Create Device Printer (CRTDEVPRT)
command to create a *LAN 3812 SNMP device description:
CRTDEVPRT DEVD(SNMP6500-v) DEVCLS(*LAN) TYPE(3812)
MODEL(1) LANATTACH(*IP) PORT(9001) FONT(011)
FORMFEED(*CONT) PARITY(*NONE)
STOPBITS(1)TRANSFORM(*YES)MFRTYPMDL
(*IBM6500-v)RMTLOCNAME('9.5.208.46')
USRDFNOPT(*IBMSHRCNN) USRDRVPGM(*NONE)
SYSDRVPGM(*IBMSNMPDRV)
Create Device Desc (Printer) (CRTDEVPRT)
Type choices, then press Enter.

Create Device Desc (Printer) (CRTDEVPRT)
Device description

P6500

Name

Device class

*LAN

*LCL, *RMT, *VRT, *SNPT, *LAN

Device type

*IPDS

3287, 3812, 4019, 4201...

Device model

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 10, 13, 301...

LAN attachment

*IP

*LEXLINK, *IP, *USRDFN

Port number

5001

0-65535

Online at IPL

*YES

*YES, *NO

Identifier

011

3, 5, 11, 12, 13, 18, 19...

Point size

*NONE

000.1-999.9, *NONE

Form feed

*CONT

*TYPE, *CONT, *CONT2, *CUT...

Separator drawer

*FILE

1-255, *FILE

Separator program

*NONE

Name, *NONE

Font:

313

Chapter 13 Configuring for a *LAN 3812 SNMP Device Description

Library

Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Printer error message

*INQ

*INQ, *INFO

Message queue

*CTLD

Name, *CTLD, *SYSOPR,
QSYSOPR

Library

Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Activation timer

170

1-2550, *NOMAX

Image configuration

*NONE

*NONE, *IMGA01, *IMGA02...

Maximum pending requests

1-31

Print while converting

*YES

*NO, *YES

Print request timer

*NOMAX

1-3600, *NOMAX

Form definition

F1C10110

Name

*LIBL

Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Library
Remote location:
Name or address
User-defined options

‘9.5.208.46
*NONE

Character value, *NONE

*NONE

Name, *NONE

+ for more values
User-defined object:
Object
Library

Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Object type
Data transform program

*DTAARA, *DTAQ, *FILE...
*NONE

Library

Name, *NONE
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Secure connection

*NO

*NO, *YES

Validation list

*NONE

Name, *NONE

Library
314

Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Varying on the Printer

Publishing information:
Support duplex

*UNKNOWN

*UNKNOWN, *SIMPLEX, *DUPLEX

Support color

*UNKNOWN

Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB

Pages per minute black

*UNKNOWN

1-32767, *UNKNOWN

Pages per minute color

*UNKNOWN

1-32767, *UNKNOWN

Location

*BLANK

Data streams
supported

*UNKNOWN

*UNKNOWN, *PCL, *PS, *PDF...

+ for more values
Text ‘description’

*BLANK

Additional Parameters
Remote network identifier

*NETATR

Name, *NETATR, *NONE

Workstation customizing
object

*NONE

Name, *NONE

Library
Authority

Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
*ALL

Name, *LIBCRTAUT, *CHANGE...

Varying on the Printer
Once you have created the printer device description, you need to
vary on the printer device description using either the Vary
Configuration (VRYCFG) command or Work with Configuration
Status (WRKCFGSTS) command. Once the device has been
varied on, you must start the printer writer using either
(STRPRTWTR) or Work with Writers (WRKWTR) command.

315

Chapter 13 Configuring for a *LAN 3812 SNMP Device Description

Problem Areas for Consideration
If you then place a spooled file in the printer's output queue and it
goes to MSGW (message wait) status with MSGCPA3394 “Load
form type '&4' device &5 writer &1. (G B I H R C)” then chances are
good that the spooled file will print once you answer this message
with a “G.”
However, if the spooled file stays in RDY (ready) status or goes to
PND (pending) status without printing or if the WTR ends you can
look in the Message queue you specified in the devd, the SYSOPR
message queue or the writer job log for messages that may
indicate why the spooled file is not printing or why the WTR ended.
To look in the message queue you specified in the devd or the
SYSOPR message queue, simply Type, DSPMSG, then press F4 (to
Prompt the cmd) and enter either your queue name/library or
*SYSOPR. You should see the a message indicating that the job
was submitted and then above that the failure. You may press F1
on that message to obtain the second level text. If you are referred
to the WTR job log for additional information, refer to the following
instructions.
To look at the writer job, do the following:
NOTE: Check to see if the writer is still active.
1. On the iSeries OS command line, type the following:
WRKJOB JOB(writer-name) The writer name is typically the
same name given to the device description. Press the Enter
key. This brings you to the Select Job panel or the Work with
Job panel. If you are at the Select Job panel, the most current
writer job is at the top of the list. Place a 1 in the Option field to
the left of the most recent WTR job and press the Enter key.
If the writer has ended, take menu option 4 (Work with spooled
files) on the Work with Job panel. From the Work with Job
Spooled Files panel, select Option 5 (Display) to display the
QPJOBLOG spooled file or Option 2 (Change) to requeue the
spooled file to a different output queue so it can be printed and
investigated. Make any suggested corrections, restart the
writer, and re-submit the job.
316

Additional Information

If the writer is still active, select menu option 10 (Display job
log, if active or on job queue) on the Work with Job panel.
Press the F10 key and the Page Up and Page Down keys to
view the messages in the writer job log.

Additional Information
The success of *LAN 3812 SNMP device descriptions is dependent
on the configuration settings in the iSeries OS as well as on the
printer and print server hardware. For more information about
configuring the time-out values on the printer and print server
hardware and common error messages that you can receive when
printing through a *LAN 3812 SNMP device description, please
refer to the following document:
19935220 Configuration Settings and Error Messages for *LAN
3812 SNMP Device Descriptions located on the iSeries support line
Knowledge base Web site.

317

Chapter 13 Configuring for a *LAN 3812 SNMP Device Description

318

Monitoring Printers

Implementing Printer Management
Printer management includes the following tasks:

•
•
•

Monitoring the status of network printers
Responding to alarms
Gathering statistics on printer operations

The three elements of network printer monitoring and management
are:

•
•
•
•

Agent/manager model
The management information database (MIB)
SNMP, the protocol used to get management information
Printer management utility (PMU)

Agent/Manager Model
The elements of a monitoring system, MIB and SNMP, are
implemented in an agent/manager model:

•

The MANAGER is a console, workstation, or server on working
hubs or routers which has a global knowledge of Ethernet
Interfaces and printers.

•

AGENTS are utilities that reside on devices, such as a Ethernet
Interface, that respond through SNMP to management
requests for information. The information is stored in an MIB.

319

Chapter 14 Implementing Printer Management

MIB
An MIB contains information a device makes available through
SNMP. The MIB is a management information base that describes
information about actual objects to be managed and controlled.

Standards Of Network Printer MIBs
The Printer MIB is based on the following standards:

•
•
•
•

System and Interfaces Group MIB (RFC 1213 of March 1991)
Host Resource MIB (RFC 1514 of September 1993)
Printer MIB (RFC 1759 of March 1995)
Ethernet contains the Standard Printer MIB per RFC 1759,
available from www.ietf.org.

Components Of The Printer MIB
The printer MIB gives the network manager access to most of the
information that is normally accessible through the Ethernet
Interface command set for configuring the server with SNMP. Some
objects identified by this MIB are not applicable to the Ethernet
Interface.
The printer MIB is composed of the following sections:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

320

General
Cover
Localization
Input
Output
Marker
Media Path
Channel

MIB

•
•
•

Interpreter
Console
Alert

Information Provided By The MIB
The printer MIB contains the following types of information about
network printers:
Descriptions. Printer configuration, location, and contact.
Status. Current operating status of printers.
Alerts. Reportable events from printers.

General Information About MIBs
For further information on SNMP and MIB, refer to the following:

•

RFC 1155 — Structure and Identification of Management
Information for TCP/IP-based Internets (SMI)

•

RFC 1156 — Management Information Base for Management
of TCP/IP Internets (MIB)

•
•

RFC 1157 — A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
The Simple Book: An Introduction to Management of
TCP/IP-based Internets

Getting The Latest MIB Information
To obtain the latest copy of these and other RFCs, FTP the files
from one of the following two sources:
Internet:
ftp://ftp.isi.edu/internet-drafts
World Wide Web:
http://www.ietf.cnri.reston.va.us/lid-abstracts.html

321

Chapter 14 Monitoring Tools

SNMP
SNMP is the protocol used to communicate between manager and
agent. Managers request information, usually through automated
polling at specified intervals, and agents respond. Though used
primarily on TCP/IP networks, SNMP can be implemented on other
protocols, for example, IPX.
SNMP is a standard by which a network manager can get statistics
and configuration information from the Ethernet Interfaces and
other devices on the network. This is done through a Network
Management Station (NMS) such as NetView®.

Monitoring Tools
Many tools can be used to monitor printers with SNMP agents. One
of these tools is NetView. There are also other MIB browsers which
are not described here.

Monitoring With AIX NetView/6000
The AIX NetView/6000 program can manage any IP-addressable
device with an SNMP agent.
NetView/6000 can be used to set a network topology, monitor a
network, diagnose problems, and measure network performance.
Through its MIB Browser, information about the resources affecting
an event (such as an alarm) can be obtained.

322

Setting The SNMP Community Name

Setting The SNMP Community Name
The default SNMP read-only community name is “public” and
cannot be changed.
Change the SNMP R/W community name with the command:
set user passwd snmp com_name
save
where com_name is the new SNMP R/W community name.
The default is no R/W community name.
NOTE: Changing SNMP community names or access rights may
hinder or disable applications that are monitoring your
printers.

The Printer Management Utility Software (PMU)
The IBM printer manager utility is a versatile and dynamic program.
It allows you to organize all of the printers in your office remotely in
a single database, download software and printer settings from a
host computer with a single mouse click, and use a virtual
operator's panel to configure printers in the same room or on the
other side of the world. Refer to IBM Printer Management Utility
User’s Manual for more details on this tool.

323

Chapter 14 Monitoring Tools

324

IBM Network Printer
Manager

Overview
IBM Network Printer Manager (NPM) lets network administrators
monitor, control, and configure IBM 6500-v printers in various
environments. NPM works with the IBM 6500-v, the network printer
family, including IBM InfoPrint 20 and 32 (except for NPM for OS/2),
and IBM Network Printers 12, 17, and 24. For the Windows and IP
and Web versions, you can also use NPM with other
manufacturer’s network printers that comply with RFC 1759, such
as the Hewlett-Packard** LaserJet** 5si and the Lexmark**
Optra** N.
NOTE: IBM 6500-v is supported only in the “web” and NT versions,
not OS/2.
Using NPM, administrators can:

•
•

View the status of each printer, such as its alarm conditions

•

View and change printer network properties, such as the
NetBIOS printer network workgroup name

•

Add new network services to printers so you can customize the
environment, such as creating high- and low-priority print
services.

View and change printer properties, such as the default input
tray

For detailed information on how to use NPM, please refer to NPM
online help.
325

Chapter 15

IBM Network Printer Manager

You can configure NPM using either the TCP/IP or NetBIOS
network protocols, and use TCP/IP to monitor the printers.
NPM is available on the World Wide Web. To obtain the latest
version of NPM:
1. Access the IBM Printing Systems Home Page at:

http://www.printers.ibm.com
2. Navigate to IBM Network Printer Manager.
3. Follow the instructions to download NPM. Installation
instructions are in the README file.
NOTE: NPM for Windows NT requires that a specific SNMP R/W
community name be defined in the printer before it can be
successfully discovered. The SNMP R/W community name
must be set to ibmpsc_admin with the following telnet
commands:

set user passwd snmp ibmpsc_admin
save

326

Commands

Command Shell Overview
The Ethernet Interface comes with an in-depth command shell
called npsh. It allows you to manipulate objects like destinations,
I/O ports, and models and provides monitoring and troubleshooting
capabilities.

npsh Access Methods
This command shell can be accessed by:

•
•
•

built in HTML forms
a Telnet session from a TCP/IP host to the Ethernet Interface
a single remote shell command (e.g., rsh, rcmd, remsh) from
a TCP/IP host

Main npsh Command Prefixes
All configurable commands either start with store or set, and
view commands start with list.
NOTE: If the store prefix is used, the Ethernet Interface must be
repowered to make the changes take effect. Since store
affects flash memory settings only, the print server must
reset and read the new settings now in flash memory.

327

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

NOTE: If the set prefix is used, a save command must be
executed as well so that the new settings are retained after
power cycles. Since set only affects the settings in
memory, they will be lost after a power cycle unless they
are saved to flash memory.

Getting Command Help
The Ethernet Interface command shell provides several online help
tools, including:

“?” Command
Typing “?” when logged in to the command shell will produce a full
list of all available commands.

Command Prefixes
Typing in the first portion of a command will produce an error
message showing the correct syntax. For example, typing in store
tcpip will produce a list of all commands that start with this prefix.

Complete Command List
This section outlines the entire Ethernet Interface command set
including the command syntax, a description, and in most cases, an
example for each command listed.
NOTE: If you see the word ifnum in any npsh commands, you
should substitute a 1 or 2 unless told otherwise. The 1
represents the one network interface (e.g., Ethernet)
supported. The 2 represents the wireless network interface
if it exists in the system.

328

Store Commands

Store Commands
These commands change the settings stored in flash memory and
do not affect the current or working settings in memory. A power
cycle is needed before the stored settings become current.
store ifc ifnum utp [-]li [-]rx
example: store ifc 1 utp li
Modify the physical UTP interface properties where li enables
link integrity and rx enables the increased receive threshold.
store ifc from default
Set all UTP settings back to factory defaults.
store ifc from current
Store all current UTP settings to flash memory so they are
retained after a power cycle. This ensures all current settings
match what is stored in flash memory.
store ifc default |<0> (0 for no default)
Store the specified interface as the default interface. The other
interface is no longer active after power cycle. The 0 allows for
both interfaces to be active.
store ifc mode auto|10half|10full|100half|
100full
Store the specified interface mode as automatic, 10mbps half
duplex, 10mbps full duplex, 100mbps half duplex, 100mbps full
duplex. See page 47.

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Defines the authentication scheme:
store ifc wlan auth
(eg. openauth, shared, leap, kerb)
Open system authentication allows all devices that have the
authentication algorithm number for open system to
authenticate. Shared key authentication involves a four step
process using secure or encrypted text by means of WEP.
Option leap is to enable/disable LEAP operation. Option kerb is
for Kerberos.

329

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Define a auth-user-name to be used in the LEAP operation:

WIRELESS

Define a auth-password to be used in the LEAP operation:

store ifc wlan user
This auth-user-name needs to match the user name entered in
the LEAP Access Point.

store ifc wlan pass
This auth-password needs to match the password entered in
the LEAP Access Point.

WIRELESS

Set the network name (SSID):
store ifc wlan ssid
is the interface number for the WLAN interface.
is a 1 to 32 ASCII character string.

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Set network mode:
store ifc wlan mode adhoc|pseudo|managed

is the interface number for the WLAN device.
is the type of network operation mode: “adhoc,”
“pseudo” or “managed.” “pseudo” stands for pseudo IBSS
(Proprietary adhoc).

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Set transfer rate (speed):

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Set channel number:

330

store ifc wlan speed auto|<1 2 5 11>

is the interface number for the WLAN device.
<1 2 5 11> are the speeds being selected. They are entered as
a list of integers, separated by 'space' characters. The following
values are supported: 1 for 1Mbps, 2 for 2Mbps, 5 for 5.5Mbps,
and 11 for 11Mbps. Using the word “auto” instead of any
number will set the card to use automatic negotiation.

store ifc wlan channel default <1-15>

is the interface number for the WLAN device.
<1-15> selects the RF channel number (1 to 15) used in ad-hoc
mode. The word “default” will inform the device driver to use the
card's factory set default channel.

Store Commands

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Set antenna type:
store ifc wlan antenna diverse|primary|aux

is the interface number for the WLAN device.
is the type of antenna to be used: “primary,”
“aux” (auxiliary or external) and “diverse”. “diverse” allows the
WLAN card to decide on the optimal antenna during operation.

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Set preamble length:
store ifc wlan preamble default|long|short

is the interface number for the WLAN device.
is the type of preamble length required. It can be
“long,” “short,” or “default.” “default” allows the card to use its
own factory default.

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Set power management mode:

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Set transmit power:

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Set options:

store ifc wlan pmm on|off

is the interface number for the WLAN device.
The string “off” disables power-save mode. The string “on”
enables power-save mode with a default sleep-time of 100ms.

store ifc wlan txpwr <0-100>

is the interface number for the WLAN device.
<0-100> the power level as a percentage of full power.

store ifc wlan opts [[-]openauth][[-]intnl]

is the interface number for the WLAN device.
An option is enabled by including it in the list and disabled by
preceding it with a '-' character in the list. Supported option is
“intnl,” for international mode and “openauth” for open
authentication.

331

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Set the default key for WLAN encryption:

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Set the key to a given value:

store ifc wlan defkey disable|<1-4>

is the interface number for the WLAN device.
<1-4> is the number identifying one of the four keys (1-4). A
value of zero or the word “disable” disables encryption.

store ifc wlan key |
<${]>

is the interface number for the WLAN interface.
is the number identifying one of the four keys (1-4).
is the encryption key value for . The
value must consist of 5 or 13 double- or quad-digit HEX
numbers, separated by colon (':') or dash ('-') characters for
readability (e.g. D1C2-B3A4-9586-7768-594A-3B2C-1D).
Alpha characters are NOT case sensitive. All zero disables
encryption for . If '$' is the first character the
remainder of the argument is treated as a literal string with all
alpha-numeric characters allowed except spaces). Key length
is inferred from the length of key-value so leading zeroes of
longer keys must be entered (not blanked).

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Enables or disables Kerberos:
store kerberos opts [-]auth
Sets the maximum allowable amount of clock skew in seconds
or minutes that Kerberos authentication will tolerate before
assuming that a Kerberos message is invalid:
store kerberos config clockskew
The time units cannot be mixed and there must at least be one
space between the value and the time unit
(s or m). The default is 300 seconds, (i.e. five minutes). The
minimum allowable value is 60 seconds (i.e. 1 minute). The
maximum allowable value is 900 seconds (i.e. 15 minutes).

332

Store Commands

NOTE: The Microsoft step-by-step Guide to Kerberos 5 (krb5 1.0)
Interoperability recommends that your system clock be
sychronized within two minutes to the KDC system’s clock.
Otherwise, clock skew errors will cause Kerberos
authentication to fail. If this is the case, the clock skew
default may need to scale down to two minutes.

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Sets the maximum allowable ticket lifetime in seconds, minutes,
hours, or days:
store kerberos config tktlife
is between 300 seconds and 259200 seconds (3
days). The time units cannot be mixed and there must be at
least one space between the value and the time
units (s, m, h, or d). Default value is 43200 seconds.

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Sets the maximum allowable renewable lifetime in seconds,
minutes, hours, or days:
store kerberos config renewlife

is 0 (i.e. no limit) or between 300 seconds
and 604800 seconds (7 days). The time units cannot be mixed
and there must be at least one space between the
value and the time unit (s, m, h, or d).
Default value is 0.

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Configures the KDC port:

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Configures the KDC name portion of the service principal:

store kerberos config kport
is the 2-byte UPD/TCP port used for Kerberos
communication. Default is 88.

store kerberos config kname
has a maximum of 127 characters excluding
“:” and “/”. Default is krbtgt.

333

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Configures the KDC realm portion:

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

Sets the Kerberos password that must match the Windows 2000
user password for the Print Server:

store kerberos config krealm
is usually set to the uppercase name of the
Windows 2000 KDC to which the Access Point is configured.
has 0 to 127 characters excluding “:” and “/”.
Default is localrealm.

store kerberos password
is either a string without any space and
tab, or a double quoted string with a maximum of 40 alphanumeric characters or symbols. The administrator should
choose at least 9 alphanumeric characters with a combination
of upper and lower case characters and symbols. In the
Windows environment, this is the Windows 2000 user
password for the Print Server and they must be exactly the
same.
store pping opts [-]enable
Example: store pping opts enable
Store the state of periodic ping flag. If the periodic ping flag is
enable the NIC periodic ping client will attempt to ping its
default gateway on its active NIC interfaces.
Default: disabled
store pping packet
Example: store pping packet 5
Store the value of the packet. It is the number of ICMP Echo
Request packets that will be sent by the periodic ping client on
each period.
store pping period
Example: store pping period 5
Store the value of the period. is the amount of time
from 1 to 5 minutes defines the periodic ping sequence will be
repeated.
Default: 5

334

Store Commands

store pping from default
Example: store pping from default
Store all the periodic ping default setting to flash memory so
taht they are retained after power up.
store pserver from default
Set all general print server settings back to factory defaults.
store pserver from current
Store all current general print server settings to flash memory
so they are retained after a power cycle. This ensures all
current settings match what is stored in flash memory.
store pserver name
Example: store pserver name NIC1234
Command to change the print server name.
store pserver opts [[-]jobsecurity] [jobtimeout
seconds]
Example: store pserver opts jobsecurity jobtimeout 5
If jobsecurity is disabled, any user can cancel queued jobs
on the Ethernet including guest users. If jobtimeout is set to
some value other than 0, the Ethernet will only wait this amount
of seconds when getting printer feedback. This is only used if
you have a logpath port and type set on a particular destination.
store pserver opts [[-]jobsecurity]
[jobtimeout ] [jobcontrol[off|standard|
enhanced]]
Example: store pserver opts [-]jobcontrol
If jobcontrol is disabled then the need for start of job / end of
job flow control with the printer is determined by the printer. Job
flow control is used for jobs requiring backchannel responses
such as IPDS, TN and PJL jobs only. This is available as a
performance enhancement for LPR, TCP socket printing etc.
The job flow control has no affect on IPDS, TN, and PJL jobs.
These options perform their own control. When jobcontrol is
enabled all jobs will be supported with job flow control.
NOTE: When jobcontrol is disabled, dynamic config loading on a
model change is also disabled.

335

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

•

off. no job control; no SOJ/EOJ commands. The printer prints
faster in off mode.

•

standard. (the default) traditional job control with immediate
acknowledgements of SOJ/EOJ commands.

•

enhanced. job control with EOJ acknowledgements held off by
the printer until job is fully printed. The printer prints slower in
enhanced mode.

To monitor the printer, use the telnet command “lpstat.” The normal
status reported on the first line of the lpstat response is the status of
the queue (LPQ) within the Ethernet. The status reported does not
reflect the state of the print job once it has been sent from the
Ethernet to the printer.
The new line at the bottom of the lpstate response labeled “printer
job:” can report one of two status values:
a. In Progress. A job in the printer is not yet finished.
b. Done. There are no jobs in the printer. All previous jobs are
finished.
store pserver lpd [-]dest1default
Example: store pserver lpd dest1default
If dest1default is disabled and upon verification, the printer
name supplied by the LPR protocol and the destination name
does not match, then an error message is returned and the
service is refused. If dest1default is enabled and upon
verification, the printer name supplied by the LPR protocol and
the destination name does not match, then the job is
automatically routed to the first destination and the service is
accepted.
Default: enabled
store pserver tcpsocket port
Example: store pserver tcpsocket 4000 port 5000
Change a pre-defined TCP port number on the
Ethernet Interface to a new TCP port number .
The default number is 9100 for prn.

336

Store Commands

store pserver tcpsocket dest
Example: store pserver tcpsocket 5000 dest d1prn
Assign a pre-defined TCP port number to a
particular destination on the Ethernet Interface.
Therefore, if you are using a print method that sends jobs
directly to a TCP port number, you still have the option to
process the job data through this destination setting.
store pserver tcpsocket add dest
Example: store pserver tcpsocket add 9101 dest d2prn
Maps the port number to a destination.
store pserver tcpsocket del dest
Example: store pserver tcpsocket del 9101 dest d2prn
Deletes a mapped port number destination already defined by
listed commands.

ADAPTER,
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

store pserver novell passwd []
Example: store pserver novell passwd ibm

ADAPTER,
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

store pserver novell fserver add|del
Example: store pserver novell fserver add fs1

ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

store pserver novell frametype [ethernet2|802.2|802.3|
802.2 snap|autosense]

Store the password for the Ethernet Interface to
use when logging in to a Novell file server. This password
would have to match one set on the file server.

Add or remove a server entry on the Ethernet Interface for the
Novell file server it will be servicing.

Sets the frame type for the Novell protocol.
store pserver novell mode [auto|bindery|nds]
Example: store pserver novell mode [auto|bindery|nds]
Stores the mode for the unit to operate in either autosense,
Bindery, or NDS.
store pserver novell context []
Example: store pserver novell context context
Stores the print server object in any context within the NDS tree
choosen.
337

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

store pserver smb workgrp
Example: store pserver smb workgrp eng
Define a different Windows workgroup as defined by
for the Ethernet Interface to be visible within
(should be 14 characters or less). By default, the print server
only comes up within the group called “WORKGROUP.”
store pserver tree []
Example: store pserver novell tree tree
Stores the print server object in a specified tree.

ADAPTER,
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

store rprinter add
Example: store rprinter add pserver1 0 d1prn

ADAPTER,
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

store rprinter del
Example: store rprinter add pserver1 0 d1prn

Add the RPRINTER settings on the Ethernet Interface for a
Novell environment. must be the name of an
existing PSERVER.NLM on your Novell file server.
is the printer number within this
PSERVER.NLM. is the queue on the Ethernet
Interface where the print jobs will be sent.

Delete the RPRINTER settings on the Ethernet Interface for a
Novell environment. must be the name of an
existing PSERVER.NLM on your Novell file server.
is the printer number within this
PSERVER.NLM. is the queue on the Ethernet
Interface where the print jobs will be sent.
store tcpip addr
Example: store tcpip 1 addr 192.75.11.9
Store the IP address for the Ethernet Interface.
store tcpip frametype [[-]ethernet2]
[[-]802.2snap]
Example: store tcpip 1 frametype ethernet2 802.2snap
Control which frame type(s) is supported with the TCP/IP
protocol. By default, both Ethernet2 and 802.2snap are
enabled, but normal TCP/IP communications rely on Ethernet
2. This setting has no affect on other supported network
protocols (e.g., Novell).

338

Store Commands

store tcpip mask
Example: store tcpip 1 mask 255.255.255.0
Store the subnet mask for the Ethernet Interface.
store tcpip opts [[-]rarp] [[-]bootp] [[-]dhcp]
[[-]persistdhcp][[-]dns]
Example: store tcpip 1 opts -rarp -bootp -dhcp
Enable or disable the automatic RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, DNS,
persistent DHCP requests for IP addresses upon bootup. If you
are storing the Ethernet Interface TCP/IP network settings
within the device, you will not need to rely on RARP, BOOTP,
DHCP, or DNS for new settings.
store tcpip route add [host|net] [/mask]
[]
Example: store tcpip route add net 192.75.12.0 1
Add a static route to a particular TCP/IP host or subnet
specified by so the Ethernet Interface knows how
to communicate with it. Normally one entry for a default router/
gateway is all that is needed for communications between
different subnets. Please see the next command for details.
store tcpip route del [host|net]
Example: store tcpip route add net 192.75.12.0 1
Delete a static route to a particular TCP/IP host or subnet
specified by so the Ethernet Interface knows how
to communicate with it. Normally one entry for a default router/
gateway is all that is needed for communications between
different subnets. Please see the next command for details.
store tcpip route add|del default [1|2]
[]
Example: store tcpip route add default1 192.75.11.1 1
Store a default router/gateway defined by
so the Ethernet Interface knows where to direct
packets destined for another subnet. It is easier to store one
default entry rather than an entry per remote host or network as
in the previous command.

339

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

store tcpip del default [1|2]
Example: store tcpip route del default1 192.75.11.1 1
Delete a default router/gateway defined by router IP Address
( ) so the NIC knows where to direct packets
destined for another subnet.
store tcpip tcp rxwin
Example: store tcpip tcp rxwin 2
Determine the receive window size for the Ethernet Interface.
Usually the value ranges from 2 to 8, with the
lower number allowing for more simultaneous TCP connections
with the print server.
store tcpip tcp opts [-]keepalive [-]disbufmgmt
[-]zeroIArp [-]keepalivedata
Example: store tcpip tcp opts keepalive -disbufmgmt
Control whether the Ethernet Interface maintains a connection
with a host when data cannot be accepted into its buffer.
Normally the keepalive feature is enabled so when the
printer cannot accept data, the print job connection is
maintained and continued once the situation clears. The
keepalivedata option controls whether the keepalive packet
contains a data byte for hosts that require it. If disbufmgmt is
disabled (i.e., “-”), the Ethernet Interface will not buffer any data
when there is a blocked situation with the printer. Normally, it is
best to have both keepalive and disbufmgmt enabled.
Example: store tcpip tcp opts zeroIPArp
If zeroIPArp is disabled then a Ethernet Interface with an IP
address of 0.0.0.0 will not allow IP access until the IP address
is configured. If zeroIPArp is enabled on an Ethernet Interface
with an IP address of 0.0.0.0 then any attempted access with a
valid IP address is assumed for this Ethernet Interface and an
Arp lookup is performed.
Default: enabled

340

Store Commands

store tcpip tcp access [root] add|del
[]
Example: store tcpip tcp access add 192.75.11.25
Add or remove an entry from the Ethernet Interface TCP
access list defined by . If the list has an entry, only
this host can print to and remotely interact with the print server.
store tcpip from default|current
Example: store tcpip from default
Set all TCP/IP network settings back to factory defaults.
Example: store tcpip from current
Store all current TCP/IP network settings to flash memory so
they are retained after a power cycle. This ensures all current
settings match what is stored in flash memory.
store tn dest connect
Example: store tn dest d1prn connect MYRESNM
Store the resource name for the host session. The resource
name must be the same as the name of the printer device
created on the host for the session.
Default: Unconfigured (empty) resource name
store tn dest mode 5250|3270
Example: store tn dest d1prn mode 3270
Store the TN protocol mode.
Default: 5250
store tn dest host
Example: store tn dest d1prn host 192.75.11.1
Store the IP address of the TN5250/3270 host
Default: Unconfigured (empty) IP address
store tn dest port
Example: store tn dest d1prn port 27
Store the UDP port number of the TN server.
Default: 23

341

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

store tn dest devicedesc
Example: store tn dest d1prn devicedesc MOCHA3812
Store the name of the printer device. The description entered
will be the name of the printer device created on the iSeries
host for the current session.
Default: Unconfigured (empty) description.
store tn dest msgqname
Example: store tn dest d1prn msqqname QSYSOPR
Store the queue name to which system messages will be
logged.
Default: QSYSOPR
store tn dest msgqlib
Example: store tn dest d1prn msgqlib *LIBL
Store the queue library to which system messages will be
logged.
Default: *LIBL
store tn dest WSCSTname
Example: store tn dest d1prn WSCSTname *NONE
Store the queue name to which system messages will be
logged.
Default: *NONE
store tn dest WSCSTlib
Example: store tn dest d1prn WSCSTlib *LIBL
Store the queue library to which system messages will be
logged.
Default: *LIBL

342

Store Commands

store tn dest [-]autoconnect
Example: store tn dest d1prn autoconnect
Store the state of the autoconnect flag. If the autoconnect flag
is enabled the Ethernet Interface TN client will attempt a
connection and binding with the specified TN host
automatically on power-up. This connection sequence will be
repeated every 60 seconds until successful or the autoconnect
flag is disabled.
See “tn dest destination start | stop” command.
Default: disabled
store tn dest copytimeout
Example: store tn dest d1prn copytimeout 1000
Store the value of the copytimeout. When consecutive
TN5250/3270 jobs are sent to the Ethernet, they are treated
differently depending how soon they arrive. In an attempt to
provide a perception of collation when multiple copies are sent
from one host, if the time between jobs is less than the
copytimeout value then they are treated as copies and the job
is given precedence over other host documents. This keeps
documents, which are sent in rapid succession together as if
they were copies of the same document. A higher value
improves the likelihood of collation but impacts performance.
Default: 500
store tn from default|current
Example: store tn from default
Store all tn default settings to flash memory so that they are
retained after power up.

343

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

Set Commands
These settings alter the current or working settings in memory only.
Therefore, they will be lost if the Ethernet Interface is power cycled.
To ensure this does not happen, issue a save command so the
current settings get written to flash memory.
set dest alternate []
Example: set dest d1prn alternate d4prn
Sets an alternate destination for a queue other than itself.
set dest backchannel [prn]
Example: set dest d1prn backchannel prn
Establish a return path for printer feedback for a given
destination . The Ethernet Interface I/O port is
bi-directional, however, you will most likely use the same I/O
port to which the destination is currently sending jobs.
set dest logpath
Example: set dest d1prn logpath l4
Associate a logpath with a destination. Jobs sent to the named
destination are logged according to the settings defined
in the named logpath.
set dest model
Example: set dest d1prn model m4
Associate a model with a destination. Jobs sent to the named
destination are processed according to the options
defined in the named model.
set dest name
Example: set dest d1prn name line matrix
Change the current name of the destination to a new
name as indicated by . must be
nine characters or less or it will be truncated. These names are
case sensitive.

344

Set Commands

set dest service [[-]socket][[-]lpd]
[[-]lpsched] [[-]rprinter] [[-]pserver] [[-]netbios]
[[-]ftpd] [[-]tn]
Example: set dest d1prn service -netbios
Set the destination to handle only certain print services.
To add a service, specify the service name. To disable a
service, use “-” before the name. The available services are:

Parameter
socket

Direct socket printing via TCP/IP.

lpd

LPR printing with TCP/IP, including LPR clients
on any platform.

lpsched

LP or System V printing with TCP/IP.

ADAPTER, rprinter
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

Novell RPRINTER support.

ADAPTER, pserver
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

Novell PSERVER support.

netbios

Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups
printing.

ftpd

Printing using the File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
via TCP/IP.

Printing using the TN5250/3270 session.

set dest from default
Set all destination settings back to factory defaults.
set dest from stored
Set all current destination settings to the values stored in flash
memory.

345

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

set logpath name
Example: set logpath l1 name pagecount
Change the current name of the logpath to a new
name as indicated by . These names are case
sensitive.
set logpath type [[-]job] [[-]user]
[[-]cksum] [[-]printer] [[-]ioport]
Example: set logpath l2 type job user printer pgcnt
Establish the type of printer and print job logging to be done
within this logpath. The options are:
job

Job ID, username, etc.

user

User ID along with three messages per job
about start and finish.

cksum

16-bit checksum value to confirm integrity of
data printed.

printer

For special printer feedback.

ioport

Printer error messages determined through
the parallel port pins.

set logpath port |email|syslog
Example: set logpath l3 port 2000
Determine where the log information should be sent for a print
job or attached printer. The choices are:
TCP-port

TCP port number ranging from 1024 to
65000.

Particular user's email address. This address
is set using the set sysinfo email
emailname@IPaddress or
emailname@domain.com command.

syslog

A central TCP/IP host running the SYSLOG
daemon. This host is set using the set
sysinfo syslog IPaddress command.

set logpath from default
Set all logpath settings back to factory defaults.

346

Set Commands

set logpath from stored
Set all current logpath settings to the values stored in flash
memory.
set model name
Example: set model m1 name landscape
Change the current name of the model to a new name
as indicated by . These names are case
sensitive.
set model type raw
Example: set model m2 type raw
Set the model type to raw so that it does not process the data
passing through it in any way.
set model banner [text] [after]
Example: set model m2 banner text
Determine whether a banner page should be added for print
jobs passing through the model mapped destination/
queue. By default, banner pages are added to the front of the
job. If after is set, the banner page will come at the end.
set model stty [[-]onlcr] [[-]descramble]
[xtab <1-6>|none]
Example: set model m3 stty onlcr
Control extra job processing done by the model. The
processing options are:
onlcr

Carriage return insertion for Unix text jobs.
Adds carriage returns to text jobs with solitary
linefeeds. This will prevent stair-stepped
output or output running off the right side of
the page.

descramble

Automatic descrambling of print jobs passing
through which have been scrambled using
proprietary Unix scramble utility,
npscramble.

xtab

Tab expansion from 1 to 16 spaces.

347

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

set model header []
Example: set model m1 header 0x20
Set a header string to be sent to the printer at the start of any
print jobs passing through this model . The header
can consist of up to nine elements. An example
element is a hexadecimal code (e.g., 0x04) or a pre-defined
variable on the print server (e.g., $FF for a formfeed). Use
list var to see all available variables. To erase the header,
send the command with no headerstring value; for example ‘set
model m1 header’.
set model trailer []
Example: set model m7 trailer $FF
Set a trailer string to be sent to the printer at the start of any
print jobs passing through this model . The trailerstring
can consist of up to nine elements. An example
element is a hexadecimal code (e.g., 0x04) or a pre-defined
variable on the print server (e.g., $FF for a formfeed). Use
list var to see all available variables. To erase the trailer,
send the command with no trailerstring value; for example ‘set
model m1 trailer’.
set model config [config_num]
Set a printer configuration number [config_num] to be loaded
prior to printing a job on the specified model. If the command is
sent with config_num set to 0, the factory configuration is
loaded before the job prints. If config_num is in the range 1
through 8, the corresponding configuration number is loaded
before the job prints. To return to the default state where no
configuration is loaded, send the command with no config_num
value; for example ‘set model m1 config’. When no new
configuration is loaded, the current configuration settings will
be in effect for any jobs sent to model . To see which
configuration, if any, will be loaded at the start of a job, use the
command ‘list model’ or ‘list model ’.
set model from default
Set all model settings back to factory defaults.

348

Set Commands

set model from stored
Set all current model settings to the values stored in flash
memory.
set prn [-]autofd
Example: set prn -autofd
Assert or do not assert the AUTOFD line for carriage return
insertion. This only affects printers that support this function,
such as impact printers.
set prn flush
Flush the data in the parallel port input and output buffers.
set prn unlock
Release the access lock on the parallel port.
set prn timeout |none
Example: set prn timeout none
Terminate the print job sent to the parallel port if it is not printed
after the timeout period in minutes expires. The
value ranges from 0 though 255, with 0 indicating no timing out
to take place. This is the default setting and should be fine for
most print setups.
set prn [-]opost
Example: set prn -opost
Allow or disallow output processing on the parallel port such as
carriage return insertion (e.g., onlcr).
set prn [-]onlcr
Example: set prn -onlcr
Enable or disable carriage return insertion on the parallel port.
This may be needed for Unix text jobs coming through with
solitary linefeeds. This feature is almost always set at the
model level rather than the I/O port level.
set prn xtab |none
Example: set prn xtab none
Set the tabstop width as indicated by . The range is 1
through 16 spaces.
set prn from default
Set all parallel port settings back to factory defaults.
349

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

set prn from stored
Set all current parallel port settings to the values stored in flash
memory.
set snmp
To add a user named snmp with root privileges, follow the steps
below:
1. Login to the Ethernet Interface as a root user.
2. Add a user named snmp:
set user add snmp
3. Set the user type to root:
set user type snmp root
4. Set the password for the snmp user:
set user passwd snmp snmppassword
5. Save the changes:
save
The user snmp is now created and snmppassword is the only
community string which will allow write access.
set snmp manager
The Ethernet Interface continuously generates traps. To set the
Ethernet Interface to send traps to a particular SNMP manager,
use this command to add an SNMP manager to the trap table.
is the index number of the trap table. is
the IP address of the SNMP manager receiving traps.
is the community string sent along with the
trap information.
set snmp trapport
Set the UDP port number in the SNMP trap manager table.
This value should correspond to the port number monitored by
the SNMP manager application running on the host at the IP
address specified in the ‘set snmp manager’ command.
is the index number of the SNMP trap manager table.
is the desired UDP port number. Acceptable
values are 162, and 49152 through 65535.

350

Set Commands

set snmp trap [-]active
Enable or disable an SNMP trap manager table entry.
is the index number of the SNMP trap manager
table. “active” enables the table entry, “-active” disables the
entry.
set snmp emailaddr
The Ethernet Interface can also send SNMP alert messages to
a desired e-mail address. To specify an e-mail address to send
alert messages to, use this command to add the e-mail address
to the SNMP alert table.
is the index number of the SNMP trap manager table.
is the desired e-mail address of the form
user@domain.com.
set snmp emailformat [-]short
Enable or disable the short e-mail message format for an
SNMP alert table entry. When enabled, the short e-mail format
can be used when messages will be viewed on devices having
a limited display size (a cellular phone or pager, for example).
is the index number of the SNMP alert table. “short”
enables the short e-mail format, “-short” disables it.
set snmp shortmsglen
Specify the length of the short e-mail message format for an
SNMP alert table entry. This command is effective only when
the short e-mail message format for an SNMP alert table entry
is enabled.
is the index number of the SNMP alert table. “length”
specifies the length of the short e-mail message, and has an
acceptable range of 15 to 80 characters.
set snmp email [-]active
Enable or disable sending e-mail alert messages for an SNMP
alert table entry.
is the index number of the SNMP alert table. “active”
enables sending e-mail alert messages, “-active” disables it.

351

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

set snmp alerts [-]all | [[-]warning]
[[-]offline] [[-]mediainput] [[-]mediaoutput]
[[-]mediapath] [[-]marker] [[-]cutter] [[-]barcode]
[[-]scanner] [[-]intervention] [[-]consumable]
[[-]label] [[-]powercart] [[-]rfid]
Example: set snmp alerts 1 warning -cutter]
Specifies which alert groups are enabled for reporting via an
SNMP manager, e-mail alert message, and/or Unix syslog
daemon. See Table 8 on page 101 for a description of specific
printer events belonging to each group.
is the index number of the SNMP manager/alert table.
“-all” disables and “all” enables reporting of alerts in all alert
groups. Individual alert groups can be selectively enabled or
disabled via combinations of alert group switches. For
example, to enable warning alerts and disable cutter alerts for
SNMP table entry 1, enter the following:
set snmp alerts 1 warning -cutter
set snmp syslog [-]active
The Ethernet Interface can also log SNMP alert messages to
the defined SYSLOG host (see the ‘set sysinfo syslog’
command description). Use this command to enable or disable
logging of alert messages for an SNMP alert table entry.
is the index number of the SNMP alert table. “active”
enables alert message logging, “-active” disables it.
set sysinfo contact []
Example: set sysinfo contact Paul_Harris
Set a person or department to contact in case of print server
trouble.
set sysinfo email
Example: set sysinfo email JohnDoe@IBM.com
Define the user email address to receive printer and job logging
information from a particular logpath on the Ethernet Interface.
Email name is the host or IP name of the user.

352

Set Commands

set sysinfo email emailname@domain
Example: set sysinfo email joe@IBM.com
Define the user email address to receive printer and job logging
information from a particular logpath on the Ethernet Interface.
E-mail name is the host or IP name of the user.
Default: Unconfigured.
set sysinfo label|name []
Example: set sysinfo name salesprinter
Set a descriptive name defined by for Ethernet
Interface identification purposes. This is not used in the
operation of the print server in any way.
set sysinfo location []
Example: set sysinfo location salesdept
Set the physical location of the Ethernet Interface. This is for
identification purposes and is not used in the operation of the
print server in any way.
set sysinfo loginfo [-]sys | [-]tcp | [-]ipx | [-]spx
Example: set sysinfo loginfo -sys ipx
Set the Ethernet Interface debugging information type. Usually
this information includes unexpected errors or exceptions from
the print server divided into these groups:
sys

General system messages

tcp

TCP stack messages

ipx

IPX stack messages

spx

SPX stack messages

NOTE: This is not printer or job logging information.
set sysinfo logport null|prn|syslog
Example: set sysinfo logport null
Define to where the debugging information should be sent. This
can be sent to an output device off of the Ethernet Interface I/O
port or to a central TCP/IP host running a SYSLOG daemon.
To set TCP/IP host, use the command set sysinfo
syslog hostIPaddress.

353

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

set sysinfo smtp [port ]
Example: set sysinfo smtp 192.75.11.5 port 25
Define the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server IP
address or domain name and port number where the mail is
stored on your network.
Default: Unconfigured, 25
set sysinfo syslog
Example: set sysinfo syslog 192.75.11.30
Set the IP address of the host running the SYSLOG daemon.
Ethernet Interface debugging or print job and printer logging
information can be sent to that IP address.
set sysinfo dns
Example: set sysinfo dns 192.75.11.2
Set your DNS server IP address so the Ethernet Interface can
resolve host names when used with its built-in Telnet and
ping clients.
set sysinfo descramblekey
Example: set sysinfo descramblekey 1234
Set the key value used for descrambling print jobs that have
passed through Printronix npscramble utility on a TCP/IP host.
This key is a four-digit hexadecimal value obtained from the
host software, npscramble. Within the npscramble source
code, there is a variable called SR_KEY which contains the
default key value. This can be changed to any four-digit value
you would like.
set sysinfo module [[-]novell] [[-]netbios]
Example: set sysinfo module -novell
Enable and disable certain network protocol stacks within the
Ethernet Interface. Sometimes it helps to disable any protocols
you are not using on your network.
NOTE: [ - ] novell option is available on Adapter, Wireless only.
set user add|del
Example: set user add eng
Add or remove a user on the Ethernet Interface defined by
.
354

Set Commands

IMPORTANT

Do not delete the root user, or you will be unable to configure
any further settings on the print server. You will have to go
back to factory defaults to correct this problem.
set user passwd []
Example: set user passwd eng ibm
Assign a password to a defined user on the Ethernet Interface.
set user type root|guest
Example: set user type eng root
Assign root or guest privileges to a particular user defined by
. Guest permissions allow viewing of settings only.
Root permissions allow complete control of the Ethernet
Interface.
set user from default
Set all user settings back to factory defaults.
set user from stored
Set all current user settings to the values stored in flash
memory.
set user passwd snmp
Set the new SNMP R/W community name as the
value.
set var []
Example: set var LANDSCAPE 0x1b 0x26 0x6c 0x31 0x4f
Define a new variable to be used in header, trailer, or switch
strings on the Ethernet Interface and call it .
can be a space-separated list of words,
hexadecimal numbers (e.g., 0x04), or references to other
pre-defined variables. It is easiest to make up the with hexadecimal values, as shown in the example.
NOTE: One variable counts as one element within header and
trailer strings.
Defined variables are referenced in strings by placing a “$”
before the variable name (e.g., set model m1 trailer
$FF).

355

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

set var from default
Set all variable settings back to factory defaults.
set var from stored
Set all current variable settings to the values stored in flash
memory.

List Commands
These commands list the current or working settings for a particular
section within the command shell. To view stored settings in flash
memory, insert stored after list. For example, list prn
shows the current printer settings but list stored prn shows
the settings in flash memory. Normally these should match.
list all
Lists all current settings.
list arp
List the current ARP table that the Ethernet Interface adheres
to in a TCP/IP network.
list dest [destination]
List the current destination settings (e.g., names and mapped
I/O ports, models, and logpaths).
list diff
List the differences between the current settings and the stored
settings in flash memory. Normally, you want these values to
match, so issue a save command followed by a reset
command.
list ifc
List the current UTP interface settings (e.g., link integrity).

356

List Commands

WIRELESS
ADAPTER,
WIRELESS

For the wireless Ethernet, the WLAN interface settings will also be
included. The WLAN parameters display in the following manner,
after the interface list has displayed:
WLAN
ifnum

ssid

mode

channel

antenna

speed

preamble

pmm

defkey

auth

txpwr

opts

Status

Quality

Where:

is the interface number for the WLAN device.
is a 1 to 32 ASCII character string.
is the type of network mode of operation: “adhoc,”
“pseudo,” or “managed.”
is the RF channel being used for communication.
is the type of antenna (“Primary,” “Auxiliary,” or
“Diverse”).
is the speeds being used for communication ([1 2
511], or “auto”).

357

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

indicates the selected preamble length (“long,” “short,”
or “default”).

indicates the power-save sleep-time in milliseconds.
If power-save is disabled (time is set to zero), “normal” (power-save
off) displays.
is the number identifying one of the four encryption
keys, starting from one. Encryption is disabled if “Encryption
disabled” displays.
is the authentication method e.g. open, shared,
kerb, leap.

is a percentage indicating the approximate fraction of full
power.
is a list of options that are enabled (disabled options
are not shown).
is the current access point association status
(“disassociated” or “associated with ”).
indicates the strength or quality (in percent) of the
wireless signal.
NOTE: The “list stored ifc” command does not display the “Status”
or “Quality” lines.
list kerberos
For Wireless Ethernet with Symbol RF cards only.
list key
List the license details and license key number.
list logins
List any active user logins on the Ethernet Interface.
list logpath [logpath]
List the current logpath settings (e.g., names and mapped
destinations).

358

List Commands

list model [model]
List the current model settings (e.g., names and mapped
destinations). List the current model settings (e.g., names and
mapped destinations). With no model parameter, a table of
values for name, type, banner, config and the size in bytes of
header and trailer are shown for all models m1 through m8.
When the model parameter is supplied, the specific bytes used
in the header and trailer are shown, along with the banner type,
data type and configuration number for that specific model.
list mosinfo
List the MOS version
list net
List all current TCP/IP network settings (e.g., IP address and
subnet mask).
list pping
List all the current periodic ping setting.
list prn
List the current parallel port setting (e.g., mode).
list pserver
List the current general print server settings (e.g., print server
name and Novell mode).
NOTE: Novell parameters are listed on Adapter and Wireless
Ethernet Interfaces only.

ADAPTER,
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

list rprinter
List any current RPRINTER definitions.
list snmp
List the Trap Table containing SNMP Managers.
list stored tn
List all the tn protocol settings which are stored in the flash
memory. If there is no valid settings stored in flash then the
default setting are listed. If this is done then an “*” is added to
the word “stored” in the top left corner of the displayed list table.

359

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

list sysinfo
List the current Ethernet Interface system information (e.g.,
contact name and protocol stacks enabled).
list tcpip
List all current TCP/IP network settings (e.g., IP address and
subnet mask).
list test
List the status of output tests on the I/O ports.
list tn
List all current tn protocol settings.
list uptime
Lists how long the Ethernet Interface Card has been up and
running from the last reset.
list user
List the current user definitions (e.g., user names and types).
list var
List all pre-defined variables including any newly created ones.
Any of these defined variables can be referenced in a string by
placing a “$” before the variable name (e.g., set model m1
trailer $FF).

Miscellaneous Commands
These commands do not fall under any specific section of the
command shell, but they are used quite frequently.
cancel jobID
Example: cancel d1prn-10
Remove a job from an I/O port queue. Use lpstat to find a
particular job ID first.
chr
Echo or redirect to an I/O port using the
chr ioport.

360

Miscellaneous Commands

close tcp TCPindexnumber
Example: close tcp 3
Close the a TCP/IP connection between a TCP/IP host and the
Ethernet Interface. The TCPindexnumber can be retrieved
from “debug tcp” output.
disable ioport|destination|printer mgr
Example: disable prn
Disable an I/O port so that queued jobs are not printed, or
disable a destination so jobs cannot be queued to it.
Example: enable printermgr
Enables the printer debug port to allow remote printer
management software to function.
enable ioport|destination
Example: enable prn
Enable an I/O port so that queued jobs are printed, or
enable a destination so jobs can be queued to it.
load [default]
Load the settings stored in flash memory and use them as the
current or working settings. If default is specified as well,
factory settings will be loaded.
lpstat [ioport] [jobID]
Example: lpstat prn
Display active and queued jobs and I/O port status for a given
ioport or jobID. Specifying one of these parameters will
shorten the output and focus on the particular I/O port or print
job specified.
keycode
Determine the hexadecimal value for a key to be used as the
escape character with the Ethernet Interface built-in telnet
command.

361

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

ping [-s] hostIPaddress [datasize [packetnumber]]
Example: ping 192.75.11.30

ping another TCP/IP host specified by hostIPaddress on
the Ethernet Interface network. datasize is the datagram
packet size which defaults to 64 bytes if no size is included in
the syntax and packetnumber is the number of requests to be
sent.
NOTE: To use a host or IP name instead of the address, you must
have set the DNS server on the Ethernet Interface. Use the
command set sysinfo dns... to do this.
reboot
Perform a warm boot or hardware reset to simulate a power-on
reset. This restores current settings to those stored in flash
memory, since the flash memory settings will be read and
loaded into memory upon bootup.
reset
Perform a warm boot or hardware reset to simulate a power-on
reset. This restores current settings to those stored in flash
memory, since the flash memory settings will be read and
loaded into memory upon bootup.
save [default]
Save the current settings to flash memory so they are available
after power cycles. Sysinfo, destination, model, logpath,
variable, user, and I/O port settings will be saved. If default
is specified as well, factory settings will be saved, overwriting
any new settings you have configured.

362

Miscellaneous Commands

start fox|tts|loopb prn
Example: start fox prn
Begin a debugging test on one of the I/O ports on the Ethernet
Interface. The tests available are:
fox

A continuous stream of text sent to the
attached printer. This is a good test for
troubleshooting hardware as long as the
attached printer supports text output.

tts

A continuous stream of Gandalf 400C
TTS-compatible text sent to the attached
printer.

loopb

Loopback test. Any input characters from the
device attached to the I/O port is echoed
back.

stop all|prn
Stop an output test on an I/O port.
telnet hostIPaddress [escapecharacter]
Example: telnet 192.75.11.35
Start a Telnet session with another TCP/IP host specified by
hostIPaddress on the Ethernet Interface network. If
escapecharacter is used, it resets the key sequence used
to exit the Telnet session. It will return you to the telnet> prompt
where you can execute quit. Use the keycode command to
find out exact escape characters if needed. The default
character is CTRL].
NOTE: To use a host or IP name instead of the address, you must
have set the DNS server on the Ethernet Interface. Use the
command set sysinfo dns... to do this.
tn dest destination start|stop
Example: tn dest d1prn start
Set the tn autoconnect flag temporarily to enable (start) or
disable (stop). For more information, see the command “store
tn dest [-]autoconnect” on page 343.
? (Help)
Lists all available commands.
363

Chapter 16 Complete Command List

364

Extra Features

Ethernet Interface Security
There are TCP access lists available to restrict host connections
with the device.

Users And Passwords
The Ethernet Interface supports two user types:
root

Access to everything within the print server
including all configurable settings.

guest

Ability to list settings only.

Passwords can be set for each user type. However, most often you
will just set a password for the root user to protect the Ethernet
Interface configuration. Guest users cannot alter the print server
configuration in any way.
To configure a root password on your Ethernet Interface:
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can
communicate with the print server over TCP/IP. The
commands to set a root password are:
Syntax:
set user passwd username password
save
Example:
set user passwd root your_password_for_root
save

365

Chapter 17 Ethernet Interface Security

2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
adminConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/adminConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type root
for the user ID and press ENTER at the password prompt
(since there is no password by default).
3. At the “Administration Configuration” HTML form that displays,
scroll down to the “Passwords” section.
4. Click within the “Old” field beside the “Root Password” heading
and enter the existing root password. By default, there is no
root password, so you can go to the next step without typing
anything in this field.
5. Within the “Root Password” section, click within the “New” field
and enter the new root password.
6. Within the “Root Password” section, click within the “Confirm”
field and enter the new root password again. Remember this is
case sensitive.
7. Click the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower
the print server to make the new setting take effect.
From this point on, anytime you log in to the Ethernet Interface as
root, you will need to specify this password or your login attempt
will fail.
NOTE: To clear this password or change it, use the same
“Administration Configuration” HTML form. Just enter the
appropriate “Old” password and put in the new one (or
nothing if you do not want a root password any longer). The
commands directly on the Ethernet Interface are:
set user from default
save

366

Reset The Ethernet Password

Reset The Ethernet Password
Occasionally a user will set a root user password on the Ethernet
adapter and then forget it. This is the procedure to reset the root
password back to the default (no password).

IMPORTANT

First determine the number of dip switches on the back of the
adapter, and the Ethernet version from the printer
configuration printout.
Do the appropriate procedure for the type of Ethernet contained in
the printer.

2 dip switches, Wireless Ethernet

See Procedure A, page 367

2 dip switches, Ethernet version greater than 1.1.20.0

See Procedure A, page 367

2 dip switches, Ethernet version less than 1.1.20.0

See Procedure B, page 368

3 dip switches, any ethernet version

See Procedure B, page 368

No dip switches, embedded Ethernet. Any version.

See Procedure C, page 369

ADAPTER,
WIRELESS
ADAPTER

Procedure A
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Flip dip switch 1 down on the Ethernet adapter.
3. Turn the printer on, and wait about 1 minute for the adapter to
boot.
4. Flip dip switch 1 up.
5. Turn printer off, wait 15 seconds, then turn it back on.
6. Re-program the IP address information from the front panel.
NOTE: Steps 1 – 5 also clears the IP address information and
SSID and sets the adapter back to the factory default.
7. Type the following at the telnet prompt:
set user passwd root
save
reset
367

Chapter 17 Ethernet Interface Security

8. Wait about 1 minute for the adapter to reboot after the reset
command.
9. Turn the printer off, wait 15 seconds, and turn the printer back
on. Wait 1 minute for the adapter to boot.
10. Telnet back into the adapter, logging in as root with no
password, and pressing Enter.

Procedure B
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Flip dip switch 2 down on the Ethernet adapter.
3. Turn the printer on, and wait about 1 minute for the adapter to
boot.
4. Telenet to the adapter.
5. Login as root and press Enter for the password.
6. Flip dip switch 2 up.
7. Type the following at the telnet prompt:
set user passwd root
save
reset
8. Wait about 1 minute for the adapter to reboot after the reset
command.
9. Turn the printer off, wait 15 seconds, and turn the printer back
on. Wait 1 minute for the adapter to boot.
10. Telnet back into the adapter, logging in as root with no
password, and pressing Enter.

368

TCP Access Lists

Procedure C
1. Turn the printer on.
2. Take the printer offline and unlock the front panel by pressing
the up and down arrows keys at teh same time, then releasing.
3. Press all four arrow keys (up, down, prev, next) at the same
time, and release.
4. Press the right (next) arrow until PRINTER MGMT appears.
5. Press the down arrow and then the right (next) arrow until
“E-NET to DEFAULT” appears.
6. Press Enter.
7. Re-program the IP address information from the front panel.
NOTE: Steps 1 – 5 also clears the IP address information and sets
the adapter back to the factory default.

TCP Access Lists
Within TCP/IP environments, the Ethernet Interface can restrict
host access to destinations/queues and remote command (e.g.,
rsh, rcmd, remsh, and telnet) execution services. This is done using
an access list similar in function to the Unix .rhosts file.
NOTE: Access list settings are not configurable through the HTML
forms provided with the Ethernet Interface.
To view the current access list on the print server:
1. Start a Telnet session with the Ethernet Interface.
Syntax:
telnet EthernetInterfaceIPaddress
2. Log in as root and press ENTER at the password prompt
since there is no password by default (or your password for
your home set).
3. List the current access list.
Syntax:
List tcpip
369

Chapter 17 Ethernet Interface Security

If the list is empty, all hosts have access to the Ethernet
Interface services. If there are entries in the list, only those
hosts specified have access to printing and remote command
execution.
To add and delete access list entries, the commands are:
Syntax:
store tcpip tcp access add|del hostIPaddress|
networkaddress
reset
where hostIPaddress is the IP address of a TCP/IP host on
your network and networkaddress is the address of a subnet on
your network.
Example:
store tcpip tcp access add 192.75.11.25
store tcpip tcp access add 192.75.12.0
store tcpip tcp access del 192.75.11.25
reset
NOTE: Although the maximum number of entries in the access list
is 10, each entry can refer to a network rather than a
specific host. This allows all hosts on that specified network
and any individual hosts specified in the list to have access.

370

Printer And Print Job Monitoring

Printer Monitoring And Logging
The Ethernet Interface allows you to monitor printer status and log
information through its built-in HTML forms, command set, and
logpaths.

Printer And Print Job Monitoring
To view the current status of an I/O port on the Ethernet Interface,
two methods are available:

•

select the desired I/O port on the “Status” HTML form
(i.e., http://EthernetInterfaceIPaddress/
indexStatus.html; e.g., http://192.75.11.9/
indexStatus.html) that comes with the Ethernet Interface.

•

enter the lpstat command directly on the print server once
logged in as guest or root.

In each case, you are given a description of each I/O port status
and a list of queued jobs. Table 13 describes some of the common
terms you may encounter.

Table 13. Key Printer Logging Terms
Term

Description

idle

There is no job queued for the Ethernet Interface
I/O port.

blocked

The printer is not allowing the Ethernet Interface
to send data to it. Check that there is not a printer
error and it is online and ready to go.

waiting

The Ethernet Interface knows about a print job
but is waiting for the host to send more data or to
send an expected packet.

371

Chapter 17 Printer Monitoring And Logging

Printer Logging Through Logpaths
In the Ethernet Interface product manual, destinations are
described as logical queues with associated models and logpaths.
Models determine if any extra processing is needed with the print
jobs passing through, and logpaths determine whether any logging
is needed for each job.
Each logpath on the Ethernet Interface consists of two parts:
TYPE

The type of log information to be captured.
The choices are job for job ID and username,
user for user ID (and three messages per
job), pgcnt for total pages printed in a job,
cksum for file checksums, printer for
special printer feedback, and ioport for
parallel printer status messages.

PORT

Where this log information will be sent to. The
choices are a TCP port number (e.g., 2000),
an email address (including an alias), or a
central host running a SYSLOG daemon.

To view the current logpath settings on the print server:
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can
communicate with the print server over TCP/IP or using Telnet
(e.g. Telnet ipaddress). The command to view the logpath
settings is:
Syntax:
list logpath
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type in
root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt
since there is no password by default.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL
http://EthernetIPaddress/destConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/destConf.html).
NOTE: If prompted for a “User ID” and password first, type in
root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt
(since there is no password by default).
372

Printer Logging Through Logpaths

3. At the “Print Path Configuration” HTML form that displays,
select a destination link (e.g., d1prn) from the top of the page to
bring up the appropriate destination form.
4. Once the desired destination HTML form displays, scroll down
to the “Logpath Type” and “Logpath Port” sections to view the
current logpath settings for this particular destination.
At this point, you can alter any of these settings and then click the
SUBMIT button to store them into the Ethernet. Remember to
repower the Ethernet to make the settings take effect.

Ethernet Interface Naming Schemes
A single I/O Port destination can be configured with a variety of
model and logpath combinations. For instance, once you set the
parameters for m1 and l1, you can assign the model and logpath to
more than one I/O port destination such as d1prn, d2prn, and
d8prn. You may now use the same set of model and logpath
parameters more than once without having to redefine those
parameters each time for another I/O Port destination.

373

Chapter 17 Ethernet Interface Naming Schemes

374

Glossary

ARP

Address Resolution Protocol. Associates a
selected IP address with a network device
Ethernet address.

bps

Bits per second.

Centronics

Parallel port interface standard found on
most printers.

daemon

A continuously running process that
handles system-wide functions like print
spooling.

default router

Local device that forwards any IP packets
destined for another subnet.

destination

Logical print queue on the Ethernet to
which hosts send their print jobs. There
are eight destinations by default.

DHCP

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
Allows a network device to discover its IP
address dynamically upon bootup. The IP
address does not need to be stored within
the device itself permanently.

Download Mode

Refers to the condition of the Ethernet
when in a startup condition, downloading
configuration information.

DNS

Domain Name Server. Host providing
responses to queries for a given host
name IP address.

EEPROM

Electrically Erasable/Programmable ReadOnly Memory.
375

376

factory defaults

Settings shipped with the Ethernet.

Factory Settings

S2 jumper position stating all factory
default settings are to be used while the
Ethernet is up and running.

Firmware Panic

Unrecoverable errors detected by the
Ethernet firmware force the Print Server
into Firmware Panic mode. Manually reset
the Ethernet to resume operation.

Flash

Stores firmware code and configurable
settings. Allows for upgrades without
replacing hardware inside the Ethernet.

FTP

File Transfer Protocol. Used for
transferring files from one TCP/IP host to
another and used in the upgrade process.

gateway

A hardware device that translates data
between two incompatible networks.

gateway address

The IP address of a gateway.

Hardware Exception

Bus errors, address errors, and illegal
instructions force the Ethernet into this
non-operational mode.

HTML

HyperText Markup Language. Format
used for documents viewable on the World
Wide Web.

ifnum

Interface Number. Represents the network
interface. With an Ethernet, this will always
be “1.”

interface script

Unix host filter file that processes the print
job before it is sent over the network to the
Ethernet.

I/O port

Port for attaching peripherals to. The
Ethernet provides four: PRN1, PRN2,
COM1, COM2.

IP Address

The Internet Protocol Address. A numeric
address such as 123.45.61.23 which
identifies a printer or server in a LAN or
WAN.

LAN

Local Area Network.

LED

Light Emitting Diode. The printer has an
LED display which shows the status of the
printer to the operator.

logpath

Determines the type of print job and printer
logging needed per job. One logpath is
associated with every destination.

LPD/LPR

Line Printer Daemon. The most common
TCP/IP remote printing protocol that
crosses all hardware utilizing IP.

MAC

Machine Address Code.

MIB

Management Information Base. A set of
variables (database) managed by an
SNMP manager application.

model

Defines how a print job should be
processed (e.g., banner pages added,
ASCII to PostScript conversion) as it
passes through the Ethernet. One model is
associated with every destination.

NetBIOS

Network Basic Input Output System.
Common interface among PC networks.

Monitor Mode

Refers to the condition of the Ethernet with
no configuration or IP address loaded.

npsh

Extensive built-in command shell within
the Ethernet.

PDF

Portable Document Format. Encodes
different types of documents enabling
them to be read across multiple platforms.

377

378

Persistent DHCP

When this option is enabled, the IP
Address, Gateway, and Subnet Mask
obtained through DHSP is saved. If the
DHCP server does not provide an
address, the device will use the previously
saved DHCP IP address. This option only
works when DHCP is enabled. The default
disable.

ping

Standard command to test a TCP/IP
connection. (e.g., ping 192.75.11.9)

print path

Three-stage path a print job takes when it
is sent from a host to a printer through the
Ethernet.

protocol

A set of rules or conventions governing the
exchange of information between
computer systems or between a printer
and a host computer. For computer
printers, a protocol is the coding
convention used to convey and print data.
A printer protocol includes codes for
printing text and graphics, as well as codes
instructing the printer to perform special
operations and machine-to-machine
communication codes.

PSERVER

Print Server. A Novell print method where
the Ethernet continuously polls the Novell
file server print queue looking for print
jobs.

RAM

Random Access Memory. Volatile memory
within the Ethernet that contains current/
working settings. Settings are lost once the
power is removed.

RARP

Reverse Address Resolution Protocol.
Allows a network device to discover its IP
address dynamically upon bootup. The IP
address does not need to be stored within
the device itself permanently.

ROM

Read-Only Memory.

router

A device that forwards IP packets to their
destination. Also called a gateway.

RPRINTER

Remote Printer. A Novell print method
where the Ethernet waits for jobs to be
sent to it from a defined PSERVER.

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol. A
standard protocol used to monitor network
devices called “SNMP agents.”

socket

TCP connection between two hosts
consisting of a source and destination TCP
port number at each end.

subnet mask

A binary value used to divide IP networks
into smaller sub-networks or subnets. This
mask is used to help determine whether IP
packets need to be forwarded to other
subnets.

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol. Suite of protocols that act as the
base protocol for the Internet.

TCP port

A logical connection point in the software
of a TCP host or device. When two IP
devices talk, they establish a socket which
consists of a source and destination TCP
port number on both ends.

telnet

Command and protocol to establish a
terminal connection between two hosts on
an IP network.

379

380

UTP

Unshielded Twisted Pair. A cable used for
telephone and computer-to-computer
connections.

WAN

Wide Area Network.

Index
Symbols

Speed, 79
Transmit Power, 79

*LAN 3812 SNMP

User, 80

configuration instructions, 309
Device Description, 309
? command, 328

Numerics
10/100Base-T

A
Access lists, TCP, 369
Access methods, npsh, 327
Activation Timer (ACTTMR), 310

indicators, 42

Add preferred file server, 193

Novell Ethernet Interface

Additional information, 317

configuration, 192

ADDTCPIFC, configuring with, 225

Novell host configuration, 204

ADDTCPRTE, router definition, 227

RPRINTER/NPRINTER setup,

Administration
configuration, 105

troubleshooting, 218
speed setting, 47

Contact, 106

troubleshoot printing, 220

Description, 106

troubleshooting, 215

DNS Server, 107

Wireless Network Indicator, 44

Email, 107
Location, 106

802.11b, 78
Antenna, 79

Name, 106

Authentication Method, 80

Passwords, 108

Channel, 79

Printer Serial Number, 106

Default Key, 80

SMTP Server, 107

Key, 79

Syslog, 107

Mode, 78

System information, 105

Network Name, 78

AFP file printing, 241

Options, 79

Agent model, printer monitoring, 319

Password, 80

AIX

Power Management Mode, 79

NetView/6000, monitoring, 322

Preamble, 79

printing, 165
381

Index

AIX 4, Ethernet configuration, 161

BOOTP, Unix, 147

AIX 4.x setup, 166

Browse Ethernet Interface,

AIX, remote queue time-out setting, 163

troubleshooting, 136

Alert groups, 100

Alternatives, configuration, 72

Change destination names, Ethernet

Antenna, 802.11b, 79
APR, Ethernet Interface, 144

Interface, 116
Change Ethernet Interface frame type

ASCII
configuring iSeries, 225
setting up for printing, 228
ASCII Troubleshooting, iSeries, 237
Authentication Method, 62
Authentication Method, 802.11b, 80
Auto Connect, TN5250/3270, 96

Bindery setup, 200
NDS setup, 200
Change Ethernet Interface mode
Bindery setup, 201
NDS setup, 201
Change Ethernet Interface name
Bindery setup, 198

Auto reset mode, 42
Automatic remote output queue, iSeries, 231

NDS setup, 198
Channel, 802.11b, 79

B
Bindery PSERVER setup

Cisco LEAP, 66
Coax Printer Support FMD, 283

NetWare 3.x, 208

Command

NetWare 4.x, 208

?, 328

NetWare 5.x, 208

complete list, 328

Bindery setup
change Ethernet Interface frame type, 200

getting help, 328
Command list

change Ethernet Interface mode, 201

List commands, 304

change Ethernet Interface name, 198

store commands, 303

password security, 195

TN5250, 303

polling time, 197

TN5250/3270 Auto Connect

preferred file server, 192

382

Command, 304

Index

Command prefixes, 328
npsh, 327
Command Shell, 327
ways to access, 69

Configuration instructions
*LAN 3812 SNMP, 309
Activation Timer (ACTTMR), 310
Configuration example, 313

Commands

Device Class (DEVCLS), 309

list, 356

Device Model (MODEL), 309

miscellaneous, 360

Device Type (Type), Device Type
(Type), 309

set, 344
store, 329

Font (FONT) = 011, 310

Communcation routers, Windows, 114

Form Feed (FORMFEED), 310

Configuration

Host Print Transform

Administration, 105

(TRANSFORM), 311

alternatives, 72

Inactivity Timer (INACTTMR), 311

Encryption Key, 62

LAN Attachment (LANATTACH), 309

Equivalent Wireless Ethernet

Manufacturer Type and Model

Interface, 66

(MFRTYPMDL), 311

Ethernet for AIX 4, 161

Port number (PORT), 310

front panel, 53

Printer Error Message

IP Address, 58
Log Path, 91
Network, 76
Print Model, 88
Print Path, 84
PSF for IPDS on V3R7 or V4RI, 246
PSF for IPDS on V4R2 and above, 252
SNMP, 97
System, 108

(PRTERRMSG), 310
Remote Location
(RMTLOCNAME), 311
System Driver Program
(SYSDRVPGM), 312
User-Defined Options
(USRDFNOPT), 312
Workstation Customizing Object
(WSCST), 312

TN5250/3270, 93

Configuration menu, Ethernet Interface, 74

wireless Ethernet Interface, 58

Configuration Screens, TN3270E, 297

Wireless Parameter, 59

Configuration tools, 52

Configuration checklist, MVS, 266

Configuring for a *LAN 3812 SNMP Device

Configuration example, 313

Description, 309

383

Index

Connecting to the network, 51

destinations, 40

CRTLINETH, line descriptions, 223

guest user, 365

D
Default Key, 802.11b, 80
Define LPR printer, error, 135
Destination settings, Print Path, 84
Destinations

HTML structure, 69
installation, 51
naming schemes, 373
NDS content, NDS setup, 202
passwords, 365
preferred NDS tree, NDS setup, 203

Ethernet Interface, 40
models, 40

queues, 40
root user, 365

Device Class (DEVCLS), 309
Device Description, *LAN 3812 SNMP, 309
Device Description, TN5250/3270, 95
Device Model (MODEL), 309
Device Type, TN5250/3270, 96
Direct socket printing, 165
Document conventions, 48

security, 365
Set NDS content, 202
Set preferred NDS tree, 203
special features, 36
users, 365
verification, 57
Ethernet, configuration for AIX 4, 161

E
Encryption Key Configuration, 62
Equivalent Wireless Ethernet Interface
Configuration, 66
Errors, defining LPR printer, 135
Ethernet Interface, 35
cannot be found, 134

F
Font (FONT) = 011, 310
Font Identifier, TN5250, 307
Form Feed (FORMFEED), 310
Front panel, configuration, 53
FTP, 72
FTP printing, 163

cannot be found on network,

troubleshooting, 167
card type, 36

Getting Help command, 328

change destination names, 116

Getting started, NIC with AS400 running

configuration (10/100Base-T), Novell, 192

TN5250, 304

configuration menu, 74

Guest user, Ethernet Interface, 365

configuration, Windows, 112
384

Index

Installation Solaris 7, 151

Help command, getting, 328

Installation, Ethernet Interface, 51

Home page, URL, 69

IP Address Configuration, 58

Host configuration

IPDS

Novell, 176

configuration checklist, iSeries, 242

Unix, 149

configuration, verify on iSeries, 259

Host IP, TN5250/3270, 94
Host Print Transform (TRANSFORM), 311

file printing, 241
printer, configuring on iSeries, 241
iSeries

Host setup
Windows 2000, 118

ASCII HTTP problem, 240

Windows 9x, 132

ASCII troubleshooting, 237

Windows Me, 132

automatic remote output queue, 231

Windows NT 3.51, 131

configuring as an IPDS printer, 241

Windows NT 4.0, 126

configuring for ASCII, 225

Windows XP, 118

configuring for printing, 228

HP-UX, 150

CRTLINETH, 223

HTML

hostname, 227

forms, 69

IPDS configuration checklist, 242

forms, Novell, 175

local domain, 227

method, print server setup, 196

network sharing, 260

structure, Ethernet Interface, 69

printer sharing parameters, 261

HTTP, troubleshooting, 139

printing AFP files, 241
printing IPDS files, 241

printing SCS files, 241

I/O Port, status, 109

remote printer queue name, 228

IBM Network Printer Manager (NPM), 325

TCP/IP access problem, 238

IBM Printing Systems, 110

TCP/IP host table entry, 228

Inactivity Timer (INACTTMR), 311

troubleshooting, 262

Indicators, 10/100Base-T, 42

verify IPDS configuration, 259

Installation

verify printing, 236

HP-UX, 150
SCO, 152
Solaris 2.6, 151
385

Index

iSeries troubleshooting
cannot PING the printer, 262

Manager model, printer monitoring, 319

clipped data, 264

Manual (Telnet) method, print server setup, 196

PSF terminates when initialized, 263

Manual LPR/LPD Host setup, 159

spooled files disappear without

Manual system, V Host setup, 149

printing, 264
spooled print file remains in PND
status, 263

J
Job formatting, TN5250, 305

Manufacturer Type and Model
(MFRTYMDL), 311
Message Queue Library, TN5250/3270, 95
Message Queue Name, TN5250/3270, 95
MIB, 320
Microsoft TCP/IP printing, 140
Miscellaneous commands, 360
Mode

Kerberos, 67

802.11b, 78

Parameters, 63

auto reset, 42

Key, 802.11b, 79

run, 42

L
LAN Attachment (LANATTACH), 309

TN5250/3270, 94
Models, 40

LEAP, 66

setting a formfeed, 170

Line descriptions, CRTLINETH, 223

setting onlcr, 169

List commands, 356
TN5250, 304
Log Path
configuration, 91

Monitoring
print job, 371
printer, 371
MVS

Logpath Port, 92

configuration checklist, 266

Logpath Type, 91

define printer to JES, 272

Name, 91

JES spool printer sharing, 278

Logging, printer, 371

port switching printer sharing, 280

Logical printer architecture, 38

printer connection, 271

Logpaths, printer logging, 372

requirements, 265

LPR/LPD Host setup, 159
386

Index

password security, 195

Naming schemes, Ethernet Interface, 373

polling time, 197

NDPS configuration, NetWare 4.11 and

reference a Bindery queue, 208
RPRINTER/NPRINTER setup, 209

above, 212
NDS PSERVER setup

NetWare 5.x

NetWare 4.x, 205

Bindery PSERVER setup, 208

NetWare 5.x, 205

NDS PSERVER setup, 205
no PSERVER connection, 189

NDS setup
change Ethernet Interface frame
type, 200
change Ethernet Interface mode, 201
change Ethernet Interface name, 198
Ethernet Interface NDS content, 202
Ethernet Interface preferred NDS
tree, 203
password security, 195

password security, 195
polling time, 197
reference a Bindery queue, 208
RPRINTER/NPRINTER setup, 209
NetWare Version 3.x
Pserver setup, 176
RPrinter setup, 179
NetWare Version 4.x

polling time, 197

PSERVER setup, 182

preferred file server, 192

RPRINTER setup, 185

NetBIOS TCP/IP, Windows Network, 81
NetWare 3.x
Bindery PSERVER setup, 208
no PSERVER connection, 188

NetWare Version 5.x
PSERVER setup, 182
RPRINTER setup, 185
Network

password security, 195

configuration, 76

polling time, 197

connection, 51

reference a Bindery queue, 208

Ethernet Interface cannot be

RPRINTER/NPRINTER setup, 209

found, 134

NetWare 4.11 and above, NDPS

Novell, 82

configuration, 212

sharing, iSeries, 260

NetWare 4.x

status, 110

Bindery PSERVER setup, 208

TCP/IP, 76

NDS PSERVER setup, 205

Network Name, 802.11b, 78

no PSERVER connection, 189

Network Printer Manager (NPM), IBM, 325

387

Index

NIC
reset password, 367

Parameters, Kerberos, 63

running AS400 with TN5250, 304

Password security

No extra page, troubleshooting, 170

Bindery setup, 195

No form feed, troubleshooting, 170

NDS setup, 195

Novell

NetWare 3.x, 195

environment, 173

NetWare 4.x, 195

Ethernet Interface configuration, 174

NetWare 5.x, 195

Ethernet Interface configuration
(10/100Base-T), 192

Passwords, 108
802.11b, 80

file server, 83

Ethernet Interface, 365

frametype, 82

reset, 367

Host configuration, 176

PMU, 323

host configuration, 10/100Base-T, 204

Polling time

HTML forms, 175

adjusting, 197

NDS, 83

Bindery setup, 197

Network, 82

NDS setup, 197

Pserver, 83

NetWare 3.x, 197

Rprinter, 83

NetWare 4.x, 197

service type, 83

NetWare 5.x, 197

troubleshooting, 187
Npsh

Port number (PORT), 310
Port, TN5250/3270, 95

access methods, 327

Power Management Mode, 802.11b, 79

command prefixes, 327

Preamble, 802.11b, 79

O
Onlcr, 169
Options, 802.11b, 79

Preferred file server
adding, 193
Bindery setup, 192
NDS setup, 192
removing, 194
Prefixes, command, 328
Print job monitoring, 371

388

Index

Print Model

logging through logpaths, 372

Banner Page, 89

monitoring, 371

configuration, 88

sharing parameters, iSeries, 261

Filter, 89

status screen, 71

Header String, 89

varying, 315

Model Type, 88

Printer Error Message

Name, 88

(PRTERRMSG), 310

Printer Configuration, 90

Printer Inventory Manager, TN3270E, 288

Trailer String, 90

Printer management implementation, 319

Print Path
Back Channel, 84

Printer management utility (PMU), 323
Printer monitoring

Banner Page, 86

Agent model, 319

configuration, 84

Manager model, 319

destination settings, 84

MIB, 320

Filter, 86

SNMP, 322

Header String, 86
Log Path Port, 87

tools, 322
Printing

Log Path Type, 87

AIX, 165

Model Type, 86

ASCII, 228

Name, 84

configuration, iSeries, 228

Printer Configuration, 87

direct socket, 165

Selected Log Path, 87

FTP, 163

Selected Model, 85

troubleshooting, 168

Services, 85
Trailer String, 86
Print server setup
HTML method, 196
manual (Telnet) method, 196
Printer
errors, 136

verification, iSeries, 236
Problem
iSeries ASCII HTTP, 240
iSeries ASCII Web browser, 240
Problem areas, 316
Program materials, TN3270E, 284
PSERVER setup

ethernet card type, 36

NetWare Version 4.x, 182

logging, 371

NetWare Version 5.x, 182

389

Index

PSERVER setup (10/100Base-T),
troubleshooting, 215

SCO setup, 152

Pserver setup, NetWare Version 3.x, 176

SCS file printing, 241

PSF for IPDS

Security, Ethernet Interface, 365

on V3R7 or V4RI, configuring, 246

Set commands, 344

on V4R2 and above, configuring, 252

Setup, AIX 4.x, 166

Q
Queues
Ethernet Interface, 40
models, 40

Shell, command, 327
SNMP, 322
Alert groups, 100
configuration, 97
Email alert posting, 98

manager alert posting, 97

RARP, Unix, 146

SNMP community name, 323

Reference a Bindery queue in NDS

SNMP support, 309

NetWare 3.x, 208

Solaris 2.6, 151

NetWare 4.x, 208

Solaris 7, 151

NetWare 5.x, 208

Special features, Ethernet Interface, 36

Remote shell, 72

Speed setting, 10/100Base-T, 47

Remove preferred file server, 194

Speed, 802.11b, 79

Resource Name, TN5250/3270, 95

Stair-stepped output, troubleshooting, 169

Root user, Ethernet Interface, 365

Start/Stop Auto Connect, TN5250/3270, 96

Routers, Unix, 148

Status

RPRINTER setup

I/O Port, 109

NetWare Version 4.x, 185

menu, 109

Netware Version 5.x, 185

Network, 110

RPrinter setup, NetWare Version 3.x, 179

Status screen, printer, 71

RPRINTER/NPRINTER setup

Store commands, 329

NetWare 3.x, 209

TN5250, 303

NetWare 4.x, 209

Syslog alert posting, 98

NetWare 5.x, 209

System configuration, 108

Run mode, 42
390

System Driver Program (SYSDRVPGM), 312

Index

Auto Connect command, 304

TCP access lists, 369

configuration, 93

TCP/IP

Device Description, 95

access, troubleshooting, 137

Device Type, 96

configuring iSeries for ASCII, 225

Host IP, 94

network, 76

Message Queue Library, 95

TCP/IP access problem

Message Queue Name, 95

iSeries, 238

Mode, 94

Unix, 170

Port, 95

TCPIP Configuration, TN3270E, 287

Resource Name, 95

Technical support, 134

Start/Stop Auto Connect, 96

Telnet, 72

WSCST Library, 96

Telnet commands, TN5250, 303

WSCST Name, 96
Tools, printer monitoring, 322

TN3270E
Configuration Screens, 297

Transmit Power, 802.11b, 79

Printer Inventory Manager, 288

Troubleshooting

Programs materials, 284
TCPIP Configuration, 287

(10/100Base-T) RPRINTER/
NPRINTER, 218

VTAM Definitions, 285

10/100Base-T, 215

z/OS Configuration, 283

10/100Base-T printing, 220
cannot browse Ethernet Interface on

TN5250
command list, 303

Network, 136

Font Identifier, 307

defining LPR printer, 135

job formatting, 305

Ethernet Interface cannot be

running AS400, 304
set up connection device via
telenet, 302

found, 134
Ethernet Interface cannot be found on
Network, 167

set up print queue on iSeries, 301

HTML configuration forms, 135

Telnet commands, 303

HTTP, 139

user supplied values, 303

iSeries, 262

TN5250/3270
Auto Connect, 96

NetWare 3.x, no PSERVER
connection, 188

391

Index
NetWare 4.x, no PSERVER
connection, 189

Users, Ethernet Interface, 365
Using ARP, Windows, 112

NetWare 5.x, no PSERVER

connection, 189
no extra page, 170
no form feed, 170

V Host setup, manual system, 149
Varying on the Printer, 315
Verification, Ethernet Interface, 57

Novell, 187
printer errors, 136

VTAM Definitions, TN3270E, 285

printing, 168
PSERVER setup (10/100Base-T), 215
stair-stepped output, 169
TCP/IP access problem, 137

problem, 240
troubleshooting, 139

Unix, 167

Web server, overview, 73

Web browser, 139

Windows

Windows, 134

communication routers, 114

Windows 2000 Host setup, 139

configuration, 111

Windows NT 4.0 Host setup, 139

environment, description, 111

U
Unix
crossing routers, 148
environment, 143
Ethernet Interface configuration, 144
Host configuration, 149
manual system V Host setup, 149
TCP/IP access problem, 170
troubleshooting, 167
using APR, 144
using BOOTP, 147
using RARP, 146
URL, home page, 69
User, 802.11b, 80
User-Defined Options (USRDFNOPT), 312

392

W
Web browser

Ethernet Interface configuration, 112
mandatory configuration, 112
optional configuration, 112
troubleshooting, 134
using ARP, 112
Windows 2000
Host setup, 118
Host setup, troubleshooting, 139
Windows 9x, Host setup, 132
Windows Me, Host setup, 132
Windows Network (NetBIOS TCP/IP), 81
Windows NT 3.51, Host setup, 131
Windows NT 4.0
Host setup, 126
Host setup, troubleshooting, 139

Index

Windows XP, Host setup, 118
Wireless
Cisco LEAP, 66
Kerberos, 67
Wireless Ethernet Interface
Configuration, 58
Wireless Network Indicator, 44
Wireless Parameter Configuration, 59
Workstation Customizing Object
(WSCST), 312
WSCST Library, TN5250/3270, 96
WSCST Name, TN5250/3270, 96

Z
z/OS
communications control unit, 268
connectivity problems, 280
define printer to PSF, 273
printer sharing, 278
printing IPDS, 267
TCP/IP profile, 268
verifying TCP/IP-attached printer, 277
z/OS Configuration, TN3270E, 283

393

Index

394

Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You
Infoprint 6500 Series Line Matrix Printers
Ethernet Interface User’s Manual
Publication No. G550-0440-00
Overall, how satisfied are you with the information in this book?
Very Satisfied

Satisfied

Neutral

Dissatisfied

Very
Dissatisfied

Overall satisfaction

How satisfied are you that the information in this book is:
Very Satisfied

Satisfied

Neutral

Dissatisfied

Very
Dissatisfied

Accurate

Complete

Easy to find

Easy to understand

Well organized

Applicable to your tasks

Please tell us how we can improve this book:

Thank you for your responses. May we contact you?

h Yes

h No

When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Name
Company or Organization
Phone No.

Address

G550-0440-00

_________________________________________________________________________________

Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You

Cut or Fold
Along Line

Fold and Tape
Please do not staple
Fold and Tape
__________________________________________________________________________
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST-CLASS MAIL

PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

IBM Corporation
Information Development IBM Printing Systems Department
H7FE
Building 004N PO Box 1900 Boulder, CO
80301-9817

__________________________________________________________________________
Fold and Tape

G550-0440-00

Please do not staple

Fold and Tape

Cut or Fold
Along Line

Printed in USA

G550-0440-00

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Modify Date                     : 2005:05:13 10:05:59-06:00
Create Date                     : 2005:04:26 14:28:36Z
Page Count                      : 398
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Has XFA                         : No
About                           : uuid:035383a0-0717-4419-8571-501c792fe179
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Creation Date                   : 2005:04:26 14:28:36Z
Mod Date                        : 2005:05:13 10:05:59-06:00
Author                          : ly_ju
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 6.0
Metadata Date                   : 2005:05:13 10:05:59-06:00
Document ID                     : uuid:e8269eca-f502-4b70-9789-f7d93aefbf42
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : ly_ju
Title                           : IBM_UM_6500_Ethernet_177655A.book

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Ibm Infoprint 6500 Users Manual IBM_UM_6500_Ethernet_177655A

6500 to the manual a5fcfa45-3cfc-4d89-a5b6-258def6b4f68

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation